Home

BBEdit 6.5 User Manual - Colorado State University

1. 243 Switching Between Source and Header Files 243 obell WORK NEET anit ee m ab dime s ey he HORAE e RE 243 Perl Python atid Snell Scr pine sa oa sivas data oet ehe e sows 245 Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 245 e Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X 245 Language Resources 246 Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts 247 Camel Shebang Menu 247 e Filters and Scripts 250 Filters 250 Scripts 251 e Additional Notes 251 e Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior 005 252 Using the CodeWarrior Menu 252 Working With MPV cc desctss cont dnpcnsg Br s sie Suey ae ras ened tear tS 253 BBEdit and ToolServer 254 BBEdit and Projector 256 xi xii Chapter 15 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C BBEdit Plug Ins 265 Using BBEdit Plug Ins oun rgo tor ege Rate e s 265 The Tools Menu and Floating Window 266 The Set Key Button 266 Supplied TINE Nea eren de Ee DEOR EC RU RI ed Se 267 Add Remove Line Numbers 267 Columnize 267 e Concatenate 267 Configure TeX Coloring 267 Convert to ASCII 267 Clear Lines Containing 268 e Copy Lines Containing 268 Cut Lines Containing 268 e Educate Quotes 269 Hex Dump 269 Make Prototypes 269 e Prefix Suffix Lines 269 Reverse 269 eSend PostScript 269 e Sort 269 Un Comment 269 Tira Pany T 109 105 oucricsed teenth eed qu vs ett tara eehes 2
2. Browsers Browsers are special kinds of windows that let you see a lot of information about files at once Browsers typically have two panes one pane lets you select a file the other displays detailed information about the file often its contents If you have used the Batch Find option in a multi file search you have already seen an example of a BBEdit browser In this chapter Browser Overviews 24e se a oper ipi ek ace tee n ele eee ew de UL Boi ek ee 141 List Pane 141 Status Bar 142 Text View Pane 142 Splitter 142 DISK BEOWSODS Gcr tace te aro eO ae S e m WES xd 142 Using Disk Browsers 143 Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 144 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 144 oearchdsesulis DEOWSOEPS 05 gen iesu dicet Baron Ra are dave iatie ica een 145 Error Results DEIOWSerS ada S ra tein dede Mae Toe Xue do o Rasa 146 Browser Overview All BBEdit browsers share the same basic structure and behavior All browsers have a status bar a file list and a text pane List Pane The top pane of a browser lists the items available in the browser This pane shows different information for different kinds of browsers Browser File List pane contains Disk browser Files and folders that BBEdit can open Search results File and line number of each match Error results or File line number and status message for each general results condition You can open both files and folders from the list pane W
3. Character Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements w Anchor Image Break Font Paragraph Div Heading 7 Dreamweaver Block Elements w Inline Elements w UE Table 7 Forms v Phrase Elements w Font Style Bements w Frames Y Check Syntax Check Links Update Balance Tags Check 7 Update 7 Includes v Utilities 7 Misc 7 Preview v floating palette and through the Markup pull down menu These two methods are functionally equivalent in most respects Most beginning users find it easiest to use the HTML Tools through the palette There are three basic types of buttons on the HTML Tools Palette e Those you simply click to perform an action or bring up a settings dialog before performing an action e g New Document or Table Builder e Those that provide pop up menus containing related options e g Heading Frames and Utilities e Those which contain both a clickable button and a pop up list e g List Table or Preview Buttons containing a gripstrip a double vertical bar on the left hand side may be used via drag and drop For example the Image button may be dragged into a document window to display the Image tool dialog Subsequently the specified lt IMG gt tag is placed at the point where the button was dropped Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Tip You can Command click a pop up
4. Escape Matches NA only at the beginning of the document as opposed to which matches at the beginning of the document and also at the beginning of each line b any word boundary defined as any position between a w character and a W character in either order B any position that is not a word boundary Z at the end of the document as opposed to which matches at the end of the document and also at the end of each line Z at the end of the document or before a trailing return at the end of the doc if there is one Examples the text matched by the pattern is underlined Search for Will match Will match Won t match Search for Will match Will match Search for Will match Won t match bfoo b bar foo bar foo bar foobar bJane b Jane s Tell Jane about the monkey NAfoo foobar This is good foo Writing Search Patterns 115 116 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters The character class construct lets you specify a set or a range of characters to match or to ignore A character class is constructed by placing a pair of square brackets around the group or range of characters you wish to include To exclude or ignore all characters specified by a character class add a caret character just after the opening bracket For example Character Class Matches xyz any one of the characters x y z xyz any character except x y Z a z any character in
5. 174 Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog 175 Multi File Search and Replace 175 e Grep Patterns 175 Tools Preferences 4 Vac eb v ex EUN DUM acit AUR e tm d 175 Script Editor 175 e Coding Tools 175 Mac OS API Reference 176 Preferred Reference 176 Windows Preferences eee 176 BBEdit HTML Tools 177 Introduction to the HTML Tools esee 178 Recommended Books 178 Recommended On Line Resources 178 SGML Resources 179 What You Need 179 Configuring the HTML Tools 5uas adero cette 180 Using the BBEdit HIML Tools Ire n 180 Creating a New Document 181 LETEMBIOOLDOSCEIDIIQOES ea mt ue ato aco E 183 Tag Maker 184 Edit Tag 185 Document Type 186 Character Set 186 e CSS Submenu 186 Body Properties 190 e Head Elements 190 Block Elements 191 e Lists 193 e Tables 193 Forms 194 e Inline Elements 196 Phrase Elements 199 Font Style Elements 200 e Frames 200 e Check 201 Update 202 Includes 203 Utilities 204 e Misc 205 Preview 206 The ELEME Tools Pa lees 4s esce Bue ERROR Eee 207 HTML Tools Palette Tips 207 HTML Tools Palette 207 Other Palettes 209 EET Wik Translation s edo ede Eod a ha eed ohne ieee en 210 Templdles ooo ci iis dope Sot Ro Aid edna eee wae eens 211 Custom Ma UD cepe a sch aw sented on Slaves eet cete n inb ac
6. Custom Markup Neither the Custom Markup tool supplied in versions of BBEdit prior to 5 0 nor any plug ins created with this tool will work in BBEdit 6 5 The types of functions performed by the Custom Markup tool may be accomplished more effectively with OSA AppleScript or Frontier scripts BBEdit s Glossary command or via some combination of these 212 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools CHAPTER Using the Glossary This chapter describes BBEdit s Glossary command The Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort Its ability to perform keyword substitution combined with an option to run OSA scripts and insert their results further extends its usefulness In this chapter The Glossaty Command s isa abb x ha RCRTRPPRE REED RES EYE Ed re 213 Language Sensitivity of the Glossary eee 214 Manually Sorting the Glossary assorat 3202 014 P bcc oe boe aee e dea gc 214 Using th Glossary 24 4 ago Pare RUE Bee Ego EORR dol baia ee eO ol 214 The Set Key Butts a vc oar op kc c y ls ba ace a Iob dee ee arn 215 Glossary DIDSULDHIDOEDIS reret 9p ERR eoe ach ace Soe Re RR s 216 Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary s 25 sess eres 217 The Glossary Command BBEdit s powerful Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort whether this is sections of program code HTML markup or just about anything else you want The Glossary s new language sensitive s
7. File New Disk Browser File Print All File Save All Utilities Translate File Close All Text Hard Wrap Search Go To Previous Error Search Go To Next Error Text Twiddle Words Utilities Format Compiler Set Breakpoint amp Go File New with Clipboard File Save a Copy to FTP Server Edit Printing Options Edit Copy amp Append Search Find Again reverse Search Find Selection reverse Compiler Set Breakpoint Search Go To Center Line File New with selection File Open from FTP Server File Print One Copy File Save to FTP Server File Close amp Delete Edit Cut amp Append Edit Redo Text Shift Left One Space Text Shift Right One Space Listing by Default Key Equivalents 281 282 Appendix A Command Reference APPENDIX Editing Shortcuts In BBEdit you can perform many editing functions including word selection or deletion directly from the keyboard Chapter 4 contains complete details on BBEdit s text editing features This appendix is a quick reference to available keyboard and mouse shortcuts for word selection and deletion In this appendix Mouse Command sa a dup i e cour PP eol up db MEUS se 283 Arrow and Delete Ke yS o 3 fab huele qd ct Ne RORIS UR Rode Pe d RTL D ae 284 Emacs Key DInGines lt d obs ru bx RV eR DEVE ERE aree tu 285 Mouse Commands No Modifier Shift Click move insertion point extend selection Double click select word
8. e Copy to MPW folder Drag the items in this folder to the same folder as the ToolServer application e Copy to MPW Tools folder Drag the items in this folder to the Tools folder that s in the same folder as the ToolServer application e Copy to MPW Scripts folder Drag the items in this folder to the Scripts folder that s in the same folder as the ToolServer application Once you have dragged the items to the appropriate places in your ToolServer folder delete the ToolServer Support folder Next if you open the BBEdit Support folder you will notice that it contains a folder called ToolServer Tools You can place MPW tools or aliases to MPW tools in this folder When BBEdit starts up it scans the contents of this folder for MPW tools and text files and adds them to the ToolServer menu left After you install the ToolServer files make sure that you activate the ToolServer option in the Tools panel of the Preferences BBEdit Support Folder This section describes the arrangement of BBEdit s support folders These are the locations that BBEdit scans when you launch it to locate a variety of items which add additional functionality such as plug in tools spell checker dictionaries and more All these folders are contained in a folder called BBEdit Support which must be present in the same folder as the BBEdit application In previous versions of BBEdit all of these folders some with slightly different names were individually lo
9. 109 e Apply to Old 109 e Find in Reference 109 Find Definition 109 Searching with Grep 111 Charges m DDEdIE 9 5 4 95 00 seaweed eS eb TOP ores 112 What is Grep or Pattern Searching slssessssn 112 Recommended Books and Resources 000005 112 Writing Search l all ers si etre ote s eO Ore oed b eb dg 113 Most Characters Match Themselves 113 Escaping Special Characters 113 Wildcards Match Types of Characters 114 e Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 116 Matching Non Printing Characters 117 Other Special Character Classes 118 e Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 118 e Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 119 e Creating Subpatterns 120 Using Alternation 121 e The Longest Match Issue 122 Non Greedy Quantifiers 122 vii viii Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Writing Replacement Patterns eee cere eed oduwoe tke 123 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 123 e Using the Entire Matched Pattern 124 Using Parts of the Matched Pattern 124 Case Transformations 125 EXAD PICS ies Rive BORG RATES es dap tata E Me Oa du aides 126 Matching Identifiers 126 Matching White Space 126 e Matching Delimited Strings 127 Marking Structured Text 127 e Marking a Mail Digest 128 e Rearranging Name Lists 128 Advanced Grep TOpICS cst task o veta pue and Qo wh ea 129 Matching Nulls 129 e
10. Convert to Client Side Map Converts the selected text which should be a server side image map file in NCSA server format to a client side image map You must specify a name for the converted imagemap Break Enters a line break tag BR into the document If multiple lines are selected a line break tag will be inserted after each Font Selects the font size and or color for the selected text This tag is deprecated and should generally not be used stylesheets are a more flexible and more content oriented way of achieving this end Base Font Selects the default font size and or color for the text in this document Like FONT this tag is deprecated it is considered better form to use stylesheets Bidirectional Override Inserts a lt BDO gt tag to note that the enclosed text is in a language that should be rendered in a different direction either left to right or right to left than the default text order for the document s primary language You can specify the desired text order and the language so that savvy browsers can switch fonts or script systems to display the text correctly Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Quotation Marks the selected text as a quotation Use this only for short quotes within a paragraph use lt BLOCKQUOTE gt for quotations consisting of a paragraph or more of text Span Marks the selection as belonging to a certain class of information such as a book title usually so its text styl
11. MONTHDAYNUM MONTHNUM PATH PREFIX REAL_URL RELATIVE ROOT ROOTPATH SERVER SHORTDATE TIME TITLE USERNAME YEARNUM Replaced By The machine name as specified in the Sharing Setup or File Sharing control panel In Mac OS X this returns localhost rather than the name specified in the Sharing panel in System Preferences This is a bug in the OS Any META tag entered using the New HTML Document command Modification date of the current file e g 07 Oct 01 Modification time of the current file in the format specified in the Date amp Time control panel Numeric value of the day of the month Numeric value of the current month Path to access your documents from the Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site Preferences As DIRPATH but does not strip the leading slash of the path The real URL for the current document in its current location The relative path from the current file back up to the Local Server Root inserts a path of the form J to tell the browser to back up to the site s root directory Path to the Local Site Root as specified in your HTML Web Site Preferences The file s path relative to the Local Server Root specified in the HTML Web Site preferences to the current file URL of your Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site Preferences Short Date Day month year e g 07 10 01 Current time in the format specifi
12. Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to show the complete pathname of recently opened files rather than just their names in BBEdit s Open Recent submenu If a recent file is missing only its name will appear regardless of this setting Application Preferences 149 150 Remember Dialog Box Placement Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit remember the location of the Find dialog and most other dialogs between sessions If you turn the checkbox off BBEdit will open dialogs at a default location every time you use them Window Menu Show Full Paths Mark this checkbox to show the complete pathname of open documents rather than just their names in BBEdit s Window menu Group by Window Kind Mark this checkbox to group windows of the same kind together in the Window menu For example text editing windows disk browsers and search results browsers are all different kinds of windows Within each group windows will be sorted as determined by the Sort Windows By radio buttons to the right If you turn the checkbox off all windows are listed together sorted as determined by the Sort Windows By radio buttons Sort Windows by Choose Name to sort windows alphabetically by name Choose Creation Order to show the windows in the order they were created or opened in the current BBEdit session Verify Open Files After If you frequently make changes to files with another program while they are open in BBEdit or yo
13. The first item on the list though is inheritance item This tells you that a window is a kind of item and that it therefore has all the properties of an item Take a quick look at item s class definition shown below BBEdit Suite add line breaks change caze compare decrement quote level detab BBEdit 6 5 Dictionary 4 Class item an OSA object Properties properties record 7056 ayes pages ies ID integer r o ayes emos s container reference r o andeo i eae Sap entab find grep substitution hard wrap increment quote lewel insert glossary entry remove line breaks replace rewrap quoted text shift strip quates zap gremlins enm application ET bez You will see three properties properties ID and container The first entry properties is a record containing all the object s properties In other words because a window is an item it has in addition to all its listed properties another property which returns all the other properties as a record a single piece of data that can be stored in a variable Every class in BBEdit is part of a hierarchy with the item class at the top so every object in BBEdit inherits the properties property This catch all property can be handy for making exact duplicates of objects among other uses You may realize that BBEdit has several kinds of windows you can see their classes listed in the dictionary clipboard window differences window disk browse
14. gt folder specified in the Preferences should be searched for the file You may use the following wildcards in the Open File by Name dialog if you activate the Match Wildcards checkbox Wildcard Meaning Any single character j Any number of characters Any numeric character Escapes one of the above To enter a literal backslash use Chapter 3 Working with Files Note WARNING Opening From and Saving to FTP Servers BBEdit can open files from and save them to Internet FTP servers To open a file choose Open from FTP Server on the File menu The following dialog appears Bookmarks www barebones com 7 Server Passive FTP index html 4 New Dir gt www barebones com index2 html z User Name press html fan 3 products products html Password iy robots txt f Get Info sitemap html special offer html PD M C Remember Password p Delete OB Auto UConnect 8 U Show Files Starting with eco if E f i l Disconnect Cancel kal Show Document Icons Enter the name of the server and specify your user name and password in the appropriate fields then click the Connect button to initiate an FTP transaction You can also select the Go To button to bring up a dialog in which you can type the exact pathname of a directory to view BBEdit now allows you to open an FTP connection on ports other than the default port 21 To speci
15. select Ptr select Handle If the selected text in your editing window is MyStruct and you insert this glossary entry this is what BBEdit inserts in the editing window typedef struct MyStruct MyStruct MyStruct Ptr MyStruct Handle The blinking insertion point will be at the position indicated by the vertical bar in the text above Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary The keyword script filename provides a powerful means to insert variable or conditional content by allowing access to any compiled OSA script from a Glossary item The script itself can either be located in the same folder as the glossary item which calls it in which case you need only specify its name e g MyDateScript or you can supply a full pathname to a script on any mounted volume e g Hard Drive My Project Scripts MyDateScript An instance of a keyword referencing the latter would be Script Hard Drive My Project Scripts MyDateScript The script must return a text string or a value that can be coerced to a string This result string can itself contain additional Glossary keywords which will be interpreted before the entry is placed into the current document It is possible to call additional scripts in this manner by nesting them with the first however you should take care not to create a script execution loop which would hang your system Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary 217 218 Chapter 12 Using the Glossar
16. C Source cp HTML Glossary html PropertuList Glossary plist Universal tems WML Glossary wml The file list pane displays all of the disks on the Finder desktop If you click a disk in the file list pane the text pane displays all the items on the disk that BBEdit can open You can also open a disk browser starting at any particular folder by dragging that folder onto BBEdit s icon in the Finder Using Disk Browsers The controls in the disk browser let you open files and folders limit the kinds of files to show in the list pane and navigate through your disks and folders Show pop up menu The pop up menu on the upper left section of the list pane lets you specify the kinds of files you want BBEdit to list in the browser You can select All Available meaning all types of files BBEdit recognizes that it can open or Any File which will display every file present in a folder regardless of type or kind You can also select from one of the more specific types listed below text files PICT files QuickTime movies QuickTime images BBEdit file groups and MacPerl runtimes stand alone Perl applications Directory Pop up Menu This pop up always shows the currently selected folder When a disk browser is first opened this will usually be the Desktop folder i e the invisible folder in which all items that appear on the desktop are stored If you have opened any volume or folder within a volume the current fol
17. P Cancel 2 Click the Files radio button 3 Use the New and Old pop up menus to select the files you want to compare If the files you want to compare are already open they ll appear in the pop up menus Otherwise you can select them by clicking the Other button next to one of the pop up menus or by dragging the files icons from the Finder into the New and Old boxes in the Find Differences dialog You can also select recently opened files from the Recent Files item on the pop up menu The terms new and old are used for convenience since most often you will want to compare the changes in the same file across time However the Find Differences feature can be used to compare any two files 4 Select the Compare options that apply When the Case Insensitive option is selected BBEdit considers uppercase and lowercase letters the same When Ignore Curly Quotes is marked BBEdit treats typographers quotes the same as straight quotes When one of the Ignore Spaces option is selected BBEdit ignores any tabs and spaces at the beginning or end of lines or runs of more than one space See below for an explanation of Don t List Identical Files 5 Click Compare to perform the comparison Comparing Text Files 71 If the two files are different BBEdit tiles the windows for the two files side by side and opens a Differences window below them E index html E index html Hi Imm MEL pP AN E Jmm ARE i mm
18. Python is a portable interpreted object oriented programming language originally developed by Guido van Rossum If you are interested in learning Python consider the following books Learning Python by Mark Lutz amp David Ascher O Reilly and Associates 1999 ISBN 1 56592 464 9 Programming Python 2nd Edition by Mark Lutz O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00085 5 Internet resources for Python Python home page http www python org Python Cookbook http aspn activestate com ASPN Cookbook Python comp lang python Usenet news group Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts To execute scripts the script interpreter for any given language requires source code to be encoded with native line endings Mac line breaks for MacPerl and Unix line breaks for Unix Perl and the other shell scripting languages on Mac OS X BBEdit will automatically make sure that the script source sent to each interpreter matches its line ending expectations This means that on Mac OS 9 and earlier BBEdit will send scripts to MacPerl with Mac line endings regardless of the line endings of the file on disk and on Mac OS X BBEdit will always send scripts to Perl Python and other script interpreters with Unix line endings You can thus save your scripts and filters with whatever line breaks you choose and BBEdit will do the right thing behind the scenes to make sure the interpreter for each language gets the line endings it expects This als
19. User Manual BBEdit 6 5 Professional HTML and Text Editor for the Macintosh Bare Bones Software Inc Product Design Product Engineering Engineers Emeritus Quality Assurance Documentation Additional Engineering Mac OS X icons PCRE Library Package PopupFuncs Technology Installer VISE Visibone color arrangements SpellWright Spelling System BBEdit 6 5 Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Jim Correia Steve Kalkwarf Jim Correia Jon Hueras Steve Kalkwarf Rich Siegel Chris Borton Lindsay Davies Tom Emerson Pete Gontier Brad Hanson Erling Johansen Scott Marcy Jamie McCarthy John Norstad Jon Pugh Mark Romano Leonard Rosenthol Rob Vaterlaus Akikaze Media Services Micah Bly Christian Smith Patrick Woolsey John Gruber Jerry Kindall Philip Borenstein Simon Jester Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Polaschek Computing lt http www polaschek computing com gt Ultra Maroon Design written by Philip Hazel 1997 2000 University of Cambridge England Eric Slosser courtesy of MindVision Software http Awww mindvision com 1999 2000 VisiBone lt http www visibone com gt 1994 Lex Tek International BBEdit and the BBEdit User s Guide are copyright 1992 2001 Bare Bones Software Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Bare Bones Software Inc P O Box 1048 Bedford MA 01730 01048 781 687 0700 781 687 0711 fax http www barebones
20. When this command is active the menu item will change to Stop Recording and a tape icon will flash over the Apple menu When you choose Stop Recording BBEdit will display a Save dialog which allows you to save a script file containing the recorded actions Scripts Palette The Scripts List command which opens a floating window listing the available scripts is now located in the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Manually Sorting the Scripts List By default items in the Scripts List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Save All would sort before 01 Close All For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Attaching Scripts to Menu Items BBEdit now lets you attach scripts to menu items By this we mean that you can write scripts that BBEdit automatically calls before or after performing a menu command For example if you want BBEdit s Open From FTP Server command to launch your favorite FTP client you can simply attach a script to that menu item Scripts can return a value that tel
21. none none none Cmd Ctl X none none none Update Document Folder Site Document Images Folder Images Site Images Utilities Format Format Optimize Translate Remove Comments Remove Markup Comment Uncomment Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper Case Make Tags Lower Case Preview With Preview as Text in All Running Browsers installed browser listing Cmd Ctl U none none none none none Cmd Opt Shift F none none Cmd Opt T none none none none none none none none none n a Listing by Default Key Equivalents Key Command Cmd Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Search Find in Reference Cmd ToolServer Cancel Current Command Cmd Edit Preferences Cmd Search Replace Cmd A Edit Select All Cmd B Text Balance Cmd C Edit Copy Cmd D File Open File by Name Cmd E Search Enter Search String Cmd F Search Find Cmd G Search Find Again Cmd H Search Find Selection or Hide BBEdit Cmd l Compiler Debug Cmd J Search Go To Line Cmd K Compiler Compile Cmd L Edit Select Line Cmd M Markup Tag Maker Cmd N File New Text Document Cmd O File Open Cmd P File Print Cmd Q File Quit Cmd R Compiler Run Cmd S File Save Cmd T Search Replace amp Find Again Cmd U Compiler Bring Up To Date Cmd V Edit Paste Cmd W File Close Cmd X Edit Cut Cmd Y Compiler Check Syntax Cmd Z Edit Undo Listing
22. shift ARGV my args ARGV my Sarea Sargs length Sargs width print Filename file n print Area Sarea n When you run the Update command BBEdit will place the filename in the script s variable file and the length and width variables in the associative array hash Joargs After the update the BBEdit file will look like this Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Warning 1 bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt Filename Mac HD Desktop Folder sample html Area 6 lt end bbinclude gt In addition BBEdit will pass information about the current HTML Tools settings to the script in the following environment variables BBEditServerURL BBEditServerPath BBEditDefaultFileName BBEditTemplateDirectory BBEditRootDirectory BBEditLowercaseTags BBEditLowercaseAttributes BBEditAlwaysQuoteAttributes To access these in your Perl code use the ENV environment variable hash For example this line of Perl will print the web server name specified in your BBEdit HTML Web Site preferences print SENV BBEditServerURL Other Include Notes Older versions of BBEdit supported the use of include as an alternative to bbinclude However this syntax made it difficult to mix BBEdit includes and Microsoft Active Server Page ASP directives so it is no longer supported If you have existing documents which use the older syntax simply change include to
23. By default BBEdit recognizes over 20 different languages and several dozen suffix mappings You can add new suffixes to map to existing languages or by writing a syntax coloring plug in add syntax coloring support for new languages as well All the specific languages that BBEdit recognizes and the suffixes or extensions it expects for them are listed in the Languages panel of the Preferences and can also be changed there You can choose the colors that BBEdit uses for syntax coloring in the Text Colors panel of the Preferences window Font amp Tabs You can choose the font font size text style and tab spacing for a window by choosing Font amp Tabs from the Text menu The Font amp Tabs dialog shown here appears Font amp Tabs Font Monaco m d OK 3 Size 9 9 Cancel W Plain 1 Bold O Outline C Condensed italic O Shadow 1 Extended C Underline Set tabs every 4 spaces You can choose the desired font font size and style using controls in this dialog You can also tell BBEdit how many spaces occur between each tab stop The chosen display style will be used for all text in the window BBEdit does not support the use of selective text styles Font amp Tabs 57 58 Note The changes you make here only affect the current document This dialog s settings will be saved with the document if you choose BBEdit State information when saving To set the default font size style and tab information for new docum
24. Font Style Big Small Bold Italic Strike Through Teletype Text Underline Cmd Ctl T none none none none none none none none none none none none none Cmd Ctl A Cmd Ctl I none none none none none none none Cmd Ctl B none Cmd Ctl F none none none none none none none none none none none none none Forms Form Button Field Set Legend Input Label Select Option Group Option Text Area Phrase Abbreviation Acronym Citation Computer Code Deleted Text Defined Term Emphasis Inserted Text Input Text Kbd Sample Output Strong Emphasis Variable Frames Frame Set Frame No Frames none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none Listing by Menu and Command Name 277 Check Document Syntax Document Links Folder Syntax Folder Links Site Syntax Site Links Balance Tags Includes Persistent Include Include Placeholders Misc Dreamweaver Document Size Index Document Index Folder Index Site GoLive Cleaner HomePage Cleaner PageMill Cleaner Appendix A Command Reference Cmd Ctl Y Cmd Ctl K none none none none Cmd Opt B none none none none
25. Guesses list or type it yourself in the Replace With box Click the Questioned Word box to copy it to the Replace With box Then make the correction in the Replace With box This technique is useful if the questioned word is only slightly misspelled and the correct word is not in the Guesses list 5 Use the buttons along the right side of the dialog box to handle the questioned word Skip All Ignore every instance of the questioned word but don t add it to the User Dictionary Add Add the questioned word to the User Dictionary Replace Replace this instance of the questioned word with the text in the Replace With text box Replace All Replace every instance of the questioned word with the text in the Replace With text box Skip Ignore this instance of the questioned word Using the Spelling Checker 75 76 Warning Selecting Active Dictionaries BBEdit uses the American English dictionary by default However you can use multiple dictionaries at a time To configure the built in spelling checker to use additional dictionaries 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu and select the Spelling panel 2 Make sure the Built In option is selected 3 Click the Add button and select an additional supplemental dictionary To stop using a dictionary select it in the list and click Forget Editing the User Dictionary When you use the Add button in the Check Spelling dialog box to add it to your personal dictionary the sp
26. Note Introduction to the HTML Tools Please be sure to read both this introduction and the next section Configuring the HTML Tools before attempting to create Web pages using these tools Already the most powerful set of utilities ever created for the World Wide Web developer the BBEdit HTML Tools are even more powerful in version 6 5 The HTML tools streamline the process of creating HTML documents help you check for common usage errors and speed up development time without sacrificing flexibility or forcing you to work within the limits of visual editing tools Some of the most important improvements to the HTML Tools should be transparent to you All of the tools now support entry and editing of double byte text The HTML Tools will also automatically recognize and insert tags in the correct format when used in XHTML documents Anyone preparing HTML files in UTF 8 format may want to save them without the byte order mark due to a bug in Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 for the Macintosh This should be addressed in a future version of Internet Explorer The BBEdit HTML Tools and their documentation are written with the assumption that you already understand HTML If you don t we suggest one or more of the following references None are published by or otherwise affiliated with Bare Bones Software Inc but other BBEdit users have found them useful for HTML usage and design issues Recommended Books Learning Web Design Jennife
27. Shell Worksheet opens a new shell worksheet using your default shell as set in the Tools panel of your preferences Shell Worksheet opens a dialog listing all the Unix shells installed on your system choose from the list and a new shell worksheet will be opened using that shell Shell worksheets are only available on Mac OS X Creating and Saving Documents 21 When you want to save the new document you have created 1 Choose the Save or Save As command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Save As directory dialog On Mac OS X Save BBEdit Where Documents m fa lt lt lt lt lt BE Desktop p a E 6 5 Grep Changes etx 3 Documents b 2 Acrobat User Data E Library La im Movies j Le Music v praem h S O Save as Stationery f Options gt Save Selection Only f NewFolder Add to Favorites On Mac OS 9 and earlier Save BBEdit Cj Examples Date Modified In c CompositeClassDriver 972871999 NW KeyboardMadule 5 10 2000 5 MouseModule 10 4 1999 NW PrinterClassDriver 1of4 1999 ag Univer salttodule 972671999 CI usEKeypad 10 47 1999 a iossvis9a Name untitled O Save as Stationery Save Selection Only s 2 Give the file a name 3 Change any desired options see below 4 Click Save to save the file 22 Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Save As Options BBEdit s Save
28. The table below summarizes the most common commands you can use at this point This command Does this Find Again Finds the next occurrence of the search string without displaying the Find dialog again To reverse the search direction hold down Shift Replace Replaces the selection with the replace text Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selection with the replace string and looks for the search string again Basic Searching and Replacing 93 94 Note Search Settings The checkboxes in the Find dialog box let you control how BBEdit searches your document for the indicated text You can set the defaults for many of these settings in the Text Search section of the Preferences Use Grep When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats the search and replace strings as Grep patterns Otherwise BBEdit searches the document for text that matches the search string as it appears literally and will replace any matched text with the replace string To learn more about pattern searching see Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Start at Top When this checkbox is selected BBEdit always starts searches from the beginning of the document Choosing this option will disable the Wrap Around and Search Backwards settings Wrap Around When this checkbox is selected BBEdit continues searching from the beginning of the document if a match isn t f
29. To get the most out of this function you should already be familiar with MPW s source management functions Before you start make sure SourceServer support is enabled in the Tools panel of the BBEdit Preferences BBEdit now supports SourceServer when running on Mac OS X but since Projector is only available for Mac OS 9 you must run Projector under the Classic Environment Previously you had to mark a checkbox when opening a file or in the Preferences to have BBEdit recognize Projector information attached to a file Starting with version 5 1 BBEdit always recognizes Projector state information and this feature can no longer be disabled Check In Checks the source file in the frontmost window or some other file into the project The local copy will be deleted The Check In dialog appears Check In none selected l r File Task Description C Keep Modifiable C Check In as Branch U Delete after Checking In U Touch after Checking In W Verify Contents l Cancel File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the rectangle displaying the file path Task Description A notes field that can be used to record the reason the file was checked out Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Keep Modifiable Check this box to allow you to continue to edit the file after it has been checked in Use t
30. bbinclude to use them with BBEdit 6 5 Include Files 295 296 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Index Symbols RELATIVE 290 A A anchor tag 196 ABBR tag 199 active windows 44 ActiveX controls 197 Add amp Compile command 253 Add command 253 Add Remove Line Numbers plug in 267 ADDRESS tag 192 alternation 121 AppleScript 14 20 and searching 101 attaching scripts to menu items 238 in HTML documents 212 293 pitfalls 230 reading dictionary 226 recording 224 scripts menu 237 updating to BBEdit 6 231 APPLET tag 197 Application Preferences 149 Apply to New command 109 Apply to Old command 109 AREA tag 198 Arrange command 87 arranging windows 87 arrow keys 284 ASCII conversion 267 ASCII table 84 attaching scripts to menu items 238 auto indent 55 automatic backups 38 B bold tag 200 backgrounds in HTML documents 190 backups 37 automatic 38 manual 38 backward searching 94 Balance Tags command 202 balancing parentheses 55 58 BASE tag 182 190 BASEFONT tag 198 B cont batch find 95 96 BBEdit Dictionaries folder 12 BBEdit extensions see plug ins BBEdit Glossary folder 12 BBEdit Plug ins folder 12 BBEdit Scripts folder 14 BBEdit Startup Items folder 12 BBEdit state information 24 BBEditShutDown file 254 BBEditStartup file 254 BBEditStartup e411 file 254 BBEdit Talk mailing list 113 BDO tag 198 bi directional override 198 BIG tag 200 Block Elements submenu 191 BLOCKQUOTE ta
31. eoo untitled shell C e B New Document q quick overview of the things you can do from within a Worksheet i Select the line below and hit either Enter or Command Re turn ls l total 8 drux 12 admin staff S64 Oct amp 15 41 Desktop dru z admin staff zb4 Oct 8 15 55 Documents druwx 22 admin staff TE Oct 8 16 86 Library druz z admin ztaff zb4 Oct amp 15 55 Movies druz z admin staff zb4 Oct 8 15 55 Music 8 drws 45 admin staff 1485 Oct 17 18 Pictures dewr rE 3 admin staff zb4 Hug 21 13 34 Public dewr rE 4 admin staff zb4 Hug 21 13 34 Sites 3 A You can run more than one command at a time by selecting multiple lines and pressing Enter or Command Return The output will appear beneath the selected lines You can delete and edit lines in a worksheet window just like you can in regular BBEdit text windows If you select a string only the exact selection range will be executed Otherwise the entire line that the insertion point is on will be executed even if the insertion point is in the middle of that line Keep in mind that shell worksheets are not terminal windows If you have ever used MPW or BBEdit s MPW ToolServer Worksheet you will probably feel right at home using shell worksheets If you are only familiar with terminal emulators however you will find that shell worksheets work quite differently Command line editing gestures don t work nor w
32. insertion point at the proper location for typing a value Insert Attribute alink background bgcolor class onclick ondblclick ankeydown onkeypress Cancel Edit Tag Another way to add or edit the attributes of a tag is to place the cursor inside the tag and choose Edit Tag from the Markup menu or the HTML Tools palette Choosing Edit Tag displays a dialog appropriate to editing the most common attributes used with the current tag The dialog shown is for a BODY tag Dialogs for other tags will look different Body Properties Background f File Addressing Full 5 Root Relative C BGColor IL 1 E Text mum FFFFFF 900000 U Link mum m ALink li VLink NNI O000FF O0FFOO FFOOFF new in 6 5 Edit Tag also works with CSS Choose Edit Tag while the insertion point is within a selector s property or value and BBEdit will display an appropriate dialog for editing many common properties HTML Tool Descriptions 185 new in 6 5 Document Type Choosing Document Type brings up a dialog which allows you to select the desired document type DTD for the current document If the document already contains an SGML lt DOCTYPE gt declaration this will be used as the default You may choose any of BBEdit s supported document types or enter one of your own Character Set Choosing Character Set brings up a dialog which allows you to enter a character set specification for the current
33. lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss Gestal tManager gestal tmanager htmL Gestalt Manager lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss LowMemoryAccessors lLowmemoryaccessors html gt Low Memory Accessors lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss MemoryManUti Li ties memorymanagementuti Lities html gt Memory Management Uti Lities lt a gt lt br gt Multi File Searching 97 The items at the top of the window tells you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as specifying whether there were any error conditions or warnings generated during the search You can display or hide any combination of errors warnings and matches by checking the appropriate options The middle panel lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit this list may be a Finder style hierarchical list where each match in a file is listed under the file s name as shown above or a flat list where each occurrence is simply displayed in order Every match is identified by file name and line number To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane You cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit a file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit and the specified file will open at the point where the associated match occurred After you have opened a file you can use
34. tags Preview The Preview commands allow you to view your creation in a browser You can choose a browser from the Preview With submenu or use Preview by itself to use the last chosen browser You can also preview the page in all running browsers or in a text only format On Mac OS X browsers running in the Classic environment are labeled Classic Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools The HTML Tools Palettes The main HTML Tools Palette is the place from which you will probably access the HTML Tools most frequently You can invoke the HTML Tools palette at any time by selecting it from the Palettes sub menu in the Window menu BBEdit remembers which palettes you had open when you quit so if you open the HTML Tools palette it will remain open until you close it again even on subsequent uses of BBEdit The default HTML Tools Palette is shown to the left You can choose the buttons to be displayed on this palette in the HTML Palette preferences HTML Tools Palette Tips A list of all the tools that are available on the HTML Tools palette appears below In most cases their behavior corresponds obviously with the Tool Descriptions in the last section In the few cases where there are significant differences these are noted Many of the tools also work with drag and drop Those that do are marked with grip strips two vertical slashes at the left side of the button You can drag these tools into your document to have them take effect w
35. 151 Auto Indent 152 Balance while Typing 152 Smart Quotes 152 Auto Expand Tabs 152 Show Invisibles 152 e Syntax Coloring 153 Soft Wrap Text 153 File Filters Prererences oie d oet eo egeat PAPER PA n 153 File Search Preferences 252eduxcciibeer eee X v E ER bee S 154 Find All Matching Files 154 e Skip Folders 154 e Follow Folder Aliases 154 Default lt gt Directory 154 e Unix Search Paths 154 File Types PrelereneBs usq esos oos Pn EE e NaS 155 Lonts Preferences asumach eiua edet P ra odo tease tates Gabe 155 PUP Settings T TOletelic OS uus met rete no sue sewer ene yee s 156 Remember Passwords 156 Store Passwords in Keychain 156 e Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags 157 List FTP Files on the Open Recent Menu 157 Passive FTP 157 e Show Document Icons 157 e Show Files Starting with 157 e FTP Bookmarks 157 Function Popup Preferences v2 vss URS METER CREE durs 158 Show Includes 158 e Sort Items by Name 158 e Show Function Prototypes 158 Glossary Prelerence So ocius eei lee Couch ees Cae ee d etai es 158 Ignore Trailing CR 158 Glossary is Language Sensitive 158 HIME Colors Preterences outta wa ek aos Lo Sere E ER aaa MOD 158 Color Palette Layout 159 Color Swatch Size 159 e Color Picker 159 HIMEMark p Preferences eere er rd ht ie cei ena 159 HTML Tags 159 e Quoting Tag
36. A stationery pad is a template document that when opened results in a new untitled document with the content from the stationery file In other words you do not edit the stationery document itself you use it as a starting point for a new document To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternately any document can be changed into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window You can create new documents from a stationery pad by opening the pad the same way you would open any other document Or you can choose New With Stationery from the File menu and select the desired stationery pad from the contents of the Stationery folder inside the BBEdit Support folder Or you can use BBEdit s Stationery List which is available from the Windows menu Chapter 3 Working with Files The Stationery List is a floating window that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder in the BBEdit Support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking them in this list To assign a keyboard shortcut to a stationery pad click the Set Key button then type the desired key in the Set Key dialog and click OK Manually Sorting the Stationery By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired ord
37. ACME needs to end with a trademark symbol 1M The following search pattern finds two word combinations that begin with ACME ACME A Za z The following replacement string adds the trademark symbol to the matched text g For example if you start with ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium products and perform a replace operation with the above patterns you will get ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium products Using Parts of the Matched Pattern While using the entire matched pattern in a replacement string is useful it s often more useful to use only a portion of the matched pattern and to rearrange the parts in the replacement string For example suppose a source file contains C style declarations of this type define Util_Menu 284 define Tool_Menu 295 and you want to convert them so they look like this Pascal style const int Util_Menu 284 const int Tool_Menu 295 The pattern to find the original text is straightforward define t t d 0 9 S This pattern matches the word define followed by one or more tabs or spaces followed by one or more characters of any type followed by one or more tabs or spaces followed by one or more digits followed by zero or more characters that are not digits to allow for comments followed by the end of the line The problem with this pattern is that it matches the entire line It doesn t
38. After you have opened the file you can use the Find Again Replace Replace All and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See Chapter 7 for more information on searching Search Results Browsers 145 Error Results Browsers When you use the HTML syntax checker link checker or update tool BBEdit will open an error results browser to display any errors generated by the command BBEdit will also open an error results browser to list compilation errors generated by commands issued to CodeWarrior from the Compiler menu or errors generated by Perl scripts eoo80 HTML Syntax Errors kal 2 Errors kal 1 Warning Mates Open Warning File enror_browser hitmil Line 13 Element lt p gt implicitly closed here Error File error browser html Line 14 Unknown or malformed element lt font gt Error File errar browsar html Line 14 Unknown or malformed close element lt font gt Last Saved 10 08 01 01 22 23 PM X La Ej File Path PS SRL Beo sr hr IDOCTVPE HTML PUBLIC 3C DTD HTML 4 681 EN http uni sw ang TR 19898 REC htmL481 19981224 str ict dtd dhtml head gt ti tle BBEdit Error Browsers lt title gt meta name generator content BBEdit 6 5 gt head body gt h1 BBEdi t Error Browzerzz hl ip Implicitlu closed paragraph tags are frowned upon in HTHL 4 81 stric p gt font size
39. Attributes 159 e XML HTML Markup Rules 159 CSS Markup Formatting 159 HEMEL Palette Preferences 241b eek heri EP OY waded 2400685 160 Palette Width 160 e Button Height 160 Buttons on Main HTML Tools Palette 160 HTML Preview Preferences ooa cec te doped doce eae 160 When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes 160 Web Browsers Available for Preview 161 HIME Tools Preferences 2o e v Rege stint add can ae Su ea 161 HTML Updater 161 Syntax Checker Warnings 161 e Link Checker Warnings 162 ATML Web Site Preferences sv ovo oc ee Sioa S 162 Web Server Name 162 Site Path on Server 162 Default Page Name 162 Local Site Root 162 e Look for Templates and Include Files In 162 Languages Preferences 4 55 poe sedo te pag hanna a acne we 162 Language for Untitled Windows 163 Default Language 163 SoOfbVare UPA ou us en bad wee dee brad ach ea d 163 opellins Preferernoes qu aote sce d v beer ve E id aat 164 Built In 164 Use Dictionaries 164 e Word Services 164 Startup T rere rendes ove ore dee oe Peers Nested wade o 164 State Preferences 1 o6os osx tout he Shree eas etos Ieri dL 165 Honor Saved State 165 Default State for New Documents 166 Always Add State 166 Status Bar Preferences n d sure d OE e E ey dae RE ies du 166 Show Status Bar 166 e Show Philip Bar 166 e Show Tab Stops 167 Show Line Numbers 167 e Show Curso
40. Backreferences 129 POSIX Style Character Classes 131 Non Capturing Parentheses 131 e Perl Style Pattern Extensions 132 Comments 133 e Pattern Modifiers 133 Positional Assertions 135 e Conditional Subpatterns 137 e Once Only Subpatterns 138 Recursive Patterns 140 Browsers 141 DtOWSeE OVCIVICW stds bute edna eei seks SCR enw he Saha d 141 List Pane 141 Status Bar 142 Text View Pane 142 e Splitter 142 Disk DEOWSORS a 2 o5 ade cote d ode arat wind dte e adig Dates ai gie d 142 Using Disk Browsers 143 e Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 144 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 144 Search Results Browsers eee 145 Error Results Browsers eer 146 Preferences 147 The Preferences Command eee 148 Application Preferences srar essem ead R PI PEIPER 149 Optional Application Services 149 Optional Mac OS Services 149 e Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu 149 e Remember Dialog Box Placement 150 Window Menu 150 Verify Open Files After 150 Browser Display Preferences ise ero erp ROI Eden es 150 Results Lists 150 e Show File Icons 151 Differences Preferences eI 151 Arrange Windows On 151 Differences Window Placement 151 e Arrange Windows 151 Multi File Differences 151 Editor Defaults Preferences oo oie cor DITE estan Gris ule
41. Delete Command Deletes all characters backwards to beginning of line Delete Option Deletes all characters back to beginning of word Delete Shift same as Forward Delete Forward Delete none Deletes selection range or character after to the right of the insertion point Forward Delete Command Deletes all characters forward to end of the current line Forward Delete Option Deletes all characters forward to end of word Forward Delete Shift same as Forward Delete alone Note The meaning of the Command and Option modifiers listed above may be exchanged depending on which settings you have selected for Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior in the Text Editing panel of the Preferences Appendix B Editing Shortcuts Emacs Key Bindings The Text Editing panel of the Preferences window contains a checkbox labeled Use Emacs Key Bindings When this option is turned on BBEdit will enable the following Emacs style keyboard navigation commands The Escape Key is specified in lieu of the Emacs Meta key to use these key equivalents press and release the Escape key followed by the specified letter key e g to type Esc V press and release the Escape key then type the letter V Key Sequence Action Ctl A Ctl B Ctl D Ctl E Ctl F Ctl G Ctl K Ctl L Ctl N Ctl O Ctl P Ctl R Ctl S Ctl T Ctl U Ctl V Ctl W Ctl Y Ct beginning of line Move insertion point to start of current line backward char Move ins
42. Finder command opens the Finder window that contains this file Using this command is the same as clicking without dragging the document icon button in the status bar The actual icon in the icon bar is the same as the document s icon in the Finder If the selected text in a document is the name of a file hold down the Option key as you open the File menu and choose the Reveal Selection command to have BBEdit open the Finder folder that contains that file Zoom There is no longer a Zoom command on the Window menu but the key equivalent Command which users of earlier versions of BBEdit may be used to still works Zoom will produce the same effect as clicking a window s zoom box it makes the active window larger if it is small or returns it to its original size if it was previously enlarged by a Zoom command When zooming windows BBEdit will now move the window as little as possible consistent with maximizing the window s size This behavior is similar to what the Finder does when zooming a window The Move as Little as Possible switch in the Windows preference panel controls this behavior turning this switch off will revert the behavior to be the same as previous versions of BBEdit Quick Find The Quick Find command is no longer located in the Window menu it is now in the Search menu See Chapter 7 Searching for details Send to Back This command sends the front window behind all the other windows Exchange
43. For example this is the Find amp Replace dialog without the Command key equivalents showing Find amp Replace Search For a T amp Use Grep Patterns a find f FindAM f Replace Start at T Search Selection Onl 3 Start at Top Search Selection Only Replace All C Wrap Around L Extend Selection S h Backward U Search Backwards Pere aee U Case Sensitive U Match Entire Words f Cancel j Replace With a at L3 Multi File Search MW Batch Find Exclude Matches Folder m ginone selected i Other Other m Options 1 Lise File Filter current criteria m f Edit This is the Find amp Replace dialog box with the Command key equivalents visible Find amp Replace Find All f Replace R Start at Top T F Search Selection Only 5 Replace All C Wrap Around W Lj Extend Selection I Search Backwards B LJ Search Backwards Don t Find 3 D C Case Sensitive N Match Entire Words E f Cancel 4 Search For a c 1 amp Use Grep G Patterns FA Replace With a rg 1 O Multi File Search 3M MW Batch Find Exclude Matches U Folder PW none selected f Other 0 Other m f Options 3 lUse File Filter L current criteria m f Edit 386 gt BBEdit waits briefly before displaying the Command key equivalents so that you can type a sequence quickly without making the dialog box flicker Human Interface
44. Formats the current HTML document for easier editing The appearance of the document in a browser is generally not affected except in the case of Document Skeleton You can choose from the following e Hierarchical nested HTML structures are indented This command may add whitespace which can affect display in a browser Gentle Hierarchical the same as Hierarchical with less indenting e Plain places each tag on a separate line with no indenting e Compact the absolute minimum white space e Gentle Compact A slightly more human readable version of Compact e Source Format Profile Formats the document according to the Dreamweaver Source Format Profile selected in the HTML Markup panel of the Preferences e Document Skeleton a hierarchical view with all non tag content removed e Don t Reorganize allows normalizing of case quote and entity settings as well as encoding entities within attributes without otherwise changing the existing structure You can also have the Format command operate on the whole document or only the selection normalize the tags to upper or lower case according to your settings in the HTML Tools preferences normalize quote marks around attributes and encode special characters or entities found in attributes If you choose the Format command with the ellipsis BBEdit displays a dialog allowing you to choose the formatting options If you choose the Format command without the ellipsis BBEdit uses t
45. If there is a selection pasting replaces the selection with the contents of the Clipboard To place text on the Clipboard without deleting it choose Copy from the Edit menu To add selected text to the existing contents of the Clipboard hold down the Shift key as you choose the Cut or Copy commands When you hold down the Shift key BBEdit changes these commands to Cut amp Append and Copy amp Append Multiple Clipboards BBEdit now supports six separate clipboards Each time you use the Cut or Copy command BBEdit automatically switches to the next clipboard wrapping back around to clipboard 1 after the sixth This way the last six things you copied or cut are always available for pasting sort of a clipboard history By default the Paste command pastes text from the most recently used clipboard so if you do nothing special BBEdit works just like any other Macintosh program However by using the Previous Clipboard command on the Edit menu you can access the previous clipboard contents Next Clipboard moves forward through the clipboard history There are also buttons in the Clipboard window below that let you move back and forth through the clipboards eos Clipboard CIE 2 6 48 characters one line The quick brown fox jumped over the blazing dog lt gt E Once you have selected a clipboard using one of these methods the next Cut Copy or Paste command will use the clipboard you chose Subsequent Cut or Cop
46. Line Breaks is on BBEdit will use Unicode line breaks by default for newly created or converted Unicode documents instead of the chosen platform specific line breaks Make Backups Before Saving Select this checkbox to tell BBEdit to make automatic backup copies of every file as you save it This preference setting establishes the defaults for newly created documents and for documents in which there are no saved backup settings If you prefer that BBEdit create backup files in the same folders that your documents are already saved in choose the option for Use Document s Folder This is the default setting Should you prefer to save backups in a different folder choose the Use Folder setting instead You can click the Choose button to select the desired backup folder using a dialog or just drag the folder to the box Even if you do not set BBEdit to perform general backups here you can still set backup options for individual files by using the Backup Options command on the File menu Text Printing Preferences The Printing preferences control how BBEdit prints your documents Default for Page Setup The Page Setup button lets you set the default options for the Page Setup dialog box Defaults for Printing The Printing button lets you set the default options for the Printing dialog box Default Font To set the default printing font click the Default Font button BBEdit opens a dialog that lets you specify the font and the widt
47. Mark TER Sito zl File Options Fe T HTHL Tools HTHL Web Site Button Putfiness een M Minimal Moderate e Exceszive Startup State Status Bar Text Colors Show Status Bar Mark this checkbox to display the status bar by default You can always show it or hide it independently for each window Show Philip Bar Displays the Philip Bar which represents the usable width of the screen on a 9 inch classic Macintosh monitor in the status bar Chapter 10 Preferences Show Tab Stops Displays tab stops in the status bar using the tab width set in the Editor section of the Preferences Show Line Numbers This option displays line numbers along the left edge of the window Show Cursor Position Adds a panel at the bottom left corner of the window that displays the location line and column of the insertion point or the endpoint of a just changed selection range if the cursor has not been moved yet after the change Show Current Function Display the name of the function the insertion point is in if any at the bottom left corner of the window Function Popup The Function Popup displays a list of the functions for source code files or named anchors for HTML files in the document allowing you to jump to any function or anchor instantly Window Options The Window Options pop up menu allows you to set wrapping display and editing preferences for the current window as with the Window Options comma
48. Nl The transformed list becomes Potter Junior X Safai Jill Goode Dylan Schuyler Wang Walter Advanced Grep Topics BBEdit s new PCRE based grep engine offers unparalleled syntactical power The topics below cover areas that show how grep can effectively match very complicated patterns of text matches which were impossible to achieve with older versions of BBEdit However with this power comes complexity If you are new to grep it is possible that the topics covered in this section will not make much sense to you That s OK The best way to learn grep is to use it in real life not by reading example patterns In many cases the basic grep syntax covered previously in this chapter will be all that you need If you are an experienced user of grep from previous versions of BBEdit however many of the topics covered below will be of great interest Matching Nulls The grep engine used in previous versions of BBEdit was unable to search text that contained null characters ASCII value zero This limitation is removed in BBEdit 6 5 Here s one way to match a null x 0 Backreferences The following charts explain the rules BBEdit uses for determining backreferences In Search Patterns Modifier Effect NO A backslash followed by a zero is an octal character reference Up to two further octal characters are read Thus 040 will match a space character and 07 will match the ASCII BEL x07 but N08 will match an A
49. Open Recent submenu Opening Several Files at Once In older versions of the Mac OS the standard file Open dialog box only allowed you to choose a single file at once to open more than one file at a time you needed to keep going back to the Open dialog for each file BBEdit solved this problem by providing a separate Open Several dialog which allowed you to choose multiple files at one time and open them all The new Mac OS Navigation Services Open dialogs on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X allow you to select more than one file at a time Because BBEdit now uses Navigation Services its separate Open Several command has been removed If you want to open more than one file just use the regular Open command and hold down the Shift key while you select multiple files On Mac OS X use the Command key instead when selecting separate files and the Shift key when selecting a range of files Using the Open Selection Command The Open Selection command lets you open a file that s referenced in the text of a document It is particularly useful for programmers to open include files or any document referenced by another file To open a file whose name is referenced in the text of a document 1 Double click to select the file name If the name contains spaces drag across it with the mouse instead 2 Choose Open Selection from the File menu If a suffix of the form x follows the name BBEdit automatically expands the selection to include the
50. Patterns pop up menu 3 Click Find amp Mark to mark the matching text BBEdit searches the active window for text that matches the pattern and marks it the way you specified The Insert Submenu In addition to typing you can use the commands in the Insert submenu of the Edit menu to insert text into the active window These commands which are also available on the Insert menu in the document status bar let you insert the contents of other files folder listings Macintosh Toolbox templates and page break characters Inserting Files The Insert File command inserts the contents of a file into the document you are editing When you use this command BBEdit opens a directory dialog box that lets you select the file to insert BBEdit inserts the file at the insertion point or replaces the selected text You can also use the File command on the Insert pop up menu in the status bar or drag a file s icon from the Finder into a BBEdit editing window to insert the contents of that file Inserting a Folder Listing The Insert Folder Listing command inserts a textual listing of a folder hierarchy When you use this command BBEdit displays a directory dialog box that lets you select a folder to insert BBEdit inserts the folder listing at the insertion point or replaces the selected text You can also use the Folder Listing command on the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a folder listing You can also drag a folder s icon fr
51. Replace Replaces every occurrence of the search string with All Matches the replace string in each of the files being searched See Find amp Replace All Matches in the Search Menu Reference section at the end of this chapter Specifying the Search Set When the Find dialog box is expanded the controls in the bottom part of the dialog box let you specify which files BBEdit should consider in the multi file search The pop up menu just below the Multi File Search checkbox controls which files BBEdit should search You can search all open text documents e the files in a given folder e the files listed in any results browser e g a search results browser an HTML syntax errors browser or a compile errors browser e the files in a file group e the list of files returned by an OSA script You can further restrict which of these files will be searched by applying a file filter See the following section on File Filters for more details Some of the other options change depending on what you select from this pop up menu Searching the Files in a Folder To search the files in a folder 1 Choose Folder from the Search Type pop up menu m Batch Find Exclude Matches PMM Other quem Options Use File Filter current criteria zi Edit 2 Choose a folder from the second pop up menu This pop up menu displays up to 12 recently used folders as well as the folder you have designated
52. Restricted Rights Clause in FAR 52 227 19 and or subdivision c 1 ii of Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause in Department of Defense FAR 252 227 7013 Acknowledgment You acknowledge that you have read this agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions You further agree that it is the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between you and Bare Bones Software Inc which supersedes all proposals or prior agreements oral or written and all other communications between you and Bare Bones Software Inc relating to the subject matter of this agreement Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Table of Contents Welcome to BBEdit Cetina oaned the rdi dea ned ens edu bod Es sais Whatis BDEGM 24 3b khen e Ibo Eae Lb RE orbi ob ed How Can Use BEE 4 miS o EUER ORENSE T pea Sarees Working with Development Environments 2 Writing HTML Documents 2 Human Interface Notes sic use eek A er ELP ETSI PIER ER ES Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Menu Command Keys 3 Contextual Menus 4 e Snappy Palettes 4 e Dialog Box Command Keys 4 Changes from Previous Versions esee Installing BBEdit Basic Installation s4 quedes a wb iuto Doa am Era ond ORE System Requirements 9 Installing BBEdit 9 Additonal SOFEWAFO saute pescara ace se nd bediea aces toss Ru doe Internet Control Panel 10 ToolServer Support 11 BBEGiE SUP
53. Save to FTP Server 35S Save a Copy to FTP Server 36S Save a Copy to FTP Server 36S Page Setup Page Setup Print 36P Print All KEP You can use the Shift and Option keys when you choose an item from a menu or when you use the Command key equivalents Bypassing Options Dialogs You may have noticed that commands which require additional settings to be made before they are performed appear on the menu with ellipses after their names To bypass this step and use the command with its most recent settings hold down the Option key while selecting the menu item For example Zap Gremlins from the Text menu becomes Zap Gremlins when the Option key is pressed and when selected will zap gremlins in the frontmost text document using the current settings Menu Command Keys Many of BBEdit s commands have keyboard shortcuts BBEdit lets you re assign the shortcuts for any menu item glossary entry plug in or Open Scripting Architecture OSA script to suit your own way of working To change the keyboard shortcut for any menu item choose the Set Menu Keys command in the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 and earlier in the BBEdit Application menu on Mac OS X Human Interface Notes new in 6 5 new in 6 5 Many other BBEdit features can have keyboard shortcuts assigned as well Here s how to set them Feature Set Keys In Menu Commands Set Menu Keys Edit menu on Mac OS 9 BBEdit menu on Mac OS X Plug ins Plug In Too
54. Script To specify the set of files to be searched using a compiled OSA script choose Script from the pop up menu then click the Other button and select the desired script or drag the script file onto the pathname box next to the pop up menu The script should return a list of the files to be searched This provides unprecedented flexibility since an OSA script can do pretty much anything it wants to generate a list When calling the script BBEdit will first try a handler named MultiFileSearch if there is no such handler BBEdit will call the script s run handler The script should return a list of the files to be searched Here is a very simple example script on MultiFileSearch note that this requires the BB Commands OSAX return folder listing of alias Projects BBEdit files only returning files of type TEXT with recursion end MultiFileSearch on run you could do something different here in case the script was run manually by the user end run Of course you don t have to use the BB Commands OSAX to generate file lists any other scripting tool which can produce the same type of output will work fine Multi File Search Options Click the Options button to display the Multi File Search Options dialog shown here Multi File Search Options B Search Nested Folders 1 Skip Folders C Search Invisible Folders File Type a Text Files Only All File Types ECoG To search all the files in sub
55. Users admin Desktap Files 6 5 Notes is checked out as Read Only Do you want to Modify Read Only the file and do the replace or skip this file LJ Don t Ask Again Cancel Skip MRO amp Replace Choosing the Cancel button will stop the Update operation and leave the current file untouched Choosing the Skip button will cause BBEdit to skip this file only leaving it untouched and continue the multi file replace operation Choosing the MRO amp Update button will cause BBEdit to mark the file Modify Read Only update the file and continue the Update operation If you select the Don t Ask Again option before clicking Skip or MRO amp Update then BBEdit will apply the same action to all files with this Projector state that it encounters during this and only this Update operation Includes The Includes submenu contains commands for inserting one time include directives persistent include directives and placeholders See Appendix C for more information HTML Tool Descriptions 203 204 Note Choosing Include or Persistent Include prompts you to choose a file using an Open dialog then inserts the appropriate markup Choosing Placeholders displays a scrolling list of available placeholders selecting one and clicking Insert places it into the document Utilities The Utilities submenu contains commands for automatically editing the current HTML document for ease of editing and for consistency Format
56. You specify a file simply by using the word file followed by the path name of the file as in file Macintosh HD Desktop Folder My file If you specify a file to save the window to the text will be saved into that file instead of the file it came from like using Save As instead of Save The last three optional parts of the save event are denoted as boolean That means they take either a true or a false value In AppleScript there are a couple of different ways to specify boolean values You can write saving as stationery true to tell BBEdit to save the file as a stationery document Or you can write with saving as stationery You will notice that the last two parameters default to true if you don t specify them as false To do that you d use add to recent list false or without add to recent list Whichever way you write it you will notice that when you compile the script AppleScript rewrites it using with or without Since that s the syntax AppleScript seems to like best that s probably the one you should get used to thinking in Let s take a look at another one the prosaic get Select get from BBEdit s dictionary listing and take a quick look at its class definition You use get to retrieve information from an application You must specify a reference to the object you want to retrieve and you can specify a coercion a condition that tells AppleScript to treat one type of data as if it were another by adding the as clause Howe
57. a Copy to FTP Server Revert Revert Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print Print All Print One Copy Quit Mac OS 9 only Mac OS 9 only none Mac OS X only none Cmd none submenu none or Cmd H none none Cmd Q see left column submenu Cmd O Cmd Shift O Cmd D Cmd D Cmd Opt D submenu Cmd W Cmd Opt W Cmd Shift W Cmd S Cmd Opt S none none Cmd Shift S Cmd Opt Shift S none none none none none Cmd P Cmd Opt P Cmd Shift P Cmd Q Appendix A Command Reference File gt New Text Document with selection with Clipboard HTML Document File Group Disk Browser Edit Undo Redo Cut Cut amp Append Copy Copy amp Append Paste Clear Select All Select Line Select Paragraph Insert Show Clipboard Previous Clipboard Next Clipboard Text Options Preferences MacOS 9 Set Menu Keys Edit gt Insert File Folder Listing Toolbox Call Templ Page Break Cmd N Cmd Shift N Cmd Opt Shift N Cmd Ctl N none Cmd Opt N Cmd Z Cmd Shift Z Cmd X Cmd Shift X Cmd C Cmd Shift C Cmd V none Cmd A Cmd L Cmd Opt L submenu none ix e Cmd Opt Cmd none none none none none Text Font amp Tabs Balance Exchange Characters Exchange Words Change Case Change Case Shift Left Shift Left One Space Shift Right Shift Right One
58. a s are grouped etc Click on a column label to set the sort order accordingly The default is to sort by decimal value The HTML Tools Palettes 209 Note new in 6 5 Web Safe Colors The Web Safe Colors palette displays the 216 colors that display properly in Web browsers on all computers running in 256 color mode The colors are based on a 6x6x6 color cube that adds red green and blue in 2076 increments o Web Safe Colors Click or drag to insert the HTML color code Use a color from this palette for Web page backgrounds and text to reduce the chance that the incorrect color possibly dithered will be used instead of a pure color There are four layouts available horizontal vertical and VisiBone and VisiBone 2 You can choose a layout in the HTML Colors panel of the Preferences Click a color swatch to insert the color s RGB value in HTML format i e RRGGBB at the insertion point You can also drag a color swatch into a document window to place the color value The Web Safe Color palette is now CSS aware and will insert color values in CSS format i e unquoted and minimized when appropriate HTML Translation The following options are available in the Translate tool available in the Utilities submenu of the Markup menu Remove Tags When converting HTML to TEXT the tool will remove all HTML tags and comments Paragraphs When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool finds paragraphs in the same
59. a short list of symbols that sound like what you typed e Routines that programmers can call to display alphabetize and otherwise manipulate text in the selected writing system Just as the Mac allows you to use different type styles and fonts in a single document a program that supports international text may let you use these different writing systems in a single document The computer keeps track of which text is displayed in which scripts and automatically selects an appropriate font to display each script When you copy and paste text information on what script it s in comes with it In short it works just the way you think it should When writing in other languages it is fairly common to use an English term where no native word is available so most scripts also include a Roman character set to allow users to type the occasional English word without having to constantly switch back and forth between the Roman script and the international one This is especially fortunate for Web design because all HTML is in English although the content of the Web page need not be The part of the Mac OS that allows applications to handle text in different scripts is called WorldScript Thus you will often see applications referred to as WorldScript aware or WorldScript savvy Using Script Systems Throughout this section we will assume you are using a U S English or another Roman based version of the Mac OS If you are not you probab
60. and documents For example the About box is a window which has no document associated with it Furthermore in current versions of the application there is no such thing as a document with no associated window Here is a general overview of the object classes used in BBEdit Classes of Windows e window the basic window class contains properties that can be fetched and set for any window on screen position size and so forth 232 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit e palette the palette class refers to windows that float above all others on the screen the HTML tools palette scripts list etc text window the text window class provides properties which are specific to text editing windows as on screen entities These properties pertain mostly to the display of text in the window show invisibles auto indent etc In addition to the text editing specific properties the basic window properties are also accessible e group window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open file groups A group window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate file group windows from other types of window disk browser window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open disk browsers A disk browser window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate disk browser windows from other types of window results browser
61. and refer to whichever word is matched in the replacement pattern That s easy red blue To make it harder let s say that if and only if we match blue we want to optionally match a space and the word car if they follow directly afterward In other words we want to match red blue or if possible blue car but we do not want to match red car We can t use the pattern red blue car because that will match red car Nor can we use red blue car blue because in our replacement pattern we want the backreference to only contain red or blue without the car Using a conditional subpattern however we can search for blue red 2 car Here s how this pattern works First we start with blue red When this subpattern matches blue 1 and 2 are set to blue and 3 is empty When it matches red N1 and 3 are set to red and 2 is empty Next comes the conditional subpattern 2 car The conditional test is on 2 the second backreferenced subpattern if 2 is set which in our case means it has matched the word blue then it will try to match car If 2 is not set however the entire conditional subpattern is skipped The question mark at the end of the pattern makes this conditional match optional even if 2 is set to blue Here s an example that uses an assertion for the condition and the if then else form Let s say we wa
62. as the local root of your Web site if any the folder you have designated as your Templates Includes folder and any favorite folders you have designated see Chapter 2 If the folder you want to search isn t in the pop up menu choose Other and select the folder using the Open dialog or click the Other button on the right hand side of the dialog You can also drag a folder from the Finder to the box that displays the path of the chosen folder Multi File Searching 99 3 To search folders within the folder you chose click on the Options button and select the Search Nested Folders option in the Multi File Search Options dialog You can also choose to skip any folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses here by selecting the Skip Folders option and you can specify whether to search only text files or all files Searching the Results of a Previous Multi File Search If a multi file search finds many files that contain your search string you may want to narrow the search You can do this if you selected the Batch Find option to do the initial search and the results are in a search results window Note As mentioned above you can also search the list of files presented in any results browser not just search results browsers To narrow a search based on the results of an earlier search 1 Choose Results Window from the Search Type pop up menu v Multi File Search S Batch Find C Exclude Matches Results Window
63. bebes d Eee bees Oa 156 Function Popup Preterences ax div reb Rh SERA ER 158 Glossary Prefereteebe oso utu Sota aos qa teeta d dirutum Sd es 158 HIMEL Colors Preferences i5 aere t co CRETA OR I e Up i a te tC 158 FV Mar kup Preferences encod adie auem Dow eire tcn mede d A pa sop Rea 159 HEMEL Palette Preferences i uox a 6 Rah Ee EUER RED 160 HTML Preview Preferences ccc cee eee c cece RR n 160 HEME Tools Preferencess d s 6 68 Bde a CR ee 6 AE WER DRE A HR OS 161 HIMEL Web Site Preterences rse riete runean En e8 DOA eee A 162 Languages Preterences 24d S Aah ek b Pu bee ees CH TS 162 Software Updates ire oot Ae tapete Pto ud e eade eade darc ad 163 opellin S Preferences s elo ooe i TRE Dacis Eee d DR E outs 164 Startup Preferences s esa soo erae as Roel ice a dc ew els a5 164 State P refereticess d od a eaten se a un be Sk E e NS See eae one 165 Status Bar Preferences iu e E e dore ou eae a Rc ee DR UP aa a 166 Text Colors Preferencess dade d oS nier du eS Aes aE ATE 168 Text Editine Preteren es a qa toe She ERR PET ERE EE E 169 Text Files Opening Preferences ecesdes er baa t Oe wages Sows Ceo 171 Text Files Saving Preferences 5422 55 59 o e hh hh E aes 172 Text Printine Preferences os eso x ede e ve oe Oa eee b 173 Text Search Preferences ovr wr CRUS TERRE DOES HOS See ed 174 Tools T Feferenees cou m dr qva ev Dee Med tar dede ana de o ERR wee ee Sh 175 Windows Preferences cece eee eee ee tee eee 9 hn 176 147
64. by Default Key Equivalents 279 Key Command Cmd Text Shift Left Cmd Text Shift Right Cmd Text Hard Wrap Cmd Text Exchange Characters Cmd left arrow Search Apply to Old Cmd right arrow Search Apply to New Cmd Ctl Windows Send To Back Cmd Ctl A Inline Anchor Cmd Ctl B Inline Break Cmd Ctl F Inline Font Cmd Ctl H Block Elements Heading Cmd Ctl I Inline Image Cmd Ctl K Check Document Links Cmd Ctl L Lists List Cmd Ctl N File New HTML Document Cmd Ctl P Markup Preview Cmd Ctl T Tables Table Cmd Ctl U Update Document Cmd Ctl X Misc Index Site Cmd Ctl Y Check Document Syntax Cmd Opt Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Opt Search Find Definition Cmd Opt Windows Exchange With Next Cmd Opt Edit Window Options Cmd Opt Search Replace All Cmd Opt B Check Balance Tags Cmd Opt D File Reveal Selection Cmd Opt E Search Enter Replace String Cmd Opt F Windows Quick Search Cmd Opt Search Go To Line 280 Appendix A Command Reference Key Cmd Opt L Cmd Opt M Cmd Opt N Cmd Opt P Cmd Opt S Cmd Opt T Cmd Opt W Cmd Opt Cmd Opt up Cmd Opt down Cmd Opt Cmd Opt Shift F Cmd Opt Shift Cmd Opt Shift N Cmd Opt Shift S Cmd Shift Cmd Shift C Cmd Shift G Cmd Shift H Cmd Shift Cmd Shift J Cmd Shift N Cmd Shift O Cmd Shift P Cmd Shift S Cmd Shift W Cmd Shift X Cmd Shift Z Cmd Shift Cmd Shift Command Edit Select Paragraph Markup Edit Tag
65. called a subclass and the class on which a subclass is based is referred to as its parent class In AppleScript classes can only have one parent Multiple inheritance is a feature found in more complex languages The idea of a class hierarchy makes it easier for us to add new features to BBEdit since when we want to create a new kind of window half the work is already done However when scripting you may need to flip back and forth between two or more class definitions to find all the properties of the object you are working with This is technically speaking a limitation of Apple s Script Editor There s no reason the inherited properties couldn t automatically be included in a subclass listing by a smarter editor for example Script Debugger which does this Now that we ve got the class hierarchy under control let s look at the properties themselves more closely we will stick with the text window class at this point Properties of an object are referred to using the preposition of For example the following line of script returns the font of the frontmost text editing window tell application BBEdit 6 5 to get display font of text window 1 You can in fact just write get display font of window 1 AppleScript will figure out that window 1 is more specifically a text window and therefore has a display font property even though the generic window class doesn t have any such property All the properties of the object are availa
66. character mark shown above Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit new in 6 5 Important Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in a programming language BBEdit recognizes BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color There are several methods used by BBEdit to determine which language if any to use for a particular file The primary way to active syntax coloring in a document is simply to save it with an extension or suffix if you prefer that indicates which programming or markup language the file is using For example if you save your file with html at the end of the file name BBEdit will then color your HTML tags and anchors Other common suffixes are tex for TeX files and c for C files For any file whose name does not have an extension or has an extension which does not match any of the mappings in BBEdit s preferences BBEdit will attempt to guess which language the file is using and apply the appropriate syntax coloring If BBEdit guesses wrong or is unable to guess you can resort to the Language sub menu of the Window Options pop up in the Status Bar or the Language pop up in the Text Options dialog which gives you the ability to manually select any installed language to be applied to the document regardless of its name If the file is saved with BBEdit state the manual language selection will persist and override any suffix mapping
67. com Sales information sales barebones com Technical support support barebones com It Doesn t Suck is a registered trademark of Bare Bones Software Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the copyright holder The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from the copyright holder Warranty and license information is printed on the CD ROM package and included on the next page of this user manual Frontier is a trademark of UserLand Software THINK C THINK Pascal and THINK Reference are trademarks of Symantec Corporation CodeWarrior is a trademark of Metrowerks Inc Macintosh Mac OS Mac OS X Power Macintosh AppleScript MPW and ToolServer are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners License Agreement You the Licensee assume responsibility for the selection of the program BBEdit to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the program Breaking the package seal and installing the program constitutes your acceptance of these terms and conditions If you do not acc
68. constructs are now available while the meaning of some previously used options has changed What is Grep or Pattern Searching A grep pattern also known as a regular expression describes the text that you are looking for For instance a pattern can describe words that begin with C and end inl A pattern like this would match Call Cornwall and Criminal as well as hundreds of other words In fact you have probably already used pattern searching without realizing it The Find dialog box s Match Case and Entire Word options turn on special searching patterns Suppose that you are looking for corn With the Match Case option turned off you are actually looking for a pattern that says look for a C or c Ooro R or r and N or n With the Entire Word option on you are looking for the string corn only if it s surrounded by white space or punctuation characters special search characters called metacharacters are added to the search string you specified to indicate this What makes pattern searching counterintuitive at first is how you describe the pattern Consider the first example above where we want to search for text that begins with the letter C and ends with the letter 1 with any number of letters in between What exactly do you put between them that means any number of letters That s what this chapter is all about Grep is the name of a frequently used Unix command that searches using regular expressio
69. create tags insert the tag at the insertion point unless otherwise specified Such tools also place an end tag automatically where appropriate You should already be familiar with HTML before using BBEdit s HTML tools The dialogs BBEdit displays will help you to associate correct attributes with each tag and provide shortcuts to help you enter information but they do not and cannot tell what the final results of your markup will be There is no substitute for knowing HTML HTML Tool Descriptions 183 new in 6 5 Tag Maker Tag Maker is BBEdit s context sensitive HTML authoring tool When you choose it from the menu or the palette or invoke it by pressing Command M it provides a list of the tags that are valid in the current HTML context of the insertion point then lets you insert and configure one For example if the insertion point is positioned inside the document s header section delineated by the HEAD and lt HEAD gt tags Tag Maker displays the following list of tags Insert Tag mM 8 Cancel Insert Choosing for example BASE inserts a BASE tag at the insertion point Choosing TITLE inserts a lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt pair with the insertion point positioned between the two tags for easy entry of a title If you hold down the Option key while clicking the Insert button Tag Maker automatically displays a follow up dialog for editing the attributes of the new tag if the tag takes attributes and BBE
70. different types or categories of characters Special Character Matches s any whitespace character space tab carriage return line feed form feed AS any non whitespace character any character not included by s NW any word character a z A Z 0 9 and some 8 bit characters AW any non word character all characters not included by Nw including carriage returns Nd any digit 0 9 AD any non digit character incl carriage return A word is defined in BBEdit as any run of non word break characters bounded by word breaks Word characters are generally alphanumeric and some characters whose value is greater than 127 are also considered word characters Note that any character matched by Ns is by definition not a word character thus anything matched by s will also be matched by W but not the reverse Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns The special characters and specify how many times the pattern preceding them may repeat style quantifiers allow you to specify exactly how many times a subpattern can repeat The preceding pattern can be a literal character a wildcard character a character class or a special character Pattern Matches p zero or more p s pt one or more p s p zero or one p s p COUNT match exactly COUNT p s where COUNT is an integer piMIN MAX match at least MIN p s but no more than MAX Note that the repetition characters and match zero or more occurrences of the
71. do either of the following e Chose New from the File menu then select HTML Document from the submenu e Click the New Document button on the HTML Tools palette In either case the following dialog appears New HTML Document Insert XML Declaration B Insert DOCTYPE HTML 4 01 Transitional m WA HTML W Head NY Body V Give BBEdit Credit Lang FA Charset a Base Meta Link Template Default m W Create New Window m Using the BBEdit HTML Tools 181 182 Note Note If the front most window in BBEdit is editable you can deselect the Create New Window option in the dialog This will insert the document template around the current text contents of the window In many cases you can simply specify a title for the document and click OK ignoring the other options However we suggest that you fill out this dialog as completely as possible The function of each field is described below Insert XML Declaration Choose this checkbox to have BBEdit insert an XML declaration If the DOCTYPE selected in the pop up menu below is not an XML based type i e is not an XHTML version then this checkbox will be disabled Although an XML declaration is required for XML documents whose character set is not UTF 8 or ISO 8859 1 some currently shipping Web browsers including Internet Explorer 5 0 for Macintosh cannot handle documents with XML declarations Insert DOCTYPE Choose the type of this HTML document from the pop u
72. document To insert this specification check the Meta Tag box choose a character set from the pop up menu of supplied standard types or type in a character set name and click Apply To remove any existing character set specification uncheck the Meta Tag box and click Apply Optionally if the current document is an XML document you can insert an XML Declaration either alone or in addition to the Meta tag by checking the XML Declaration box and clicking Apply CSS Submenu This submenu allows you to create edit and format Cascading Style Sheet markup BBEdit 6 5 now has built in support for CSS When editing standalone CSS files or HTMI files with embedded CSS syntax coloring is available and the Function pop up menu in the status bar lists CSS selectors as well as CSS files referenced by import directives and link tags Choose an external stylesheet from the Function pop up and BBEdit will open that stylesheet for editing The CSS function parser supports the following syntax for laying a mark in the function menu bbmark string to appear in the menu import The import directive instructs a Web browser to load an external style sheet This dialog box allows you to select a file or drag and drop one from the Finder and choose whether to use the optional url notation for specifying the location of the style sheet Remember that import must come before other CSS rules inside a lt style gt tag or ina standa
73. expand tabs false soft wrap text false soft wrap mode Philip bar soft wrap width 72 show spaces true show Status bar true show philip bar true show tab stops false show cursor position false show function position false show line numbers false color syntax true split proportion 0 Conversely to set one or more properties at once is very easy set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true show Spaces true soft wrap text true Only the properties specified will be changed The rest will not be modified It is important to note that when setting properties in this fashion you can only set modifiable properties If you attempt to set any read only properties a scripting error will result set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true modal false expand tabs true The above script command will turn on Show Invisibles and then report a scripting error since modal is a read only property Scripting Searches Scripting searches with BBEdit 6 5 is fundamentally different from pre 6 0 versions and significantly more powerful while being much easier to use Consider the scripting command below tell application BBEdit 6 5 find BBEdit searching in window 1 options search mode Grep with selecting match end tell Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit In previous versions the find command always operated on the front window Now you must explicitly specify the text to be searche
74. file list pane do one of the following e double click it e select it and click Open in the status bar e select it and press Command Down Arrow To go up one level to the enclosing folder or disk do one of the following e select the enclosing folder from the directory pop up menu e press Command Up Arrow Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers When you select a folder or disk in the file list pane BBEdit displays the names of all the files and folders contained in that folder or disk in the text pane When you click on a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane if the file is of a type that BBEdit recognizes TEXT utxt or UTF8 You can search the contents of the text pane with the Find command or with the Quick Search window and you can copy text from the text pane You cannot edit a file s contents in the text pane To edit a file use the Open button in the status bar to open it in an editing window Chapter 9 Browsers Search Results Browsers If you selected the Batch Find option when performing a multi file search BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the searched files in a search results browser e o e Search Results 2 Er Rf 24 Notes Open 4 24 occurrences of html found in 4 filas Page Template 5 occurrences found Include Example tmpl 8 occurrences found Simple Page tmpl 6 occurrences found Table Of Contents tmol 5 occurrences found 4 Last Sa
75. files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Canceling Perl Operations While waiting for a MacPerl task to complete BBEdit will display a progress dialog If you need to cancel the operation you can switch to MacPerl and do so there the Perl task is canceled and the BBEdit task is then canceled as well BBEdit cannot cancel the task directly because there is no way to signal MacPerl to do so On Mac OS X the progress dialog for Unix scripting tasks has an enabled Cancel button and you can cancel the task directly from within BBEdit Since BBEdit must kill the spawned Perl or Python or shell process with a SIGINT any unflushed data in open filehandles including STDOUT and STDERR will be lost unless the script takes measures to prevent this Perl Python and Shell Scripting 251 252 Note p Out of memory Conditions in MacPerl MacPerl will inconveniently run out of memory at times Sometimes it outputs a string to STDERR saying so and sometimes it doesn t What it does always do is report an error back via an Apple Event When this happens BBEdit will report a MacPerl error of type n where n is the error number usually 2 This is not useful for perfo
76. from Previous VetsiOnS sov xx CER RA RU Nel wate Aca naa e 6 Getting Started Thank you for your selection of BBEdit the premier HTML and text editor for the Macintosh If you are new to BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapters 1 through 4 of this manual to familiarize yourself with the installation and basic operation of BBEdit You may also wish to read or preview any other chapters which cover features that you frequently use After you have installed BBEdit the best way to learn it is to use it Complete online assistance is available from the Help menu If you have used previous versions of BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapter 1 for an overview of significant changes in this version and Chapter 2 for information relevant to installation and upgrading What is BBEdit BBEdit is a high performance HTML and text editor Unlike a word processor which is designed for preparing printed pages a text editor focuses on providing means of producing and changing content Thus BBEdit doesn t offer fancy formatting capabilities headers and footers graphics tools a thesaurus and other staples of feature laden office software Instead it focuses on helping you manipulate text in ways that word processors generally can t In service of this goal BBEdit offers powerful regular expression based grep search and replace multi file search sophisticated text transformations intelligent text coloring and
77. generator content BBEdit 6 5 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt File Path Boot Desktop Folder incl_test html x 3 Name JEK lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt Including Perl Scripts If you have MacPerl installed on your computer or if you are running BBEdit on Mac OS X you can write include scripts in Perl The script must be a text file with a name ending an extension BBEdit recognizes as Perl See the Languages panel of the BBEdit Preferences The name of the file being processed is passed to the script as its first argument and any variables in the include statement are passed as additional arguments All these can be retrieved via ARGV in your Perl script Any text sent to STDOUT by the script will be taken as the value of the bbinclude operation and inserted into the HTML file If an error occurs while running the script the STDERR output if any will be inserted into the file along with the STDOUT and a single line indicating the error will be added to the error browser For example enter this directive in your HTML file lt bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt lt end bbinclude gt Then use this source code for foo pl and save it in the same folder as the HTML file or in the Templates and Includes folder specified in the HTML Web Site panel of your BBEdit preferences usr bin perl w my file
78. if you have the correct language mapping set for the file contents it is a good practice for these and necessary for any other shell scripts that the shebang line given must be a correct full path to the executable BBEdit 6 5 s new Shebang menu completely supersedes the Camel menu and encompasses the same commands Although some of the commands are not applicable to every scripting language as noted below Language Resources Perl is an acronym for Practical Extraction and Report Language or alternatively Pathologically Eclectic Rubbish Lister and was developed by Larry Wall If you are interested in learning Perl the quintessential Perl references are Learning Perl 3rd Edition by Randal L Schwartz amp Tom Phoenix O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00132 0 Programming Perl 3rd Edition by Larry Wall Tom Christiansen Jon Orwant O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 596 00027 8 The following are excellent Internet resources for the Macintosh implementation of Perl and Perl in general Perl com from O Reilly and Associates http www perl com MacPerl org http www macperl org Perl and MacPerl Mailing Lists http www macperl com depts mlists html http lists perl org Picking Up Perl a freely redistributable Perl tutorial book by Bradley M Kuhn http www ebb org PickingUpPerl comp lang perl misc comp lang perl moderated Usenet news groups 246 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools
79. in 6 5 To add a new suffix mapping 1 Click Add The Add Suffix dialog appears 2 Enter the suffix choose the language from the pop up menu and click a radio button to tell BBEdit whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither 3 Click Add to save the new mapping You can use wildcards in the suffix to indicate single characters any number of characters or a single digit For example page html could map to a different language from html To change a suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Change The Change Suffix dialog appears 3 Fill in the Change Suffix dialog with the appropriate suffix choose a language from the pop up menu and select a radio button to indicate whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither To delete a suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Remove To reset all suffix mappings to default settings 1 Click Reset All Language for Untitled Windows Choose a language from the pop up menu to have BBEdit treat all new unsaved text windows as the indicated language This allows you to see syntax coloring and use the Function Pop up in the window s status bar before you name and save the file Default Language The language selected with this pop up menu tells BBEdit what language to assume for files that don t have any of the listed suffixes so that syntax coloring and the Function pop up wi
80. in the Finder or select the items you want to remove and click the Remove button Removing an item from a file group even by dragging it to the Trash does not delete the original file only its entry in the file group Making Backups BBEdit can automatically make a backup copy of a document before saving it You can also manually take a snapshot of a document at any time to make it easier to revert to previous versions Starting with version 6 0 BBEdit now uses a new format for its backup preferences which is not readable by any previous version If you open a document containing old backup preferences these will be converted into the new format immediately upon opening BBEdit names backup files with the same name as the original file and appends the date and a sequence number For example the first backup made on August 10 1996 of My Text File would be named My Text File 8 10 96 1 The name of the original may be shortened if the date and sequence number would make the name of the backup file longer than 31 characters Versions of BBEdit prior to 6 1 named backup files with dates separated by e g My Text File 8 10 96 1 This has been changed to avoid conflicts with Unix file naming conventions The Text Files Saving panel of the Preferences includes an option that allows you to specify the default backup options for new files and for files that do not have state information See Chapter 10 for more details Y
81. in this folder are used to create the Open Recent list on BBEdit s File menu or in the Find Differences file lists You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do this open the Recent File amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of the list below a separator line and are not counted against the 12 item limit Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Note Recent Folders amp Favorites This folder contains up to 12 aliases to folders which have recently been searched or compared in a Find Differences operation The items stored in this folder are used to create the folder search popup menu in the Find dialog or in the Find Differences folder lists You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do this open the Recent Folder amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of the list below a separator line and are not counted against the 12 item limit BBEdit Table Builder Starting with BBEdit 6 0 Table Builder is no longer included in the BBEdit package After thorough consideration we decided that in order to expand Table Builder s capabilities sufficiently to meet the
82. included as part of the match foo bar matches any occurrence of foo that is not followed by bar Note that the apparently similar pattern foo bar does not find an occurrence of bar that is preceded by something other than foo it finds any occurrence of bar whatsoever because the assertion foo isalways true when the next three characters are bar A lookbehind assertion is needed to achieve this effect Positive lookbehind assertions start with lt and negative lookbehind assertions start with For example foo bar does find an occurrence of bar that is not preceded by foo The contents of a lookbehind assertion are restricted such that all the strings it matches must have a fixed length However if there are several alternatives they do not all have to have the same fixed length Thus Martin Lewis Advanced Grep Topics 135 136 is permitted but dogs cats causes an error Branches that match different length strings are permitted only at the top level of a lookbehind assertion This is different compared with Perl 5 005 which requires all branches to match the same length of string An assertion such as lt ab c de is not permitted because its single top level branch can match two different lengths but it is acceptable if rewritten to use two top level branches lt abc abde The implementation of lookbehind assertions is for
83. it of course you should also keep a copy of the script with the source for yourself Using Scripts with Applications Although you can place a script applet in your Apple menu or on your Finder desktop and use it any time you need it many applications including BBEdit provide a special menu that lets you launch compiled scripts intended specifically for use with that one application Since you don t have to save them as applets they take up less disk space and launch more quickly They also show up only in the application you use them with rather than cluttering your Apple menu Some applications go even further allowing you to define scripts to be run when certain things happen in the program For example an application might let you define a script to be executed when the user chooses any menu item The script might then perform some pre processing then exit by telling the application whether to continue with the menu command or to cancel it As a simple example a script might check to see what printer is selected when the user chooses the Print command If it s the expensive color dye sublimation printer on which printing a page costs several dollars the script could remind the user of that fact and confirm their intention through an alert before continuing with the print operation An application that supports such a feature or any method of integrating user written scripts seamlessly into its user interface is said to be atta
84. may be used anywhere in a table that a heading look is desired In contrast these three related tags define the logical divisions of a table Browsers might hold the table s header and or footer fixed on the screen while scrolling a lengthy body up and down for instance All three tags allow you to select vertical and horizontal alignment which may be inherited by cells inside the element depending on the attributes of TR TD and TH tags Convert to Table Provides a quick way to convert tab delimited or comma delimited lines of text to tables You must specify the delimiter to be used either tabs or commas and you can optionally have the entire first row of the table and or the first cell of each row converted to TH rather than TD elements If One Cell Per Line is marked each cell will be placed on its own line in the resulting HTML otherwise cells will be placed on a single line Forms This submenu contains commands that help you build HTML forms which are used for accepting user data for processing by a client side script or a server side CGI program or other server side technology such as Active Server Pages Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Form Defines a form The Method can be either GET encoding the form data in the URL or POST sending the form data separately after the HTTP transaction header The Action should be the URL of the CGI program or other server side script such as ASP Enctype and A
85. numbered or bulleted lists to your HTML documents If text is selected the selected text is converted to a list with each line terminated by a carriage return becoming a list item List Inserts a list You can choose the type of list unordered ordered definition menu or directory and you can choose the type of marker for an unordered bulleted list You can also suggest a compact display format for the list When converting existing text to a list you can choose to ignore blank lines in the text being converted to mark up only list items and not insert the list header and whether to indent the list items When converting text to a definition list DT term and DD definition tags are applied to alternating lines in the selection Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory Converts the selected text to the indicated type of list or inserts a new list as with the List command using the options set in the last List dialog displayed List Items Converts selected text to list items one line becomes one item or inserts an lt LI gt tag if no text is selected Tables The commands on this submenu all have to do with building HTML tables HTML tables are frequently used for layout purposes as well as for the display of tabular data although strictly speaking their use for layout should be avoided as much as possible BBEdit fully supports HTML 4 tables which are considerably more flexible than the HTML 3 2 tables many use
86. o C Case Sensitive C Match Entire Words eS Cancel Replace With a O Multi File Search W Batch Find Exclude Matches pr A Tl un Folder m none selected Other Other m Options Use File Filter current criteria 4 f edit For now disregard the bottom part of the dialog the Multi File Search checkbox and everything below it The section Multi File Searching later in this chapter discusses this part of the dialog box 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text box You can use special characters in the Search For text box to search for tabs line breaks or page breaks See Special Characters later in this section BBEdit remembers the last 12 search terms you used since launching the application If you are searching for something you recently searched for you can choose it from the pop up menu above the Search For field Click the button to enter the document selection in the Search For field 3 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text box BBEdit also remembers the last 12 replace terms you used since launching the application These appear on the pop up menu above the Replace With field Click the 8 button to enter the document selection in the Replace With field 4 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search For more info about these options see Search Settings later in
87. of BBEdit s optional text editing features Many of these preferences were located in the Editor preferences panel in previous versions of BBEdit Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete When this option is selected holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on Extended Keyboards This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks Drag amp Drop Editing When this option is selected you can use the mouse to drag text from one part of a window to another or from one window to another In dialog boxes that let you specify a file you can drag the file s icon from the Finder to the dialog box Regardless of this setting you can drag a file from the Finder or other application into an editing window Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement To use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point like Microsoft Word select the Keypad Cursor Controls option k show selection end of line down Scroll down 1 2 3 You can use Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To toggle the behavior of the numeric keypad between moving the cursor and typing numbers hold down the Option key and press the Clear key at the upper left hand corner of the numeric keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on the Apple Extended Keyboard Text Editing Prefe
88. only looks at pages on your site as defined in the HTML Web Site preferences not at any links that go offsite BBEdit will in fact generate warnings for offsite links unless you disable the Remote Links warning in the HTML Tools preferences Balance Tags When Balance Tags is selected BBEdit expands the selection to encompass the content of next outermost set of enclosing tags The easiest way to understand how this works is to see it in action Place the insertion point in an HTML document s TITLE element and choose Balance Tags The title will be selected since it lies between the tags lt TITLE gt and lt TITLE gt Choose Balance Tags again and BBEdit selects everything between lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt the next set of enclosing tags outside the TITLE element Choosing the command once more will select everything between HTML and lt HTML gt Use this command to quickly select an element for editing or just to check to see whether all your nested elements are formed correctly If BBEdit sounds the system alert beep when you expect it to select text it can t find a matching set of tags around the selected text Update The Update menu contains commands for updating IMG tags includes and placeholders in the current document the selected folder or the current site as selected in the HTML Web Site preferences BBEdit displays a results browser after the Operation so you can see what was changed For more deta
89. opens the Open dialog so you can choose multiple files to be added at once You can also add a file by dragging its icon from the status bar to the group window or by dragging a file entry from a search results window Using File Groups 35 new in 6 5 36 Note In addition to file and folder references BBEdit supports URLs in file groups You can drag a URL text or clipping file to a file group window and the URL will be saved in the group If you subsequently open the item BBEdit will hand off the URL to designated helper or open it directly if itis an FTP URL To add folders to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Folder button BBEdit displays the following dialog Add Folder to Group none selected in l Choose WW Add Folder s Contents Folders amp Files Folders Only E Cancel J WW Scan Nested Folders A Caes O Skip Folders Add You can click Choose to choose a folder using an Open dialog or just drag the desired folder to the white area from the Finder You can add both folders and files just files or just folders and you can choose to also add all nested folders and optionally to skip folders whose names are enclosed by parentheses When adding a folder to a file group with the Add Folder button you can now choose whether to add all of the folder s contents By choosing not to add a folder s contents you can create a file group that c
90. options when using the scripting interface The i option overrides this setting m By default BBEdit s grep engine will match the and metacharacters after and before returns respectively If you turn this option off with m will only match at the beginning of the document and will only match at the end of the document If that s what you want however you should consider using the new A MZ and z metacharacters instead of and s By default the magic dot metacharacter matches any character except return r If you turn this option on with s however dot will match any character Thus the pattern s will match an entire document x When turned on this option changes the meaning of most whitespace characters notably tabs and spaces and Literal whitespace characters are ignored and the character starts a comment that extends until a literal return or the r escape sequence is encountered Ostensibly this option intends to let you write more readable patterns Advanced Grep Topics 133 134 Perl programmers should already be familiar with these options as they correspond directly to the imsx options for Perl s m and s operators Unadorned these options turn their corresponding behavior on when preceded by a hyphen they turn the behavior off Setting and unsetting options can occur in the same set of parentheses Example Effect imsx Turn all four optio
91. order mark Your filter is responsible for handling the input correctly If the front window contains 8 bit text the input is written out as usual Scripts Scripts are similar to filters but do not operate on the text of the frontmost window Like filters you can run scripts from either a submenu at the bottom of the Camel Shebang menu or from the Scripts list palette The same options as for filters apply when running scripts hold down the Command key while double clicking a script in the list or selecting it from the menu to open the Run Options dialog hold down the Option key while double clicking on a script or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it Additional Notes In addition to the features detailed above there are some additional considerations about BBEdit s Perl integration which it may help you to be aware of Setting Menu Keys for Filters and Scripts The Filters and Scripts lists both have a Set Key button at the top of their palettes Select a filter or script from the list and click this button to set a keyboard shortcut for the selected item Manually Sorting the Filter and Script Lists By default items in the Perl Filters List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Foo would sort before 01 Bar For such
92. otherwise Text Files Saving Preferences The Text Files Saving preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it saves files now including file backup settings E BEE Preferences These BE a au ernie control BBEdit s behavior when saving text Revert _ A Fonts a LJ Force Mew Line at End FTP Settings Function Popup Glossary e Macintosh HTML Colors A HTML Markup E Unix HTML Falette L3 DOS windows HTHL Preview HTHL Tools L Use Unicode Line Breaks HTML Web Site Languages L Make Backup Before Saving Spelling a Use Document s Folder Startup State C2 Use Folder Status Bar none selected Text Editing Text Files Opening Text Files Saving Text Printing Text Search Default Line Breaks Force New Line at End When this option is selected BBEdit will always add a line break at the end of the file if it doesn t already end with one Default Line Breaks The default line breaks options let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file You can choose e Macintosh line breaks ASCII 13 if you are using the file only on a Macintosh Unix line breaks ASCII 10 if the file resides on a Unix file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses Unix e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses a DOS system Chapter 10 Preferences Additionally if the setting for Use Unicode
93. p and remembers it You can combine more than one subpattern into a grep pattern or mix subpatterns and other pattern elements as you need Taking the last set of examples you could modify these to use subpatterns wherever actual data appears Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed by 4 2 a plus sign followed by more 123445829 digits d 4 t B C four digits followed by a tab 2152 B C or a space followed by the string B C 0 9 d an optional dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more 4 296 459 19 digits and commas followed 3 5 6 4 0000 by a period then zero or 0 more digits What if we wanted to match a series of digits followed by a plus sign followed by the exact same series of digits as on the left side of the plus In other words we want to match 123441234 or 747 but not 543241984 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Using grouping parentheses you can do this by referring to a backreference also known as a captured subpattern Each set of parentheses in the pattern is numbered from left to right starting with the opening parenthesis Later in the pattern you can refer to the text matched within these backreferences by using a backslash followed by the number of the backreference Pattern Matches Examples d 1 a string of digits followed by 7 7 a plus sign followed the 123441234 same digits w st 1 double words the the Nw w 2 1 a word c
94. pattern That means that they will always succeed because there will always be at least Zero occurrences of any pattern but that they will not necessarily select any text if no occurrences of the preceding pattern are present Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For this reason when you are trying to match more than one occurrence it usually better to use a than a because requires a match whereas can match the empty string Only use when you are sure that you really mean zero or more times not just more than once Try the following examples to see how their behavior matches what you expect Pattern Text Matches sx Fourscore and seven years Fourscore and seven years 0 9 l ve been a loyal member 1983 since 1983 or so d I ve got 12 years on him 12 A BAAAAAAAB AAAAAAA A 3 BAAAAB AAA first three A s A 3 BAAAAB AAAA A 1 3 BAAAAB AAA on the first match the remaining A on the second match c andy andy likes candy andy on the first match candy on the second A Ted joined AAA yesterday AAA on the first match a from yesterday on the second Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 5o far the patterns you have seen match a single character or the repetition of a single character or class of characters This is very useful when you are looking for runs of digits or single letters but often that s not enough However by combining these patterns you can search for more co
95. perform a Grep search for a null character ASCII 0 even if it was escaped This limitation has been removed effective with the release of BBEdit 6 5 Multi File Searching The only difference between single file searching and multi file searching is that in multi file searching you need to specify the files to be searched BBEdit gives you a great deal of flexibility in how to do this You can search all the files in a given directory in a file group in open editing windows or in a BBEdit results window For finer control you can use BBEdit s new advanced multi criteria filtering options or even identify a set of files to search via an OSA script Multi File Searching 95 To look for a string in several files do the following steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu to open the Find amp Replace dialog box if it s not already open 2 Mark the Multi File Search checkbox Find amp Replace Search For O Use Grep Patterns W Start at Top Search Selection Only EQ Replace All Wrap Around W Extend Selection Pf Search Backwards Cmm Don t Find C Match Entire Words mM Cancel Replace With E Rl Multi File Search kal Batch Find Exclude Matches Folder m Applications C Other Other m l Options U Use File Filter current criteria 7 Edit 3 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text box 4 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text box Be sure to rea
96. placed in these folders will also appear in their respective submenus at the bottom of the Camel Shebang menu Filters Filters operate on the selected text of the frontmost window The current selection is passed as input to the filter and any output generated by the filter overwrites the selection In other words filters act like plug ins for text manipulation There are two ways to run filters through the Filters list palette or the Filters submenu at the bottom of the Camel Shebang menu To open the Filters list palette select it from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu You can run a filter by selecting it from the list and clicking the Run button or you can simply double click the filter name in the list Hold down the Option key while double clicking a filter or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it Optionally filter output can be sent to a different window instead of overwriting the selection hold down the Command key while selecting a filter from the Filters list palette or from the Filters submenu to open the Filter Options dialog Changes made in the Filter Options dialog affect all filters and remain in effect until you make changes in the Filter Options dialog again 250 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Using Filters with Multi Byte Text Filters are now two byte savvy If the front window is Unicode the selection is written out as big endian Unicode with a byte
97. provides a hex dump for a file that you choose Make Prototypes Generate ANSI style function prototypes for existing C functions This plug in places the prototypes in a new untitled window Prefix Suffix Lines This plug in adds or removes a prefix from all the lines of the text of the active window or of the selected text Reverse Reverses the order of the lines in the active window or the selected lines Salary Adjust This plug in directs your payroll service to adjust your gross salary by the amount you specify in minimum increments of 10 units of your local currency You must have an Internet connection to use this plug in Send PostScript Sends the current document in PostScript format to any PostScript printer available to your computer This plug in is only available when running BBEdit on Mac OS 9 and earlier Sort The Sort plug in sorts lines by collating them in alpha numeric order It can be set to ignore white space at the beginning of lines sort on leading numerical quantities only ignore case and sort in descending order For a more fully featured line sorting plug in check out LineSort a shareware plug in by Craig Maynard Un Comment This plug in automates the task of commenting and uncommenting sections of code in various programming languages Use the companion Un Comment Settings plug in to set up the comment strings for the supported languages Supplied Plug ins 269 WARNING Imp
98. provides a way to reference results generated by a batch operation A results browser does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate results windows from other types of window search results browser a subclass of results browser referringspecifically to the results of a single file Find All command or a multi file search Classes of Document As with windows there are various classes of document e document the basic document class contains properties that apply to any sort of document whether it has unsaved changes the alias to the file on disk etc e text document text documents contain information specific to text files opened for editing in BBEdit The text document class provides much greater access to document properties than before a text document s Projector state is now accessible for example and properties are generally much more consistent e group document refers to a document corresponding to an open file group A file group document doesn t present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate file group documents from other types of document e picture document refers to a document corresponding to an open picture file A picture document doesn t present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate picture documents from other types of document movie document refers to a document cor
99. reference souls fo asse print to alias e 49 sobre fo save fhe vnnd s CORAS uit saving as stationery boolean same fhe fe 33 stationery AW Default ise prin settings add to recent list boolean set f ie sgaticeting 3 recent Mie Hat Ay Dersalf ros Standard Suite add to favorites list boolean suff f Ate ageticefineg 3 Beate Sie Hat CEP Daut fron close count delete duplicate exists move get make save set Miscellaneous The right side of the window shows the syntax of the selected event as well as a brief description of its function The boldface words are keywords they must be included exactly as shown or the script won t compile The normal text tells you what kind of information goes after each keyword For example after save you must give a reference the italicized comment next to that line indicates that it s a reference to the window to be saved In other words some window object which in BBEdit would be window 1 for the frontmost window or window Text File if you want to specify a window by name we will show you how to figure all that out in a moment you have to look at the window class s dictionary entry Anything in square brackets is optional Most of the rest of the save event is optional in fact The basic event just saves the frontmost window to the same file from which it was opened However you can also optionally include the word to followed by a file reference
100. selected hard wrapped text or from the entire document if there is no selection Hard Wrap This command wraps long lines by inserting hard line breaks and can re flow fill paragraphs if desired See How BBEdit Wraps Text below for more information Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Zap Gremlins This command removes or replaces non printing characters Use this command when you have a file that may contain extraneous control characters or gremlins Zap Gremlins Zap Action v Filter Line Feeds 3 Zap Non ASCII Characters v Zap Control Characters V Zap Null ASCH 0 Characters Zapped Characters O Delete Replace with Code 47 Replace with Cancel za The check boxes in the left half of the dialog box determine which types of characters the Zap Gremlins command affects while the radio buttons determine what is done with gremlins that are found Filter Line Feeds When this option is selected Zap Gremlins converts as if the file were opened with LF Translation turned on Zap Non ASCII Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps all characters in the file which do not fall in the 7 bit or ASCII range Examples of such characters include special Macintosh characters such as bullets and typographer s quotes and and as well as all multi byte characters In general such special characters are those that you type by holding down the Option Key Zap Contro
101. settings control how BBEdit interacts with third party tools Revert Sa HTML Markup Script Editor HTML Palette AV alumes Bant Dev Tools Script Debugger set 4 HTML Preview 3 0 Script Debugger HTML Tools HTML Web Site Coding Tools Languages AW BBEdit HTML Tools AW Unix Scripting Tools Software Update Spelling val CodeWarrior gl ToolServer Startup AW Absoft Fortran flf SourceServer State RV Dreamweaver Status Bar Text Colors Mac OS API Reference Preferred Reference Text Editing kal THINE Reference THINE Reference Text Files Opening Text Files Saving Text Printing fA obiwan biWan Text Search f Mac 05 X Developer Help Tools Windows Default Shell Fbin tcsh Ki 7 Toolbox Assistant If you made any changes in the default Tools options click the Save button Now you must quit and relaunch BBEdit in order for these changes to take effect Note BBEdit no longer supports Kodex or the THINK C THINK Pascal and Symantec C environments Syntax Coloring Although it s not essential you may want to turn on syntax coloring when you use BBEdit with a development environment When syntax coloring is on BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color You can turn on syntax coloring by e choosing Syntax Coloring from the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar e selecting the Syntax Coloring option from the Text Options dialog box e setting the Syntax Coloring option i
102. suffix BBEdit looks for the file first in the same folder as the file that contains the reference to the file then in any folders within that folder BBEdit next searches your Templates and Includes folder followed by the site root if these folders have been defined in your Opening Existing Documents 29 30 HTML Web Site preferences If the CodeWarrior IDE is running and a project is open BBEdit will ask the IDE for the search paths to the current project s current target and look for files in those folders as well If the name of the file is surrounded by angle brackets BBEdit starts its search in the folder that you specified in the File Search panel of the Preferences If BBEdit can t find the file it displays a Choose Folder dialog that gives you a chance to find the file manually In some cases there may be more than one file with the same name in the various folders BBEdit looks in Normally BBEdit opens the first one it comes to then stops If you want BBEdit to find all the files that match the selected name be sure to select the Find All Matches option in the File Search panel of the Preferences Open File by Name If there is no selection or there is no text editing view in the front window Open Selection becomes Open File by Name Choosing the command lets you specify a name or an exact path for the file to be opened BBEdit will open it as described above for Open Selection You may also specify that only the lt
103. teletype Underline Displays the enclosed text in an underlined style Frames The commands on the Frames submenu help you design documents that use frames The first document loaded by the browser contains at least one lt FRAMESET gt tag and one or more FRAME tags which specify the number and sizes of the desired browser window subdivisions and indicate the URLs of the files to be loaded into each Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Frame Set Defines a frame set a series of one or more frames Indicate whether the frame set divides the browser window vertically ROWS or horizontally COLS Then indicate the size of each frame in a comma separated list using to tell the browser to use whatever space is left over from the other specified frames Frame sets can be nested For example if you want to create a framed Web page with three rows with the middle row divided into two independent columns you would first define a frame set consisting of three rows Instead of defining the second row with a FRAME tag however you would open another lt FRAMESET gt tag there this time to specify the two columns for the middle frame which would then be specified by FRAME tags Frame Defines a frame in a frame set document You will need to specify the URL of the file to be displayed in this frame either using the button or by drag and drop If the frame will be targeted by links in another frame you will also need to give the fr
104. text editor assumes that every character fits in a single byte then simple tasks like exchanging two adjacent characters can actually wreak havoc on two byte text BBEdit 6 5 fully supports editing and processing of left to right international text Right to left systems such as Hebrew and Arabic are not currently supported How Script Systems Work Apple uses the term script systems or just scripts to refer to all the various attributes used by a particular way of writing In other parts of this manual we often use script to refer to a sequence of instructions written in the AppleScript scripting language or another language such as Frontier Perl or JavaScript In this chapter we use script specifically to refer to a writing system Among other things a script defines e The alphabet actual character shapes or ideograms used in the form of one or more TrueType fonts This is why the TrueType standard allows fonts to contain thousands of different characters e The direction of writing e One or more keyboard layouts for allowing input of text if the writing system being used has few enough letters to reasonably fit on a standard keyboard Chapter 5 Working with International Text e If the language being supported requires many different characters the script system also defines an input method a special floating window or other software help that allows you to specify the symbol you want phonetically or from
105. the Hard Wrap button to perform the Hard Wrap command Click the Don t Wrap button to save the settings without changing the text If you hold down the Option key as you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit uses the last Hard Wrap settings to perform the operation without displaying a dialog box The Mark Submenu A marker is a selection range that you can name Select a marker from the Mark submenu to move quickly to a particular section of your file BBEdit uses the same markers as the MPW editor If you are programming you may be tempted to use markers to mark functions in your source code However if BBEdit supports the language you are using this is not usually necessary your functions will automatically appear on the Function pop up menu in the document window Setting Markers To set a marker 1 Select the text you want to mark 2 Choose the Set Marker command from the Mark pop up menu left or Control click on the selected text and choose Set Marker from the contextual menu BBEdit opens the Set Marker dialog box so you can name the marker If you have selected a range of text the dialog box will contain the first characters of the selection Set Marker Marker Name LMM 3 Click Set to set the marker If you hold down the Option key as you choose Set Marker BBEdit sets the marker using the leading characters of the selected text as the name of the marker without displaying a di
106. the backslash only the first two are considered part of the backreference Thus 111 would be interpreted as the 11th backreference followed by a literal 1 You may use a leading zero for example if in your replacement pattern you want the first backreference followed by a literal 1 you can use 011 If you use 11 you will get the 11th backreference even if it is empty ANN If two decimal digits follow the backslash which taken together represent the value N and if there is an Nth captured substring then all three characters are replaced with that substring If there is not an Nth captured substring then all three characters are discarded i e the backreference is replaced with the empty string AN If there is only a single digit N following the backslash and there is an Nth captured substring then both characters are replaced with that substring Otherwise both characters are discarded i e the backreference is replaced with the empty string In replacement patterns O is a backreference to the entire match exactly equivalent to amp Chapter 8 Searching with Grep POSIX Style Character Classes BBEdit now provides support for POSIX style character classes These classes are used in the form CLASS and are only available inside regular character classes in other words inside another set of square brackets Class Meaning alnum letters and digits alpha letters ascii cha
107. the function pop up menu left in the status bar behaves Show Includes When this option is selected the function pop up menu includes the files named in include directives Sort Items by Name When this option is selected the items in the function pop up menu are sorted by name Otherwise items in the pop up menu appear in the same order as they appear in the file Show Function Prototypes When this option is selected the function pop up menu includes the names of function prototypes as well as the function definitions Otherwise the function pop up menu does not include entries for function prototypes Glossary Preferences The Glossary preferences determine how BBEdit handles Glossary entries Ignore Trailing CR Click Ignore Trailing CR to have BBEdit strip off all whitespace from the end of a glossary entry when inserting it This allows glossary entries to be inserted in the middle of a line rather than as a block of text You can use the INLINE cookie in a glossary entry to achieve the same effect but only for that one entry Glossary is Language Sensitive Mark this checkbox to make BBEdit s glossary language sensitive If this feature is active then each time you bring a window to the front BBEdit automatically selects the first glossary set whose name maps to the same language as that window For example if the front window is an HTML document BBEdit selects the first glossary set whose name ends in html
108. the original line breaks untranslated If a File s Type is Unknown These settings tell BBEdit how to deal with files whose type and creator codes are not set Usually such files are created by Unix programs running on Mac OS X but they may also be downloaded from remote servers You can choose e Ignore It BBEdit will behave consistently with previous versions since the file s type is not TEXT or any other type which is recognizable as a text file type BBEdit will ignore the file in situations where a text file is required Assume It s Text BBEdit will assume that the file should be treated as text This will give maximum exposure to such files at the expense of occasionally seeing a file which doesn t actually contain text like binary data or executable files on Mac OS X Map the File Name BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if it can figure out whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffix to language mappings specified in the Languages preferences If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None then the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to recognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in Mac OS X s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the Internet Config file name mappings
109. this section 5 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box Chapter 7 Searching Note The size of both the search and replace strings is now limited only by available memory However the memory requirements for searching multi byte text files are generally at least double those for single byte text The following table explains what each of the buttons does This button Does this Find Finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window Shortcut Cmd F Find All Finds all the occurrences of the search string and displays the results in a search results window Shortcut Cmd Opt F Replace If there is a selection replaces the current selection with the replace string Otherwise finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window after the current insertion point and replaces it with the replace string Shortcut Cmd R Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in the active window with the replace string Shortcut Cmd Opt R Don t Find Saves the settings of the Find dialog box without doing a search Shortcut Cmd D Cancel Doesn t do the search and restores the settings of the dialog box to their previous state Shortcut Cmd BBEdit closes the Find dialog then selects the search string in the active window if the search was successful Once BBEdit finds your text you can use the commands in the Search menu see Search Menu Reference later in this chapter
110. to the path text box The script editor setting is stored separately for Mac OS X and Mac OS 9 and earlier This makes it easier to share one set of preferences under both operating systems without having to reset the script editor when switch booting Coding Tools These options let you select which development environments you plan to use with BBEdit These include BBEdit s built in HTML tools and a variety of programming packages including Metrowerks CodeWarrior and Absoft Fortran as well as the Dreamweaver visual HTML editor from Macromedia On Mac OS 9 and earlier BBEdit can integrate with MacPerl on Mac OS X BBEdit can integrate with any Unix scripting tool MPW s ToolServer and SourceServer Projector are also supported Turning off the tools you do not plan to use will allow BBEdit to start up faster Tools Preferences 175 176 Note Note BBEdit no longer supports Kodex MPW 411 or the THINK C THINK Pascal and Symantec C environments Mac OS API Reference These options let you specify which Macintosh Toolbox reference program you plan to use with BBEdit You can choose to use THINK Reference Toolbox Assistant ObiWan or all three Preferred Reference The Preferred Reference radio buttons lets you specify which of the Toolbox reference databases is your preferred reference BBEdit uses the preferred database when you Option double click on a Toolbox name or when you choose the Find in Reference command Th
111. track the modification status of files and determine whether a given file is editable at any point in time MPW s Projector source control system places a resource of type ckid in each file Many other Mac applications including BBEdit also honor these ckid resources This allows Projector or similar systems like Mac CVS to work by preventing files from being changed accidentally Multi File Replacing 105 During a multi file replace whenever BBEdit attempts to modify a file which is designated Read Only it will display the following dialog asking you how to handle the file A Xavier Users admin Desktop Files 6 5 Notes is checked out as Read Only Do you want to Modify Read Only the file and do the replace or skip this file Don t Ask Again Cancel Skip MRO amp Replace Choosing the Cancel button will stop the multi file replace operation and leave the current file untouched Choosing the Skip button will cause BBEdit to skip this file only leaving it untouched and continue the multi file replace operation Choosing the MRO amp Update button will cause BBEdit to mark the file Modify Read Only change the file and continue the multi file replace operation If you select the Don t Ask Again option before clicking Skip or MRO amp Update then BBEdit will apply the same action to all files with this Projector state that it encounters during this and only this search operation Note An equivalent dialog w
112. two separate HTML tags in it as we intended More generally the pattern matches all the text in a given line or paragraph from the first lt to the last gt The pattern only does what we intended when there is only one HTML tag in a line or paragraph This is what we meant when we say that the regular quantifiers try to make the longest possible match Non Greedy Quantifiers To work around this longest match behavior you can modify your pattern to take advantage of non greedy quantifiers Quantifier Matches one or more zero or more 22 Zero or one COUNT match exactly COUNT times MIN match at least MIN times MIN MAX match at least MIN times but no more than MAX 122 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep new in 6 5 Astute readers will note that these non greedy quantifers correspond exactly to their normal greedy counterparts appended with a question mark Revisting our problem of matching HTML tags for example we can search for lt gt This matches an opening bracket then one or more occurrences of any character other than a return followed by a closing bracket The non greedy quantifer achieves the results we want preventing BBEdit from overrunning the closing angle bracket and matching across several tags A slightly more complicated example how could you write a pattern that matches all text between lt B gt and lt B gt HTML tags Consider the sample text below lt B gt
113. use of BBEdit s grep searching Most Characters Match Themselves Most characters that you type into the Find dialog box match themselves For instance if you are looking for the letter t Grep stops and reports a match when it encounters a t in the text This idea is so obvious that it seems not worth mentioning but the important thing to remember is that these characters are search patterns Very simple patterns to be sure but patterns nonetheless Escaping Special Characters In addition to the simple character matching discussed above there are various special characters that have different meanings when used in a grep pattern than in a normal search The use of these characters is covered in the following sections However sometimes you will need to include an exact or literal instance of these characters in your grep pattern In this case you must use the backslash character before that special character to have it be treated literally this is known as escaping the special character To search for a backslash character itself double it so that its first appearance will escape the second For example perhaps the most common special character in grep is the dot In grep a dot character will match any character except a return But what if you only want to match a literal dot If you escape the dot it will only match another literal dot character in your text So most characters match themse
114. used the A tag to mark your main topics for example all H2 headers this produces an instant topic level index of the current document The index is placed after the lt BODY gt tag unless the insertion point is in an already existing index in which case the old index is replaced with the new one Do not remove the comment markers around the index if you want to be able to update it in the future Index Document also adds A name tags to all heading tags which do not already have them HTML Tool Descriptions 205 206 Index Folder Works like Index Document but produces an index of the HTML files within a specific folder You can choose from five different styles of indexes including that provides full information about every referenced file The best way to see what each format of index looks like is to experiment for yourself Index Site Creates an index of all the HTML documents in your site as with Index Folder GoLive Home Page or PageMill Cleaner Cleans up the often gnarly HTML code created by these WYSIWYG editing tools This will make the file easier to edit smaller and often slightly quicker to load into a browser The GoLive cleaner removes font tags with no semantic value that is tags which contain nothing at all or just white space The PageMill cleaner removes the NATURALSIZEFLACG attribute that PageMill puts in lt IMG gt tags and turns every two consecutive line break tags into paragraph P
115. way the Paragraph tool does then adds opening and closing paragraph tags around them When converting HTML to TEXT it makes sure that there are line breaks around each paragraph in the resulting text HTML Entities When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool converts characters from their positions in the standard Macintosh character set into HTML entities either using names or the code in decimal or hexadecimal You can specify whether the tool should ignore lt and gt This is useful when translating text already marked up as HTML You can also specify that all Unicode text should be converted to entities 210 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Templates In addition to providing many facilities for creation and markup of individual documents the HTML Tools also incorporate a Template facility which can be used to quickly create or revise a set of HTML documents that share a common format structure or content You can design a skeleton document make a template from it and then use that template over and over again to produce new pages ready to fill with content or to insert into existing text documents to provide an uniform structure or appearance Templates may also employ Placeholders and Include Files see Appendix C adding even more power to this useful function Template Setup A folder named HTML Templates which contains some sample templates is provided as part of the standard BBEdit installation We s
116. with or end with or not When filtering by Language you choose a supported language from a pop up menu When filtering by Projector status you choose a valid status from a pop up menu or missing to indicate that you want documents that don t have Projector status information To quickly set a match criterion drag a file from the Finder to a field in the Define File Filter dialog BBEdit inserts the appropriate attribute from the dragged file if possible Multi File Searching 103 104 Note When using a time or date criterion you can use the special words below to specify dates and times relative to the current date and time Word Means now current date and time today midnight on the current date yesterday current date and time minus 24 hours tomorrow current date and time plus 24 hours You can add any number of criteria using the More Criteria button To delete the last criterion click the Fewer Criteria button To select any single criterion for deletion press the Option key and click on the desired item To select multiple continuous criteria press Option Shift and drag across the items or to select discontinuous criteria press Command Option and click on the desired items Click Save to save the file filter and use it for this search BBEdit will ask you to name the filter and it will then appear on the Filters pop up menu in the Find dialog and in the Define File Filter dialog Click Revert to u
117. with Next This command makes the second window the active window Choose this command repeatedly to alternate between the front two windows Synchro Scrolling When you have two or more windows open Synchro Scrolling makes both files scroll when you scroll one This feature is useful to look over two versions of the same file Window Names The last items in the Window menu are the names of all the open documents browsers and other editing windows Choose a window s name from this menu or use its numbered Command key equivalent if applicable to bring that window to the front You can also use the Windows floater to select windows quickly Window Menu 89 90 Chapter 6 Working with Windows CHAPTER Searching This chapter describes BBEdit s powerful Find command now enhanced with a flexible file filtering mechanism It tells you how to search for text in the active window or within a set of files BBEdit can also do advanced pattern or grep searching To learn about pattern searching you should read this chapter first then read Chapter 8 Searching with Grep In this chapter Basic Searching and Replacing seene oer Rr aom Rao oy SIR Race 92 Search Settings 94 Special Characters 95 Mit File Sear CS uade otto 9 cg dee US ROC DERE OHIO HO a e ELE 95 Multi File Search Results Batch Find 97 Multi File Search Results File by File 98 Specifying the Search Set 99 Multi File Search Options 1
118. wrap the background color of the cell and the scope of the header information in this cell if any You can also specify the axes an abbreviated version of the cell s content and which header cells contain information about the current cell Many of the less familiar and infrequently used attributes have use in certain applications such as speech accessibility To provide maximum accessibility for tabular data we suggest consulting the HTML 4 specification Caption Specifies a caption for a table You may also optionally specify the caption s vertical alignment Colgroup Col These tags are used to define column and column groups Browsers that understand HTML 4 tables can for example be told to format a number of columns the same way or to place rules between column groups using this construction The contents of a column group may be one or more COL elements or none at all if the SPAN attribute is used You can specify the span of the column or group its desired width and its vertical and horizontal alignment Cells within this column group may inherit some or all of these attributes depending on the attributes of the individual TD or TH elements THead TFoot TBody Defines an optional table section element These tags are new in HTML 4 and can be used independently of the TH tag the latter indicates that particular cells should be displayed in a heading style usually displayed by browsers as boldface TH
119. www barebones com support lists html The discussion lists for BBEdit often cover BBEdit specific scripting topics and are a good place to ask questions about BBEdit s AppleScript implementation Mac Scripting http www its unimelb edu au hma pub macscrpt Unofficial list covers AppleScript and other Macintosh scripting languages with occasional forays into peripheral topics Web Sites AppleScript at Apple Computer http www apple com applescript This is the starting point for AppleScript from the people who invented it Includes a tutorial and a good amount of technical information The AppleScript Sourcebook http www AppleScriptSourcebook com An extensive collection of links and articles about AppleScript AppleScript Primer http www maccentral com columns briggs shtml MacCentral columnist Bill Briggs offers an ongoing series of lessons for beginning scripters Quite a range of topics covered increasing in difficulty as time goes on Note that the oldest columns are on the bottom MacScripter Net http macscripter net and http osaxen com A good selection of AppleScript related news and topics including MacScripter s Magazine a standalone multimedia tutorial for AS beginners and a very comprehensive list of scripting additions on its related site AppleScript Overview 223 Important ScriptWeb http www scriptweb com This site covers all scripting languages not just AppleScript Also it has
120. 01 File Filters 102 MulticEile Replaeitig errari ea e der meo ew ew Eure Sse one uci dde 104 Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs 105 CICK SCOT DI 271a 9 Slo te sabi UTR how S oe how en ope hole aie ia tut op 106 cearc Menu Releternte aise aor S RUE PU e ob bos SUP SUPUI tate Sate 107 Find 107 Quick Search 107 Find Again 107 Find Selection 107 Enter Search Replace String 107 Replace 107 Replace All 108 Replace amp Find Again 108 Find in Next File 108 Open All Matches 108 Find amp Replace All Matches 108 Go to Line 108 Go to Center Line 108 Go to Previous Next Error 108 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 108 Find Differences 109 Apply to New 109 Apply to Old 109 Find in Reference 109 Find Definition 109 91 92 Basic Searching and Replacing This section describes the basic steps for searching and replacing text in a window Later sections in this chapter cover more advanced techniques To search and replace text in the active window follow these steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find amp Replace dialog box Find amp Replace Search For m 8 U Use Grep Patterns a 7 FP a 531 Replace U Start at Top Search Selection Only a eee Replace All L1 Wrap Around 3 Extend Selection rm Ls h Backward m Search Backwards
121. 148 Note The Preferences Command To open the Preferences window on Mac OS X choose the Preferences command from the BBEdit menu On Mac OS 9 and earlier choose Preferences from the Edit menu eo BBEdit Preferences These settings control miscellaneous aspects of BBEdit s Revert Sav appearance and behavior Application Optional Mac 05 Services Optional Application Services Browser Display Ww QuickTime Translation Ww BBEdit Plug ins Diffe rences gf QuickTime Playback gf internet Helpers Menu Editor Defaults File Filters If Font Menu File Search Ww Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu File Types Remember Dialog Box Placement Fonts FTP Settings Window Menu Sort Windows by Function Popup 7 Show Full Paths f h Name Glossary gl Group by Window Kind eo Creation Order HTML Colors HTML Markup Verify Open Files After HTML Palette gl Activating BBEdit 7 Running a BBEdit Plug In HTML Preview Running an OSA Script Running a Perl Script HTML Tools HTML Web Site E Running a ToolServer Script Languages Software Update i MERES UELLS The small text area at the top left of the Preferences window next to the Revert and Save buttons gives you a brief description of the contents of the currently displayed preferences panel The list along the left side of the window lets you select the preferences panel to use To save your preferences click Save To have BBEdit ba
122. 166 Printing Settings When this option is selected BBEdit restores the printing information stored with a document Otherwise it uses the default printing settings Default State for New Documents The Default State for New Documents setting lets you choose the kind of state information that BBEdit adds when you create and save a file You can choose to save no state information MPW state information or BBEdit state information See the section on Saving State Information in Chapter 3 for more details on the different types of states Always Add State When this option is selected BBEdit always adds state information when you save a file Otherwise BBEdit saves state information only for files that already have state information Status Bar Preferences This preferences panel lets you choose which icons and pop up menus appear in the status bar of BBEdit document windows D SSS pBEdit Preferences EES These settings control the appearance and behavior of status displays in text editing views Application a Window Status Displays Browser Display E Lf Show Status Bar _ Show Line Numbers Differences Editor Defaults m Show Philip Bar L Show Cursor Position L1 Show Tab Stops L1 Show Current Function File Filterz File Search File Types Fonts FTP Settings m Functian Papup Ej Insert Menu Status Bar Controls F tion P Cary EST v window Options ef File Path HTML Colors v Markers be Get Info Icon HTML
123. 5 621 Words 20 a8 Lines 10 34 Pages De Paginate l Copy Path Cc OK 3 To find out how many pages the document will take to print click the Paginate button To put the full path to the file on the Clipboard click the Copy Path button Super Get Info If you hold down the Option key while pulling down the Window menu the Get Info command becomes Super Get Info This command provides integration with Super Get Info Bare Bones Software s Mac OS X file info utility If you choose it BBEdit will ask Super Get Info to open an info window on the file associated with the current editing window If the frontmost window is not an editing window or does not have an associated file on disk this command will be disabled The Super Get Info command is only available if e you are running on Mac OS X e you have Super Get Info installed on your computer Super Get Info is a utility designed to serve as a supplement for the Mac OS X Finder s Show Info command Super Get Info allows you to open more than one info window at a time view and edit the Macintosh type and creator codes associated with a file view and edit the Unix owner group and permission settings associated with a file or folder and much more For more information or to download a free demo version visit our web site 88 Chapter 6 Working with Windows new in 6 5 Tip Reveal in Finder If the active window is a document that is saved in a file the Reveal in
124. 53 smart quotes 55 Soft Wrap Text command 48 soft wrapping 55 63 64 as default 64 with imported text 64 solid diamond 47 Index 303 S cont Sort plug in 269 source files 243 source management 256 SourceServer 256 SPAN tag 199 special folders 11 spell checking 74 external spell checker 76 user dictionary 76 Spelling Preferences 164 split bar 49 in browsers 142 startup items 20 Startup Preferences 164 state 24 State Preferences 165 stationery 23 87 Stationery List 87 status bar 47 hiding 48 56 in browsers 142 in disk browsers 143 Status Bar Preferences 166 STRIKE tag 200 STRONG tag 200 STYLE tag 191 stylesheets 191 SUB subscript tag 199 subpatterns 120 substitution in glossaries 216 suffixes 269 SUP superscript tag 199 Synchro Scrolling command 89 syntax checking 202 syntax coloring 57 T TABLE tag 193 Tables submenu 193 tabs converting to and from spaces 62 Tag Maker command 184 185 TBODY tag 194 TD tag 194 templates for HTML documents 183 211 scripts 293 variables 292 Text Colors Preferences 168 Text Editing Preferences 169 Text Files Opening Preferences 171 Text Files Saving Preferences 172 304 Index T cont Text highlighting 44 text panel 144 Text Printing Preferences 173 Text Search Preferences 174 text transformation 58 text wrapping 63 TEXTAREA tag 196 TFOOT tag 194 TH tag 194 THEAD tag 194 THINK Reference 70 time placeholder 216 time stamps 42 Tool List floating win
125. 70 Finding more plug ins 270 Plug in compatibility 270 e Mac OS X Plug ins 270 Command Reference 271 PASSIO MING EVS Anus See eit aah de e EE dues pd 271 Listing by Menu and Command Name sues 272 Listing by Default Key Equivalents sese esses 279 Editing Shortcuts 283 Mouse Commands cce res 283 Aow and Delete Seve Sasso aga secos Goce be edo de dotes 284 Emacs Key DIndllg5 sariren e bate asc iot con kg nce Haie abditis 285 Placeholders and Include Files 287 PlacebolelefS 5 34 atte due To ete a about aw a he elas ee ee BE 287 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 290 gfe Rete sa PIES ERO ROTER ee ea en ee a 291 Simple Includes 291 Persistent Includes 291 e Include Files with Variables 292 Including AppleScripts 293 e Including Perl Scripts 294 Other Include Notes 295 Index 297 CHAPTER Welcome to BBEdit This chapter introduces you to BBEdit a high performance HTML and text editor for the Macintosh Gene SEALS PTOL 1 Whats BBE saosa T iania GE Cab aH a e dE ORE REC dea How Can Use BBE CIC 24 292 d arta Er rto o CERE AUR 2 Working with Development Environments 2 Writing HTML Documents 2 Eluman Interface INOEGSau de sc ein Moe Rar UE ee oe aa mon e eed a 3 Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Menu Command Keys 3 Contextual Menus 4 e Snappy Palettes 4 Dialog Box Command Keys 4 Changes
126. As dialog is the standard Save dialog with a few additions Save As Stationery When this option is selected BBEdit saves the document as a stationery pad When you later open this document BBEdit uses it as the basis of a new untitled document The new document will inherit the contents and display settings of the stationery document but BBEdit will prompt you for a name when you save it Save Selection Only This option is not available and cannot be selected in the current version of BBEdit It will return in future releases Options Button The Options button opens a dialog box that lets you specify how much state information BBEdit saves with the file what kind of line breaks to save and what file type to use See the next section on File Saving Options for more information File Saving Options When you use the Save As command the Option button opens a dialog box that lets you control how much state information is saved with the file what file creator to use and what kind of line breaks to use Save Options File Creator BBEdit A Save State BBEdit a Line Breaks Macintosh M Save as Unicode S iD Bytes 27 Cancel p fi 1g V Ci ude E Te UU ge Mz f OK Setting the File Creator The File Creator is the information stored with the files that tells the Finder which application created the file The default creator is naturally BBEdit but you can choose other types from this
127. BBEdit to search for However if you do that in AppleScript you must keep in mind that AppleScript will first interpret the backslashes before passing them to BBEdit To pass one backslash to BBEdit from AppleScript you must write two in AppleScript So to tell BBEdit to search for a single literal backslash from an AppleScript you must write no fewer than four backslashes in the script Each pair of backslashes is interpreted as a single backslash by AppleScript which then passes two backslashes to BBEdit And BBEdit interprets those two backslashes as a single one for search purposes This proliferation of backslashes can make your scripts look a bit like a blown over picket fence The Every Item Issue When writing a script that loops through every item of a BBEdit object for example every line of a document don t do it like this repeat with i in every line of document 1 do stuff here end repeat This forces BBEdit to evaluate every line of document 1 every time through the loop which will slow your script significantly Instead write set theLines to every line of document 1 repeat with i in theLines do stuff here end repeat More Memory When running scripts that work with large chunks of data you may need to increase BBEdit s memory allocation When BBEdit runs a script the script and its data are held in BBEdit s application memory partition Moving Scripts to BBEdit 6 As mentioned earlier BBEdit
128. BEdit plug ins small add on programs that add functionality to BBEdit BBEdit plug ins are stored in the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 to learn more about the organization of the BBEdit Support folder or Chapter 15 for information about the standard plug ins supplied with BBEdit Internet Helpers Menu When this option is selected BBEdit uses information provided by the Internet control panel to provide access to client software through the Internet Helpers menu left See the Additional Software section of Chapter 2 to learn more about Internet services Font Menu Mark this checkbox to display a Font menu in BBEdit s menu bar Since BBEdit edits plain text most users won t need to change the font often However if you frequently edit text in more than one language you may find this option convenient Optional Mac OS Services QuickTime Translation If you mark this checkbox and have a recent version of QuickTime installed BBEdit will ask QuickTime if it recognizes any files that BBEdit doesn t If QuickTime recognizes the file as one it can display BBEdit will open it for viewing otherwise the file will be opened as raw text QuickTime Playback This checkbox controls whether BBEdit opens QuickTime movies for playback in a movie window or if it just opens them as text data in an editing window The default is to recognize QuickTime movies and display them with a player Changes to this preference take effect immediately
129. Behavior as described in the previous section then the effects of Command and Option shown in the table above will be reversed accordingly Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note The Numeric Keypad Most Macintosh keyboards have a numeric keypad on the right side Normally you use the keys on the keypad to enter numbers If you prefer you can use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu to open the Preferences window 2 Select Text Editing from the list at the left edge of the dialog box 3 Mark the Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement checkbox k show selection end of line down Scroll down 1 2 3 You can use the Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To change the behavior of the numeric keypad hold down the Option key and press the Clear key at the upper left hand corner of the numeric keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on some keyboards This toggles the keypad between moving the cursor and entering numbers Go To Line Command To move the insertion point to a specific line use the Go To Line command in the Search menu When you choose this command BBEdit opens the Go To Line dialog box Go To Line Cancel Line 15 d Go To y Type the number of the line you want to move to and click Go To The Go To Line command honors t
130. Bones Software see our web site for more details The Document icon button represents the current document Clicking this icon is the same as choosing Reveal in Finder from the Windows menu it opens the Finder window that contains the document You can also drag the document icon to any other application or you can drag it to the Trash which is the same as choosing Close amp Delete from the File menu The key control shows and hides the status bar when running on Mac OS 9 and earlier On Mac OS X the status bar display is toggled by the button in the top right corner of the window Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip The Function Pop Up Menu The Function pop up menu lists the functions defined in this file for a programming language source file or the tags described in the table above for an HTML document The following indicators appear in the pop up to show the type of function Indicator Meaning the function containing the insertion point T C C typedef Q C C pragma mark directive italic name C C function prototype 1 6 heading level in HTML files tag name tag name for the indicated name or ID attribute value in HTML files The Split Bar Every editing window has a split bar a small black bar above the scroll bar that lets you split the window into two panes Splitting the window lets you edit a document in two places at the same time Each pane is independently scrollable and unlik
131. Command Period 4 comments 269 removing 205 Compare Revisions command 259 comparing files 70 multiple files 73 Compile command 243 252 compile errors Compile Errors browser 243 complex patterns 119 298 Index C cont Concatenate Files plug in 267 context sensitive HTML 184 185 control characters 61 Convert to ASCII plug in 267 Convert to Client Side Map command 198 Convert to Table command 194 Copy amp Append command 45 Copy command 4 45 268 Copy Lines Containing plug in 268 creating documents 21 from templates 211 HTML documents 21 181 with clipboard 21 with selection 21 creator 23 CSS 186 import 186 format 187 cursor movement 50 using arrow keys 51 cursor position 47 56 custom markup 212 Cut amp Append command 45 cut and paste 45 Cut command 4 45 268 Cut Lines Containing plug in 268 date placeholder 216 DD tag 193 defined term 199 definition list 193 DEL tag 192 199 Delete key 44 52 284 deleted text 192 deleting text 44 Detab command 62 development environments 241 configuring BBEdit for use with 242 source and header files 243 DEN tag 199 dialog keyboard shortcuts 4 181 dictionary AppleScript 226 Differences command 72 Differences Preferences 151 directory list HTML 193 disk browsers 14 20 21 26 142 file list panel 144 status bar 143 text panel 144 Display lines 232 DIV division tag 192 DOCTYPE 182 D cont documents comparing 70 creating 21 double clicking 23 edit
132. Design Group s HTML Help reference page http www htmlhelp com reference html40 special object html The lt OBJECT gt tag like the lt IMG gt and lt APPLET gt tags allows you to reserve screen space in the browser window recommend an amount of white space between the object and surrounding text align the object set its border specify alt text to be displayed if the object can t be displayed and so forth You will also need to specify at least the codebase and class ID of the object for ActiveX controls and fill in the Data field for embedded objects such as Shockwave animations which will be handled by plug ins The Standby field can be used to tell browsers a text message to be displayed while the object is loading For more information on the lt OBJECT gt tag consult the HTML 4 specification Param To pass parameters to a Java applet ActiveX control or plug in the lt PARAM gt tag can be used between the lt OBJECT gt and lt OBJECT gt or APPLET and APPLET tags Each parameter to be passed to the object requires a separate lt PARAM gt tag You must specify the name and value of each parameter the actual parameter names and values required will vary depending on the object being embedded HTML Tool Descriptions 197 198 Script Begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained i
133. E tag 193 Precompile command 253 Preferences 148 Application 149 Browser Display 150 Differences 151 Editor 51 53 242 Editor Defaults 151 File Filters 153 File Search 154 File Types 23 155 FTP Settings 156 Function Popup 158 243 Glossary 158 HTML Colors 158 HTML Markup 159 HTML Palette 160 HTML Preview 160 HTML Tools 161 HTML Web Site 162 Languages 57 162 Printing 39 Services 10 Spelling 164 Startup 164 State 165 Status Bar 166 Text Colors 168 Text Editing 169 Text Files Opening 171 Saving 172 Text Printing 173 Text Search 174 Tools 11 175 242 Windows 56 176 Prefix Suffix Lines plug in 269 prefixes 269 preformatted text 193 Preprocess command 253 Print One Copy command 40 printing 39 Printing Options command 41 Projector 256 prototypes 269 pull down menus 3 Python scripts 245 Q QUOTATION tag 199 RBBEdit tool 254 recording scripts 224 Redo command 46 reflowing paragraphs 65 reformatting HTML 204 regular expressions see grep relative placeholder 290 Remove Line Breaks command 63 removing comments 205 repetition metacharacters 118 Replace 93 Replace amp Find Again command 93 98 108 Replace All 93 97 98 105 108 Replace command 107 replacing text 44 see also searching Return key 4 Reveal in Finder command 89 Reverse Lines plug in 269 Revision History command 259 Rewrap Quoted Text 60 Rez 62 rubber stamp 42 S SAMP tag 200 Save a Copy to FIP Server command 33 Sav
134. Edit Tool To assign a key to a BBEdit plug in 1 Select the tool you wish to assign a key equivalent to in the Tools List 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for Convert to ASCIL Reset no keystroke defined Cancel d oK 3 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any key combined with Command plus Shift Option or Control modifiers if desired The equivalent must use at least the Command or the Control modifier key to be valid You can also use Function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click Save Warning If you try to assign a key sequence that is already used elsewhere BBEdit will warn you that there is a conflict and ask you whether you want to reassign that key sequence to the new item 266 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins Removing a Key Assignment To remove a key assignment from a BBEdit plug in 1 Choose the Tool from the Tools List window 2 Click Set Key 3 BBEdit opens the Set Key dialog 4 Click Reset BBEdit removes the key assignment from the plug in Supplied Plug ins This section describes the standard BBEdit plug ins installed with BBEdit Add Remove Line Numbers This plug in applies or removes line numbers to each line of the text in the active window or in the selection Columnize Organizes the selected line delimited text into column delimited text either by row or by column Concatenate Merges two or more files and places the resu
135. Edit skip any files whose names are enclosed in parentheses when scanning Checking In Check the boxes for the types of files you want to add to the project You can choose text files resource files or all files Keep Modifiable Check this box to allow you to continue to edit the file after it has been added to the project Use this function when you wish to record a revision but are not yet finished working on the file Touch after Checking In Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make verify the contents of the file after adding it to the Projector database Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Check In Folder Allows you to check in an entire folder of files at once You are first prompted for the folder that contains the files you want to check in Then a folder browser like the one below appears showing all the files in that folder and its subfolders Check In Folder Select Files or Folders to Check In Y T SimpleText C AboutBax c D AboutBax h AGFile h D AGFileLib xcoff E AppleGusde lue xcoff BuidFile D c template E CarbonLibPrefix h CarbonPrefix h ChangeLog Bi Chpboard c Chpboard h Customlnfa plist DumpCompile c D GxFile c i Done J Select the file or files to
136. F Use File Filter current criteria peg Edit e selected f ana a Options 2 Choose the desired search results window from the Search Target pop up menu the second menu The Search Target pop up menu defaults to the frontmost search results window If you have more than one open you can choose another from the menu Searching All the Open Documents You can limit the set of files to be searched to the open editing windows One advantage of this kind of multi file search is that you can search windows that haven t been saved to a file yet To search all the open windows choose Open Documents from the Search Type pop up menu The text box below the pop up menu tells you how many windows will be searched X Multi File Search SY Batch Find C Exclude Matches T l Options 3 Use File Filter current criteria f Edit Searching the Files in a File Group If the files you are working with are all listed in a BBEdit file group you can limit the multi file search to the files in the group 100 Chapter 7 Searching new in 6 5 To search the files in a file group 1 Choose File Group from the Search Type pop up menu 2 Choose the group from the Search Target pop up menu BBEdit lists all open file groups on this menu To search in a file group that s not open click the Other button on the right hand side of the Find dialog and select that file group using the standard Open dialog Searching with a
137. File Filter dialog below appears You can also define new file filters in the File Filters pane in the Preferences window see chapter 10 Edit File Filter 5 h Criteria E LAND ri crurum earch Criteria fe XUL More Criteria C Any OR If you have the Preferences dialog open you will not be able to add filters in the Find dialog To work around this close the Preferences dialog before using the Find dialog to add new filters The Edit File Filter dialog lets you specify multiple criteria that determine whether a given file is selected by the filter You can choose whether these criteria are exclusive that is whether a file must meet every listed test to be selected or inclusive that is whether a file that meets any of the tests is selected using the Every AND and Any OR radio buttons at the top of the dialog Chapter 7 Searching new in 6 5 Note Tip To add a test click More Criteria Anew row appears in the dialog as shown below Edit File Filter Search Criteria E AND arr ccc P arcae A earch Criteria CIS More Criteria f Fewer Criteria m m r1 Revert r Close Save The leftmost column lets you specify which attribute of a file you wish to test BBEdit lets you test a file s name the name of its enclosing folder its creator or type its creation and modification date or both date and time or its Finder label visibility Projector status or the programming or markup languag
138. Files new in 6 5 Creating and Saving Documents To create a new document window within BBEdit pull down the File menu and move to the New submenu Since BBEdit allows creating several kinds of documents you will see several options as follows Text Document XN New with Stationery F Open a OQ with Clipboart 3 NJ Open Hidden HTML Document ASN Open from FTP Server 4360 Open File by Name 32D File Group pen Recent Disk Browser N Close W FTF Browser Save a6 5 Save As Shell Worksheet bin tcsh Save to FTP Server 4 36 5 Shell Worksheet Save a Copy to FTP Server C365 Page Setup Print ab P If you choose to create a new Text Document BBEdit opens an empty text window With selection opens a new text window containing any text selected in the active document and having the same display font saving you the trouble of copying and pasting it With Clipboard opens a new text window and automatically pastes the contents of the current Clipboard into it HTML Document brings up a dialog with options for creating a new HTML structured document see Chapter 11 for more information on working with HTML documents File Group opens a new File Group see Using File Groups below for more information Disk Browser opens a new disk browser see Chapter 9 for more information FTP Browser opens a new FTP browser see later in this chapter for more information
139. II 13 if you are using the file only on a Macintosh or will be sending it to another Macintosh user Unix line breaks ASCII 10 if the file resides on a Unix file server or if you will be sending it to someone who uses a Unix system e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS or Windows file server or if you will be sending it to someone who uses a DOS or Windows system On Mac OS 9 and earlier almost all applications expect or require files formatted with Macintosh line breaks However many of the Unix tools supplied with Mac OS X require files to be formatted with Unix line breaks Saving as Unicode You can choose to save a file as Unicode Unicode is an international standard for text encoding that provides the characters needed for many of the world s languages Chapter 5 contains more information on handling Unicode files with BBEdit e Save as Unicode Saves the file as Unicode if marked Chapter 3 Working with Files Note new in 6 5 new in 6 5 e Swap Bytes Since Unicode uses two bytes to represent each character this leaves the question of which of the two bytes comes first whether it is little endian or big endian By default BBEdit writes Unicode big endian the standard By marking Swap Bytes you can write little endian files instead which some Windows software requires UTF 8 Encoding UTF 8 encoding is a more compact variant of Unicode that uses 8 bit tokens where possible to enco
140. ML documents Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces instead of a tab character every time you press the Tab key Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols to represent non printing characters Symbol Meaning tab space non breaking space line break q page break other non printing characters Chapter 10 Preferences Note Note Note Show Spaces If this setting is checked and Show Invisibles is active BBEdit will display placeholder characters for spaces Uncheck this option to suppress the display of spaces which will reduce clutter when you are displaying invisible characters Non breaking spaces typed by pressing Option space will not be displayed with a placeholder Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in one of the languages that BBEdit knows how to parse BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color The languages that BBEdit knows about are the ones listed in the Languages panel of the Preferences dialog Remember that the document must be saved to a file and that the file must end with a suffix extension that corresponds to a language that BBEdit can parse You can select the colors that BBEdit uses for syn
141. Notes Changes from Previous Versions BBEdit 6 0 and 6 1 represented a major under the hood reworking of the software which allowed us to add many important new capabilities and to prepare for the future especially with the release of Mac OS X Major features and improvements introduced in these versions included e Native support for Mac OS X in BBEdit 6 1 e International text support that lets you edit documents in any left to right script system supported by your Macintosh including multi byte scripts like Chinese and Japanese using inline input Additionally BBEdit can read and write Unicode files Enhanced scripting support allows recording of commands and any BBEdit menu command can be replaced or augmented by a script in other words BBEdit is now recordable and attachable Enhanced syntax coloring with greater flexibility as well as built in support for PHP3 Plug in support for syntax coloring means that third party developers are able to add modules to BBEdit to provide support for coloring languages that BBEdit doesn t support out of the box Expanded contextual menu support including access to the Tag Maker and Edit Tag commands for quickly adding or modifying HTML markup Support for additional Web standards such as WML Wireless Markup Language and XHTML in BBEdit s HTML tools Advanced multi file search filters that let you chose precisely which files to search based on partial filename parent folder nam
142. On Mac OS 9 and earlier you can configure these mappings in the Internet control panel on Mac OS X a set of default mappings is present but these are not currently user configurable Regardless of the OS you are running BBEdit on you should select whichever setting makes the most sense for the sorts of files you work with if the files are downloaded from remote hosts and often don t have correct file types but you know that they re always text then you can select Assume It s Text Given that Mac OS X does not set the file type of any text file created by a Unix program to a useful value you may find it more useful to use Map the File Name this will generally yield the best results Text Files Opening Preferences 171 172 Note Interpret File Contents These settings establish the default behavior when reading text files either the contents are auto detected using information in the file itself or you can force BBEdit to always interpret the file s contents as UTF 8 Unicode UTF 16 or byte swapped Unicode This not only establishes the default behavior when opening files without using the file dialogs it also establishes the default setting of the Read As pop up menu when using the Open dialog Previous versions of BBEdit contained a Soft Wrap SimpleText Documents preference setting it has been removed Now SimpleText documents are always soft wrapped when opened unless they contain saved BBEdit state that says
143. PO FOlder sc ensi rore dt Ves doe er ds Dictionaries 12 Glossary 12 Help 12 HTML Templates 12 Language Modules 12 MacPerl Support 13 Menu Scripts 13 Plug Ins 13 Scripts 14 Search Scripts 14 e Shutdown Items 14 e Startup Items 14 e Stationery 15 Unix Support 15 Other BBEdit Files and Folders eese sx Pt ER ERR ees wee BBEdit Preferences Folder 15 e BBEdit Prefs Data 15 e BBEdit FTP Bookmarks 16 e Clipboards 16 e File Filters 16 BBEdit Grep Patterns 16 ToolServer Worksheet 16 Recent Files amp Favorites 16 e Recent Folders amp Favorites 17 BBEdit lable Builder i44 d TROU E p EE S SES UMS ia ded Working with Files Launching BDEGIE cesse ioex g obe em US e dL i p e vates Startup Items 20 Memory ConsideralioDs eee eed EP US Rd RA weed Creating and Saving Documents idees Gt Gs E DEEP ETAT Save As Options 23 File Saving Options 23 e Long File Names 25 Saving with Authentication 25 Opening Existing Documents esse RU ERE E E AEN dA Opening Multi Byte Documents 26 Using the Open Command 27 Using the Open Hidden Command 29 e Using the Open Recent Command 29 Opening Several Files at Once 29 Using the Open Selection Command 29 vi Chapter 4 Opening From and Saving to FIP Servers 005 31 I DESDIOWSOES codd Ed a d es tx tesoro d
144. Preview Preview in New Window Preview With Block Elements Paragraph Paragraph Div Horizontal Rule Heading H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Address Blockquote Center Deleted Text Inserted Text Noscript Preformatted Appendix A Command Reference Cmd M Cmd Opt M none none submenu none submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu submenu Cmd Ctl P none none none none none none Cmd Ctl H none none none none none none none none none none none none none CSS import Box Padding Border Margins Background Font Text Format Head Elements Base Link Meta Script Noscript Style Lists List Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory List Item none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none Cmd Ctl L none none none none none none Tables Table Row Row TD TD TH TH Caption Colgroup Col THead TFoot TBody Convert to Table Inline Anchor Image Applet Object Param Script Map Area Convert to Client Side Map Break Break Font Base Font Bidirectional Override Quotation Span Subscript Superscript
145. R Working with International Text This chapter describes how BBEdit s newly introduced support for international text formats including Unicode works If you need to work with such text we strongly recommend that you read through this entire chapter to familiarize yourself with how BBEdit handles it In this chapter Am International Text Primer s vos os dts eis poet ease br ees 77 How SerptSystems VOER cedes recien mated Mid dedico poma e ne eee 78 Using CIPRO YS EI ad des wad UST UR Eb e e Xu EGS Oe ees 79 Script Systems in BBEdit 80 Unicode see n Seba Bertone aie Pide db etev ich eese in 81 An International Text Primer Starting with the release of version 6 0 BBEdit became fully compatible with left to right non Roman script systems English and most other European languages use Roman characters the kinds of letters you are reading now Inside your Mac text is stored as a series of numbers like graphics sound and every other type of information A standard called ASCII the American Standard Code for Information Interchange defines what numbers are used for each of the letters punctuation marks and other symbols you can type on your computer As its name implies ASCII is intended for use with United States English it has a dollar sign instead of the pound sign you d use in Britain for instance and none of the accented letters you d use in Spanish or French However since ASCII defines only 128
146. SCII null followed by the digit 8 because octal characters only range from 0 7 1 9 A backslash followed by a single decimal digit from 1 to 9 is always a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern Advanced Grep Topics 129 130 Modifier Effect 10 99 A backslash followed by two decimal digits which taken together form the integer N ranging from 10 to 99 is a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern if there exist N capturing sets of parentheses in the pattern If there are fewer than N captured subpatterns the grep engine will instead look for up to three octal digits following the backslash Any subsequent digits stand for themselves So in a search pattern 11 is a backreference if there are 11 or more sets of capturing parentheses in the pattern If not it matches a tab 011 always matches a tab 81 is a backreference if there are 81 or more captured subpatterns but matches an ASCII null followed by the two characters 8 and 1 otherwise In Character Classes Modifier Effect NOCTAL Inside a character class a backslash followed by up to three octal digits generates a single byte character reference from the least significant eight bits of the value Thus the character class N7 will match a single byte with octal value 7 equivalent to x07 N8 will match a literal 8 character In Replacement Patterns Modifier Effect NNN If more than two decimal digits follow
147. Space Hard Wrap Hard Wrap Add Line Breaks Remove Line Breaks Rewrap Quoted Text Rewrap Quoted Text Increase Quote Level Decrease Quote Level Strip Quotes Zap Gremlins Zap Gremlins Entab Entab Detab Detab Resolve URL Check Spelling Tools installed plug ins Window Palettes Arrange Get Info en Get Info Mac OS Reveal in Finder Send To Back Exchange With Next Synchro Scrolling open windows list none Cmd B Cmd Cmd Opt none none Cmd Cmd Shift Cmd Cmd Shift Cmd Cmd Opt none none Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Opt Cmd Opt none none none none none none none none Cmd F12 none submenu none none none none Cmd Ctl none none Cmd 1 thru O Search Find Quick Search Find Again Find Again reverse Find Selection Find Selection reverse Enter Search String Enter Replace String Replace Replace All Replace amp Find Again Find In Next File Open All Matches Find amp Replace All Matches Go To Line Go To Line Go To Center Line Go To Previous Error Go To Next Error Go To Previous P holder Go To Next Placeholder Find Differences Apply to New Apply to Old Compare Again Find in Reference Find Definition Markup see following pages Internet Helpers Internet Control Panel News Reader Mail Client FTP Client Web Browser Gopher Client WAIS Client Telnet Cli
148. Spacing Transformation Default m White Space Default m Decoration 1 None H Strike C Underline 1 Blink 1 Overline Cancel E Apply 3 Body Properties Edits attributes of the BODY tag in the current document including the background image background color text color link color active link color and visited link color The background image can be specified by typing or by clicking the File button Link background and text colors are chosen from the 216 color Web safe palette which appears when clicking on one of the color swatches Option clicking on a color swatch will bring up the system color picker so you can select colors that are not in the Web safe palette Head Elements This submenu allows you to add tags that are valid in the document s head The tag is inserted at the current insertion point even if the insertion point is not a contextually valid location for the tag Base The BASE tag determines the default location of documents referenced in the current document You will be prompted to enter the Href the document or folder that all relative links in the document should be considered relative to You can enter the Href by typing it into the supplied field or by clicking the Folder button to select a folder on your hard disk Choose Full addressing to have the entire path be entered choose Root addressing to enter the path relative to the folder containing your HTML files or Relative to enter the pat
149. Text Colors Preferences The Text Color preferences let you select the colors that BBEdit uses when the syntax coloring option is on You can also select a default window background color and a default text color which will apply to all text windows although we feel compelled to point out that there are good reasons why the default Macintosh text color scheme is what it is You can turn on syntax coloring globally by e setting the Syntax Coloring option in the Editor page of the Preferences You can turn on syntax coloring in any specific file window by e choosing syntax coloring from the window options pop up menu left e selecting the Syntax Coloring option from the Windows Option dialog The color bars show the colors that BBEdit uses to display different language elements To change colors click the color box BBEdit will open the system Color Picker dialog box that you can use to select a new color To restore all the colors to their default settings click the Reset to Factory Colors button When the Color Attributes Separately checkbox is selected as is the default BBEdit lets you specify different colors for HTML attribute names attribute values and processing instructions in addition to anchor image and other tags When turned off HTML attributes are colored the same as the tag as in previous versions of BBEdit Chapter 10 Preferences Note Tip Text Editing Preferences The Text Editing preferences control some
150. Welcome lt B gt to the home of lt B gt BBEdit lt B gt As before you might be tempted to write lt B gt lt B gt but for the same reasons as before this will match the entire line of text The solution is similar We ll use the non greedy quantifer lt B gt lt B gt Writing Replacement Patterns Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful We covered subpatterns earlier when discussing search patterns and discussed how the parentheses can be used to limit the scope of the alternation operator Another reason for employing subpatterns in your grep searches is to provide a powerful and flexible way to change or re use found information as part of a search and replace operation If you do not use subpatterns you can still access the complete results of the search with the amp metacharacter However this precludes reorganizing the matched data as it is replaced Pattern Matches amp the entire matched pattern replacement only p the pattern p and remembers it search only Nig N25 eg the nth subpattern in the entire search pattern 499 BBEdit 6 5 now remember up to 99 backreferenced subpatterns Previous versions were limited to 9 Writing Replacement Patterns 123 124 Using the Entire Matched Pattern The amp character is useful when you want to use the entire matched string as the basis of a replacement Suppose that in your text every instance of product names that begin with the company name
151. ags within an lt OPTIONGROUP gt container are displayed as items cascading from the specified submenu label In browsers that don t understand lt OPTIONGROUP gt users will see a simple straight list of all OPTION s Option An option on a pop up menu or in a scrolling list Enter the desired label and value for the option and mark the Selected checkbox to make the option the default or initial choice Text Area Defines a scrolling text area field for entering large amounts of data You can specify the name of the file its size in rows and columns and optional HTML 4 only attributes such as Disabled Read Only Access Key and Tab Index You can also specify script handlers for onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange events Inline Elements Inline elements are HTML elements that can appear as part of a paragraph such as anchors images applets client side scripts image maps and more Anchor Inserts an HTML anchor A tag Anchors can either be hyperlinks or used as the target of hyperlinks to provided multiple targets on a single page The anchor must have an associated URL in the HREF field to be a link it must have a name in the Name field to be a target The Target field is used to specify which frame the linked page should appear in When specifying a URL you can choose a recently used URL from the Recent URLs pop up menu or choose another file from the same folder as the current document using the Current Fold
152. akpoint Use this command to make the selected text visible in the source level debugger and to set a breakpoint If you hold down the option key when you open the Compiler menu this command becomes Set Breakpoint amp Go which sets the breakpoints and begins execution of the program If CodeWarrior s source level debugger is not active this command is not available Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Add If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it isn t part of an open project this command adds the file to the project Add amp Compile If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it isn t part of an open project this command adds the file to the project and compiles it This command is the same as using the Add command followed by the Compile command Precompile Tells CodeWarrior to precompile the source file in the active window BBEdit displays a standard file dialog that lets you specify the name of the precompiled header The active window must belong to a project that s open in CodeWarrior Preprocess Tells CodeWarrior to preprocess the source file in the active window and to place the results in a new untitled editing window The active window must belong to a project that s open in CodeWarrior Bring Up To Date Tells CodeWarrior to check the project for modified files and to recompile and reload any files that have changed Make Tells CodeWarrior to issue a make command to re
153. alog box The Mark Submenu 67 Clearing Markers To clear a marker 1 Choose the Clear Markers command from the mark pop up menu BBEdit displays the list of markers Clear Markers Markers to Clear What s Mew in BBEdit 6 5 s Grep Engine Compatibility With Old Patterns Elimination of Old Limitations New Quantihiers Man Greedy Quantifiers Backreferences New Character Classes Other Backslash Escapes Non Capturing Parentheses Fancy Pants Extensions E s h Cancel Select the marker you want to delete 2 Click Clear to clear the marker BBEdit also offers a Clear All Markers command which clears all the markers in the document in one fell swoop You can access this command by holding down the Option key and using the Marker pop up menu Using Grep to Set Markers You can use the Find amp Mark All command in the mark submenu to mark text that matches a Grep pattern To learn more about using Grep patterns see Chapter 8 Searching with Grep To use Grep to mark text 1 Choose the Find amp Mark All command from the mark submenu BBEdit opens the Find amp Mark All dialog box shown here Find amp Mark All Search For Patterns Fram Mt 6 Mark With EE EN W Clear Existing Markers Cane 68 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Tip 2 Type the pattern in the Search For field and the marker names in the Mark With field You can also choose stored patterns from the
154. ame a name You can optionally specify a long description for the frame choose whether the frame can be scrolled and indicate whether the user should be able to resize the frame You can also set margins and borders for the frame Borders are the visible lines between frames Margins determine how far each frame s content appears from its border or from the window edge No Frames HTML markup included between the lt NOFRAMES gt and lt NOFRAMES gt tags is displayed by browsers which do not support frames This is where you should include a link to a non frame or text only version of the site Although many current browsers support frames some users do not like the feature and intentionally disable it in their browser Check The Check submenu contains utilities for finding errors in your HTML markup and document links You can run syntax or link checks on the current document a specified folder or the current site as defined in the HTML Web Site preferences You can also perform a Balance Tags operation on the current document When checking a Folder or a Site using these tools a dialog like the one below appears Check Folder Syntax ALsers admin Desktop Files Folder C Skip Folders f Check Nested Folders This dialog allows you to choose the desired folder click the Folder button to choose a folder using an Open dialog or drag a folder from the Finder to the gray box optionally specify that subfolders w
155. an also use special placeholders to insert varying or context sensitive information e g a date or the name of the current file Initially this folder contains several sample glossary sets for C source code HTML WML Mac OS X Property List files and plain text which you can use or modify as you like See Chapter 12 for more information on the Glossary If you are upgrading from a previous version you have two options for migrating your current custom Glossary items You can either move all of your custom files into the Universal folder within the Glossary folder or create new Glossary sets for your existing files Help The Help folder contains complete online documentation equivalent to the contents of the printed or PDF user manual in Apple s HTML Help format You can access this information from the Help menu at any time HTML Templates This folder contains HTML document templates for use with the New HTML Document function A sample set of templates are provided which you can modify or add to as you wish Please see Chapter 11 for more information on BBEdit s HTML tools You can move or copy over any customized template or include documents that you wish Language Modules This folder contains plug in modules that tell BBEdit about new programming scripting or markup languages so it can colorize them appropriately and provide the pop up function menu in the status bar of document windows written in that language Thre
156. an extensive directory of scripting additions Software FaceSpan http www facespan com FaceSpan lets you create real Macintosh applications using AppleScript It includes a visual development environment that lets you create your user interface to which you then attach scripts PreFab Player http www prefab com player html This handy utility allows you complete control over the Macintosh user interface allowing you to script even unscriptable applications to a degree Script Debugger http www latenightsw com Despite the name it s more than a debugger it s actually an enhanced replacement for Apple s Script Editor featuring variable monitoring step trace debugging an object browser for an application s objects and much more Scripter http www mainevent com scripter html The original enhanced script editor for the Macintosh Scripter also features extensive debugging capabilities and also comes with ScriptBase a database that lets you easily store large data items persistently BBEdit and AppleScript BBEdit has been scriptable for years though we have continually worked to improve its level of scripting refinement BBEdit has long provided access to scripts in its menu bar and more recently through a floating Scripts palette In BBEdit 5 0 many BBEdit plug ins became scriptable as did the HTML authoring tools BBEdit now takes a further step forward by being both attachable and recordable See the
157. and Show Cursor Position options BBEdit windows have additional elements The next section Text Options discusses these additional elements The Status Bar The status bar is a panel at the top of editing windows that contains buttons and pop up menus that let you work with the text in the window On Mac OS X the status bar display is toggled by the button in the top right corner of the window as shown below eos i index html Last Saved 10 06 01 08 19 28 PM E L1 File Path Users admin Desktap index htrnl lt IDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 817 EN https www w3 orgz TR A19997REC htmI481 199912 4 strict dtd gt Artin l lt head gt tit les BBEdit Secretae tit le lt meta name generator content BBEdit 5 5 xstvle type text css gt lt l aimport additional css p A a N On Mac OS 9 and earlier the status bar display is toggled by the key icon in the top right corner of the window Status Bar E File Path 500 If the window contains a document that has been saved to disk the status bar contains the full path to the file and the last time the file was changed If the file hasn t been saved to disk the status bar displays New Document instead of the file name Windows in which the text view status bar isn t adjacent to the window title bar e g disk browsers and search results no longer have a status bar control on Mac OS 9 or Mac OS X but do hon
158. anel On Mac OS 9 and earlier the Internet control panel located in the Control Panels folder on your startup disk is a software module that keeps track of which Internet client applications you use Web browser FTP program etc what your email address is which news server you use which mail server holds your mail and many other Internet related settings This control panel is included as part of the system software and replaces the stand alone Internet Config application By default BBEdit will display the client applications designated in the Internet control panel on the Internet Helpers menu left You can use this menu to launch any displayed client application from within BBEdit If you wish to suppress this menu turn off the Internet Helpers Menu option in the Application panel of the Preferences Having the menu active is not necessary in order to use the Resolve URL command or its Command click shortcut 10 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Note ToolServer Support If you are planning to use BBEdit with ToolServer first make sure that MPW and ToolServer are correctly installed MPW is the Macintosh Programmer s Workshop Apple s free development environment for Mac OS 9 and earlier You can get ToolServer as part of the MPW package available from Apple s Web site it is also included with CodeWarrior You can find the ToolServer Support folder in your BBEdit application folder This folder contains the following folders
159. ap to edge dragging BBEdit 6 5 also contains a plethora of additional enhancements tweaks and bug fixes throughout the program Look for the new in 6 5 marker in the margin throughout this manual to find things that have changed significantly or been added since the last major version BBEdit 6 1 If you are viewing the PDF version of the manual you can also search for this marker For a detailed summary of all recent changes see BBEdit s online help available from the Help menu or visit the BBEdit support section of our Web site Changes from Previous Versions Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit CHAPTER IMPORTANT Note Installing BBEdit This chapter tells you how to install BBEdit on your Macintosh It also describes the files BBEdit creates where it puts them and how to install or remove optional components of BBEdit In this chapter Basie MS tall ALON sit oi Sas ed o Ca ehe a aO Gea bedstead scam aera Gt 9 System Requirements 9 e Installing BBEdit 9 Adel Honal SOLW ate 2 bode Ane Pup desc teo aia Waele a boots ed Bb ae ad 10 Internet Control Panel 10 ToolServer Support 11 BBEdit Support Folder i442 53 ete Car de RR C ee SA ER ERR 11 Glossary 12 Help 12 Plug Ins 13 Scripts 14 Other BBEdit Piles and Folders 55 222 drop ERR 15 BBEdit Preferences Folder 15 e BBEdit Grep Patterns 16 DbEdit Table Build 60 is i int Surg a ae aaa as Boo oe D ARRA Eee dps 17 Ba
160. appropriate file is present in BBEdit s Dictionaries folder If there is no User Dictionary file a new empty file will be created the first time you perform a spelling check Word Services When this option is selected BBEdit uses an external spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu The external spelling checker must support Apple s Word Services Suite To set the external spelling checker click the Set button and select the application s icon You can also drag the spelling checker icon to the text box to the left of the Set button Startup Preferences The Startup preferences control what BBEdit does when you launch it or when the application icon is double clicked and there are no open windows in BBEdit even if the application is already running Do Nothing This option specifies that BBEdit should not open any windows or perform any other actions New Text Document This option specifies that BBEdit should open a new empty text editing window New Disk Browser This option specifies that BBEdit should open a disk browser starting at the desktop Chapter 10 Preferences Open This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the standard Open dialog allowing you to select and open a file Open from FTP Server This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the Open from FTP Server dialog allowing you to connect to an FTP server and open a file You can hold down the followi
161. aracter to indicate the start of a new page when printing You can also use the Page Break command on the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a page break Comparing Text Files If you have ever had to reconcile changes between two different versions of a file or even larger numbers of documents you know how laborious this task can be BBEdit s Find Differences command is a powerful tool for doing such comparisons faster and more effectively Using Find Differences you can compare any two files or the contents of two folders You can also specify options to eliminate minor variations in document content such as different amounts of whitespace from being considered CodeWarrior project files can no longer be compared with this command please see Chapter 14 for more details Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit To compare files 1 Choose the Find Differences command from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find Differences dialog box Find Differences Compare Files Folders E oma E mau New other m PF Other Old other i Other ALsers admin Desktop index html Library WebServer Documents index html Compare Options cal Case Sensitive U Ignore Curly Quotes Ignore Spaces L Leading O Trailing C Runs Multi File Compare if List Identical Files v Only List Text Files Flatten Hierarchies Skip Folders wv Compare Projector States Use File Filter current criteria m l Edit
162. ard in the appropriate alphabet you can open the Key Caps desk accessory to see what keys you must press to generate each character If you are using a script with its own input method like Chinese or Japanese another menu appears to the left of the script menu to allow you to control the input method and other text encoding options On Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X you can find more information about the input methods for installed multi byte script systems in the Help Center If you are using a Language Kit under Mac OS 8 6 you should read the documentation that comes with the Language Kit for complete instructions By default the Mac automatically changes the script system to the script of the surrounding text when you click the mouse to move the insertion point For example if you are currently typing Chinese and click in an English portion of a document the Mac automatically changes to the Roman script The same happens if you change the font to a Roman font If you would rather set the script manually you can turn off the behavior by opening the Keyboard control panel clicking the Options button and unmarking the Font and Keyboard Synchronization checkbox in the options dialog It is then your responsibility to choose both an appropriate font and an input method for the script you wish to write in Script Systems in BBEdit As a text editor BBEdit supports only one font per document window To begin writing text in a non Roman script sim
163. ard to the contents of a different clipboard thus making it exportable to the system clipboard set current clipboard to clipboard 3 as text or finally with even less typing involved set current clipboard to clipboard 5 To make any clipboard the current clipboard select it select clipboard 5 Working with Scripts The Scripts menu left in BBEdit s menu bar contains several commands It also lists all OSA scripts present in the Scripts folder within the BBEdit Support folder providing a quick way to access frequently used scripts You can place scripts within sub folders up to 4 levels deep of the Scripts folder to organize them Scripts written for use in the menu should be saved as compiled script documents not script applications The Scripts Menu In addition to the list of available scripts the Scripts menu provides the following commands Open Script Editor Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleScript editor as chosen in the Tools panel of the Preferences If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Open Scripting Dictionary Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleScript editor and open BBEdit s scripting dictionary for viewing If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Working with Scripts 237 new in 6 5 Start Recording Select this item to record all available actions that you perform within BBEdit or any other recordable applications which you switch to
164. aring multiple files at once by selecting the Folders button in the Find Differences dialog you have the following additional options List Identical Files Normally when you compare folders using the Find Differences command BBEdit presents you with three lists one list of the items that are in the first folder but not in the second folder another list of the items that are in the second folder but not in the first one and another list of the items that appear in both folders The list of items that appear in both folders generally displays a bullet next to items that are not identical For example if you have an archived mail folder that you are comparing against a current mail folder mailbox files that appear in both the old and new file will all be listed together however if there have been any changes to the contents of particular mailbox files the changed mailbox files will be listed with bullets next to them If you are comparing very large folders however the list of common items can be extremely long making the flagged items hard to find When you deselect the List Identical Files checkbox BBEdit will only list the flagged items the ones that have been changed in the list of items that appear in both folders Flatten Hierarchies Normally BBEdit retains the hierarchy of the files being compared in a folder In other words when comparing folders it looks in each subfolder of the first folder you select and tries to
165. atch return characters They match zero width positions after and before returns respectively So if you are looking for foo at the end of a line the pattern foo will match the three characters f o and o If you search for oo Nr you will match the same text but the match will contain four characters f o o and a return In softwrapped files and will also match after and before soft line breaks respectively You can combine and within a pattern to force a match to constitute an entire line For example fooS will only match foo on a line by itself with no other characters Try it against these three lines to see for yourself foobar foo fighting foo The pattern will only match the second line Chapter 8 Searching with Grep WARNING new in 6 5 In previous versions of BBEdit the character was a wildcard that matched any digit 0 9 Beginning with BBEdit 6 5 this is no longer true If you have grep patterns written with a previous version of BBEdit which use for this purpose you will need to change these patterns The easiest way to make them compatible with BBEdit 6 5 is to use the d character class which has the exact same meaning that used to it matches any character from 0 9 Character classes are explained in the next section Other Positional Assertions BBEdit s grep engine supports additional positional assertions very similar to and
166. ation and the name of the backup file The default folder is the folder you specified in the Backup Options dialog box and the default name is the standard backup name as described at the beginning of this section 38 Chapter 3 Working with Files e e Printing To print a document choose the Print command from the File menu BBEdit opens the standard system print dialog box for your currently selected printer Print Printer HP LaserJet 55i m Saved Settings Standard E Copies amp Pages Copies kal Collated Pages All From 1 3 Preview Cancel f Print If you are using Mac OS 9 the print dialog might look like this Copies 1 Pages amp All ef J L pe Current Settings i Ink E amp Color Bii Letter MediaType pend yp p x QBlack os Portrait gj No Watermark Mode fx PrintLayout None amp Automatic Quality d BE Normal 360dpi Q Custom x MicroWeave On P4 Z High Speed On Weis amp Color Adjustment Courier 10 4 spaces per tab O Use Document s Font Monaco 9 4 spaces per tab O Fractional Widths C Print Selection Only Note that the exact appearance and layout of options in the print dialog will vary depending on what printer you are using With current versions of the LaserWriter driver or in the Mac OS X Print dialog for instance the BBEdit specific printing options are on a pag
167. be checked in you can select multiple files by holding Shift or Command while you click or press Command A to select all listed files Then click the Check In button If you have selected one file the Check In dialog discussed on page 256 appears to allow you to set the check in options If more than one file is selected the Batch Check In Options dialog below appears Batch Check In Options Task Comment Options Use Comment in CKID f Cancel V Ask if Empty Ask for Each File Use This Comment Po Check In Options After Checking In C Keep Modifiable E Touch File C Check In as Branch C Delete File cal Verify Contents The bottom part of the Batch Check In Options dialog offers essentially the same functionality as is found in the Check In dialog The top of the Batch Check In Options dialog controls how the check in comments for these files are set You can choose to use the comment in the file s ckid resource to prompt for the comment for each file or to use a single comment for all checked in files Working with MPW 261 262 After you have set the options using one of these dialogs click OK to check in the files The Check In Folder dialog will remain on the screen after check in is complete You can check in sets of files using different check in options by choosing other files then clicking Check In again Click Done when you have finished checking in files Check Out Folder Use this co
168. ble even if you didn t use its specific class name You can set the properties using the set event like so tell application BBEdit 6 5 to set display font of text window 1 to Geneva Let s go back to the window class for a moment Most of the properties of this class are marked with the abbreviation r o That stands for Read Only In other words you can only get these properties not set them Sample Scripts BBEdit includes a selection of sample scripts in the BBEdit Documentation folder all of which contain descriptions of their own operation To learn more about a sample script just open it in your preferred script editor You can also check our Web site for more sample scripts AppleScript Pitfalls Here are some things to watch out for when scripting BBEdit with AppleScript Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Important The Escape Issue AppleScript uses the backslash character as an escape character You can use r to indicate a carriage return or t to indicate a tab character More importantly you can use or V to include a quote mark or apostrophe in a string that s delimited by quotes or apostrophes If you want to specify a real backslash you must write That s not all that confusing until you start writing AppleScripts that call on BBEdit s powerful grep searching capability BBEdit a so uses the backslash as an escape character If you want to search for an actual backslash in a document you have to tell
169. boolean value to indicate whether BBEdit should continue by performing the action usually invoked by the menu command false means yes true means stop after executing the script If MenugGelect returns false BBEdit will call the script s PostMenuSelect handler if it has one after it performs the menu command Here is a simple example which adds a confirmation dialog to the Quit command addressed as FileeQuit Note that we test the menu and item names to make sure the script is attached to the Quit command if it s attached to some other command it does nothing on MenuSelect menuName itemName if menuName File and itemName Quit then display dialog Are you sure you wish to quit buttons Yes No default button No if the button returned of the result is No then return true else return false end if end if end MenuSelect Working with Scripts 239 240 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Development Tools This chapter tells you how to set up BBEdit to work with development environments You can use BBEdit with MPW s ToolServer and SourceServer Projector and as an external editor for Metrowerks CodeWarrior For Perl development BBEdit integrates with MacPerl on Mac OS 9 and the native Perl environment on Mac OS X On Mac OS X you can also work with Python run shell scripts and access other Unix scripting tools as well as use shell worksheet windows for frequently used
170. cated in the same folder as the BBEdit application Although the items contained in these support folders are not essential for doing basic tasks with BBEdit they provide additional functionality you may wish to retain If you are working on a Macintosh with very limited disk space or memory RAM and you don t need the functionality these folders provide you can remove them In order to prevent alias loops BBEdit will not follow aliases to folders which are placed inside any of the folders contained in the BBEdit Support folder We also recommend that you do not try to share plug ins or tools between BBEdit and other applications and that you not make aliases to plug ins or tools located on remote server volumes BBEdit Support Folder 11 Upgrading Upgrading Upgrading Important Dictionaries The Dictionaries folder contains the dictionaries used by BBEdit s built in spell checker Words that you add to your personal dictionary are stored in the file called User Dictionary in this folder To use the spell checker use the Check Spelling command in the Text menu If you have added words to the User Dictionary for your previous version of BBEdit you should move or copy that file into the Dictionaries folder You do not need to move any of the other dictionary files Glossary The Glossary folder holds text files whose contents can be inserted into an editing window with the click of a button or a keystroke Glossary files c
171. ccept Charset define the encoding type and character set for the transaction usually you will not need to use these fields Use the On Submit and On Reset fields to enter the names of JavaScript handlers to be used for the Submit and Reset buttons respectively The Target field sets the frame to be used for the page returned by the CGI Button Creates a form button Choose a type Submit Reset or Button specify a name and value for the form element and set optional attributes such as Disabled Tab Index the order in which the button will be reached by the Tab key and Access Key the key the user can press to activate the button in the browser The latter two options are HTML 4 features and may not work on all popular browsers You can also enter the names of JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers for the button Field Set Legend In HTML 4 you can group your form s fields and other controls into sets of related fields by using the FIELDSET container Within the FIELDSET container the LEGEND tag is used to define a title for the field set Browsers differ in how they represent field sets visually but some browsers may draw a rectangle around the related controls as in dialog boxes In this case the Align attribute of the LEGEND tag can be used to set the alignment of the legend relative to the visual representation of the field set Browsers which do not support these tags will ignore them and the contents of the LEGEND container w
172. ccomplish this You may optionally indicate the document being quoted if it is available on the Web using the Cite field Center Inserts a block centering tag This tag while permitted in current HTML specifications is deprecated since it includes no information about the content being centered It is generally considered better form to use stylesheets or P or DIV tag ALIGN attributes instead Deleted Text Inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it i e struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Inserted Text Inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Noscript Begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scripting often used to provide alternate content following a SCRIPT block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Preformatted Begins a section to be reproduced with line breaks as specified in the HTML document Normally browsers convert carriage returns to white space for display breaking lines only at P or BR tags Most browsers use a monospaced font for this type of block Lists These commands add
173. cel Opening Existing Documents 27 Important On Mac OS 9 Open BBEdit 10 12 00 Yesterday 4 4 01 10 12 00 b hri HTML Templates 10 12 00 b a Language Modules 3 28 01 Show All Available xf Translate Line Breaks Read As auto detect 1 Select the file you want to open 2 Change any desired options See below 3 Click Open to open the file You can use the following options when you open a file Show or File Types Pop Up Menu This pop up menu lets you choose what kinds of files can be selected from the Open dialog Its title is either Show or File Types depending on the version of the dialog you are using If you know a file contains text but it doesn t appear in this dialog box it means that the Macintosh type of the file is not set to TEXT This is sometimes the case with files received from other computers or downloaded from the Internet Choose Any File from the File Types pop up menu to open the data fork of any file as a text file Given that Mac OS X does not set the file type of any text file created by a Unix program to a useful value you may find it useful to turn on the Map the File Name option in the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window With this preference turned on BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if it can determine whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffi
174. ch string in all the files in the set and replaces them with the replace string Don t Find Saves the settings of the Find dialog box without doing a search Cancel Doesn t do the search and restores the settings of the dialog box If you selected the Batch Find option read the following section Multi File Search Results Batch Find If you did not read the section Multi File Search Results File by File below Multi File Search Results Batch Find If you selected the Batch Find option BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the set of files searched using a search results browser 0098 Search Results 1 W 785 Notes Open 785 occurrences of handle found in 98 files P OtherApps html one occurrence found gt carbon html 3 occurrences found gt Custom Def Procedures html one occurrence found d FIENO p Last Saved 08 07 01 04 51 29 PM hd vjlL viL vii File Path Developer Documentation Carbon carbon html lt td valign NIDDLE colspan 2 height 15 gt a lt p gt lt p gt lt td gt lt td width 196 valign top height 15 gt lt font facez Geneva Helvetica size 2 gt lt span id bodytext gt lt a href oss CarbonEventManager carboneventmanager h tm L gt Carbon Event Manager lt a gt lt br gt 0 lt a href oss ErrorHandler errorhandler html gt Error Handler lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss EventManager eventmanager htmL Event Manager
175. chable because the scripts become attached to the features of the program BBEdit is now attachable more details about using this feature are provided later in this chapter Scripting Resources Covering all the details you might need to write your own AppleScripts is not something we can reasonably do in this manual AppleScript despite its deceptively simple English like syntax is a sophisticated object oriented language with many subtleties For this reason we suggest you consult supplemental documentation and resources if you are a beginning scripter A good place to start is with someone else s script find a script that does almost what you want it to and repurpose it Even if you can t find a script that does anything close to what you want reading others scripts is a good way to get a handle on the way AppleScript thinks and how BBEdit s particular AppleScript implementation behaves Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit In addition to the basic AppleScript documentation included with a standard Mac OS installation You may find the following resources useful in your quest to understand scripting Books Goodman Danny Danny Goodman s AppleScript Handbook Second Edition iUniverse 1998 Trinko Tom AppleScript for Dummies IDG Books 1995 Mailing Lists AppleScript Users http www lists apple com applescript users html The official list for AppleScript users run by Apple Computer BBEdit Talk BBEdit Scripting http
176. ck out any unsaved changes you make while in the Preferences window click Revert Please note that Revert will only return settings which you have changed since the last Save operation to their saved condition it does not restore default settings In order to completely reset all preference settings to their default values you must quit BBEdit remove the existing BBEdit Prefs Data file from the BBEdit Preferences folder and relaunch BBEdit to have it generate a fresh set of preferences Chapter 2 contains details about the organization of BBEdit s preference files BBEdit s Preferences window is now non modal you can leave it open as you work It does not automatically close when you click Save or Revert You can of course close it with the close box or by choosing Close from the File menu The following sections describe each of the preferences panels in detail Chapter 10 Preferences Note Application Preferences The Application preferences control which application and system services BBEdit uses how entries are sorted on the Windows menu when open files are verified and various other global settings Previous versions of BBEdit allowed Navigation Services and Appearance Manager support to be turned off Starting with BBEdit 6 5 these two services are no longer optional Optional Application Services BBEdit Plug ins When this option is selected BBEdit makes the Tools menu available in the menu bar so that you can use B
177. cluding the Finder For example a file named This file has a name that is 47 characters long will appear in Mac OS 9 as This file has a name that 19958 When running on Mac OS 9 BBEdit can open files with long names and will preserve the full name when saving but it will display the truncated name in most places Saving with Authentication On Mac OS X BBEdit 6 5 now supports saving files which require Administrator privileges if you possess the necessary user and password information to enable this For example you can edit and save files which are owned by root Authenticated saving is particularly useful when used in conjunction with BBEdit s Open Hidden command which allows you to see and open files in hidden folders like bin and usr When you open a file for which you do not have write privileges BBEdit will display a slash through the pencil icon in the status bar To edit the file click the pencil icon BBEdit will prompt you to confirm whether you wish to unlock the file Option click the pencil icon to skip the confirmation dialog Creating and Saving Documents 25 When you are finished editing simply choose Save from the File menu BBEdit will prompt you to authenticate as a user with Administrator privileges Type your short username and password to save the file Opening Existing Documents There are several ways to open existing documents with BBEdit e Double click any file with a BBEdit do
178. codes and a byte can hold 256 different codes Apple uses the remaining values to store characters used by other European languages that use the same basic alphabet as English as well as symbols frequently needed by American and European users The extended Macintosh character set includes the various accented characters used by languages like Spanish French and German so only one character set is needed to represent text written in any of these languages This character set is often referred to as Macintosh ASCII technically a misnomer because ASCII explicitly leaves the extra codes undefined or MacRoman Although the Romans didn t have all the letters used in these modern languages our letters evolved from theirs so the kind of alphabet used to write English and these other languages is referred to as Roman 77 78 Of course many languages don t use the Roman alphabet Russian is written using an alphabet called Cyrillic which has more in common with Greek than with anything else MacRoman does have Greek letters in it however so you can write Greek text on a Mac without switching alphabets Hebrew and Arabic both have alphabets of their own and to make things even more confusing text in these languages is written right to left rather than the Roman derived left to right Furthermore Asian languages such as Chinese and Japanese often have a different character for each word or concept This means first of all
179. compile and link all modified files in the open project Debug Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project in the CodeWarrior debugger Run Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project without using the source debugger If choosing this command causes CodeWarrior to recompile files compiler errors may not be reported to BBEdit If that happens use Make instead and then select Run Working with MPW MPW is the Macintosh Programmer s Workshop Apple s development environment for use with Mac OS 9 or earlier system versions The complete MPW package can be downloaded at no cost from Apple s developer Web site MPW ToolZone http developer apple com tools mpw tools MPW Download ftp ftp apple com developer Tool Chest Core Mac OS Tools Working with MPW 253 254 Note Note You can use MPW with BBEdit in two ways First you can use the ToolServer application to run MPW tools inside BBEdit without running MPW itself ToolServer can execute scripts and MPW commands but includes no user interface BBEdit provides the user interface in this instance essentially replacing the MPW Shell Second you can use BBEdit to edit source files that are being managed by Projector Projector is a database backed source control system integrated into the MPW Shell It is also available in a stand alone MPW application called SourceServer for those who do not want to run the whole MPW shell for this functionality BBEdit and ToolServer To
180. cons BBEdit offers three different ways to stack windows down and to the left straight down and down and to the right These are the top three choices in the dialog BBEdit tiles the windows in two or three rows or columns If you have more than three windows open BBEdit stacks additional windows behind the three front windows EH T Ld BBEdit figures out how many rows and columns it needs to tile windows The larger your screen the more rows and columns BBEdit uses The windows are never narrower than half of a classic Macintosh screen BBEdit tiles the front two window horizontally or vertically and stacks any additional windows behind the two front windows HA nou ou Note To arrange the windows using the same settings as the last time you used this command hold down the Option key as you choose Arrange from the Windows menu Window Menu 87 new in 6 5 BBEdit is also Display Manager aware If you change the size of a screen which contains floating palettes BBEdit will reposition the palettes to take the new screen size into account this may entail resizing the window as well Get Info The Get Info command displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words line and pages in the selected text and in the document Using this command is the same as clicking the info button in the status bar Info index html Library WebServer Documents index html Selection Document Chars 16
181. ctangle displaying the file path Revision Lists the available revisions of the document Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the document s ckid resource as well as in the database If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Touch Modification Date Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is actually the same file as the one in the Projector database Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy 258 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Cancel Check Out If the front window is checked out this command discards any changes made to it and retrieves the latest version Hold down the Shift key to choose a file to be canceled instead of canceling the front window Edit Task Comment Choose this command to edit the checkout comment for this file Hold down the Shift key to choose a file instead of editing the comment for the front window Compare Revisions This command compares the contents of the frontmost window with another revision of the file You will be prompted to choose the desired revision the current version you have on disk is highlighted when the dialog opens The results will appear in the same format used by t
182. cument icon e If BBEdit is running choose the Open Open Hidden or Open Recent commands from the File menu e Select the name of a file in a BBEdit editing window then use the Open Selection command in the File menu e Double click a file name in a browser s file list See Chapter 9 Browsers Drag a file s icon to the Windows floating window 5ee Chapter 6 Working with Windows e Drag a file s icon to the BBEdit icon or to an alias of the icon Note There s a bug in the Finder that can cause Drag and Drop not to work if you try to drop icons onto an alias of BBEdit This behavior is usually triggered by moving BBEdit to another disk or rebuilding your desktop If this happens throw away your alias to BBEdit and make a new one BBEdit can natively open files with type TEXT utxt UTF8 and PICT Of course you cannot edit PICT files in BBEdit but it will display them If you have QuickTime installed you can play movie files by opening them with BBEdit You can also have BBEdit ask QuickTime to try to open non text files by selecting the appropriate setting in the Application panel of the Preferences dialog BBEdit can then open image files and sounds in their own windows rather than displaying them as text If this preference is not active then BBEdit will open the files in their raw condition as if they were text documents Opening Multi Byte Documents When opening multi byte text docume
183. d either by specifying an explicit tell target or by supplying a searching in parameter 5o the following scripts are equivalent tell application BBEdit 6 5 find BBEdit searching in window 1 end tell and tell application BBEdit 6 5 tell window 1 find BBEdit end tell end tell Note that either the tell target or the searching in parameter must resolve to something that contains text As a shortcut you can specify a window and if the window contains text the search can proceed You can also specify a text object find Search Text searching in lines 3 thru 5 of window 2 Also unlike previous versions of BBEdit the defaults for parameters not specified in the find command are no longer controlled by the user interface i e the Find dialog When performing a find BBEdit will return a record describing the results of the search This record contains a Boolean which indicates whether the search was successful a reference to the text matched by the search and the text string matched by the search Given the first example above the results might look like this after reformatting for clarity found true found object characters 1 thru 23 of text window BBEdit Scripting Notes of application BBEdit 6 5 found text BBEdit Scripting Notes Given the above and BBEdit s improved support for the text object model the single occurrence replace is now obsolete Instead to do a single find and replace via Appl
184. d by the SimpleText or TeachText applications should be soft wrapped when you open them in BBEdit Exporting Soft Wrapped Text BBEdit will not insert hard line breaks into Unix or DOS format files upon saving although versions of BBEdit prior to 4 5 did Soft Wrapping in Browsers Use the Text Options dialog from the Edit menu to control soft wrapping and other display options for files viewed in a browser window Soft Wrapping and Line Numbers A new preference Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Text Views controls the way line numbers are displayed when you use soft wrapping If this option is turned on the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line numbers that correspond to hard carriage returns in the document rather than to soft wrapped line breaks To restore the behavior of previous versions of BBEdit turn this preference off Hard Wrapping The easiest way to hard wrap text is to type a carriage return whenever you want to start a new line If the file you are editing is a program where long lines are normal in some languages it s best to turn off soft wrapping altogether Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note To turn off soft wrapping for the active window do one of the following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar Deselect the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog box by choosing Text Option
185. d document windows and documents without saved state information Many of the preferences in this panel are the same as those in the Text Options dialog box and in the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar The difference is that the Text Options control the behavior of the active window while the Preference controls the behavior of new windows Differences Preferences 151 152 Note Tip Tip Note Many of the keyboard behavior settings formerly located in this panel have moved to the Text Editing panel Auto Indent When this option is selected pressing the Return key in new windows automatically inserts spaces or tabs to indent the new line to the same level as the previous line To temporarily invert the sense of the Auto Indent option while typing hold down the Option key as you press the Return key Balance while Typing When this option is selected BBEdit flashes the matching open parenthesis brace bracket or curly quote when you type a closing one This option is useful when editing source files to ensure that all delimiters are balanced Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically substitutes curly or typographer s quotes for straight quotes To type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a curly quote when the option is deselected hold down the Option key as you type a single or double quote You should avoid using Smart Quotes when editing HT
186. d the section Multi File Replacing later in this chapter if you use the replacement features 5 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search To learn more about these options see Search Settings earlier in this chapter 6 To have BBEdit collect the results of the search in a search results window select the Batch Find checkbox Otherwise BBEdit searches for the search string file by file 7 If you want BBEdit to find only files that do not contain the search string select the Exclude Matches checkbox 8 Use the controls in the bottom part of the dialog to specify the set of files to search See Specifying the Search Set later in this chapter for more information 9 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box to begin the search 96 Chapter 7 Searching The table below tells you what each of the buttons does This button Does this Find Batch Find on Not available when the multi file search option is selected Batch Find off Finds the first occurrence of the search string in the first file of the set Find All Finds all the occurrences of the search string in all the files in the set Batch Find on BBEdit displays the results in a search results window Batch Find off BBEdit opens all files that contain matches Replace Not available when the multi file search option is selected Replace All Finds all the occurrences of the sear
187. d to include the new placement of the insertion point This is the same effect as typing the arrow key combination and then holding down the Shift key and clicking at the original placement of the insertion point or at the end of the original selection range Cursor Movement and Text Selection 51 new in 6 5 52 Note Scrolling the View When holding down the Control key the arrow keys will scroll document windows without moving the insertion point The Delete Key The Delete key deletes the character to the left of the insertion point If you have selected text the delete key deletes all the text in the selection You can use the Command and Option keys to modify the way the Delete key works Modifier Action none Deletes character to the left of the insertion point Option Deletes to the beginning of the word to the left of the insertion point Command Deletes to the beginning of the line Command Option Deletes to the beginning of the document Holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on Extended Keyboards This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks If you want to enable this feature 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu to open the Preferences window 2 Select Editor from the list at the left edge of the dialog box 3 Select the Enable Shift Delete check box If you have activated the Horizontal setting for Exchange Command and Option Key
188. dd Line Breaks 60 e Remove Line Breaks 60 Rewrap Quoted Text 60 Increase and Decrease Quote Level 60 Strip Quotes 60 e Hard Wrap 60 Zap Gremlins 61 Entab 62 Detab 62 Resolve URL 62 How BBEdit Wraps ext scaer ati Eeoa d Sesto aci aded et eoe te 63 Soft Wrapping 64 Hard Wrapping 64 The Mark SUBMENU 25 oerte T rock ri ou aa oe tu eed E 67 Setting Markers 67 Clearing Markers 68 e Using Grep to Set Markers 68 The Insert SUOMEN sodas edd edepol tiefen ae 69 Inserting Files 69 Inserting a Folder Listing 69 e Inserting Paths 69 Inserting a Toolbox Call Template 70 e Inserting a Page Break 70 Gompaone Iext Piles a 25 crit be a teo tus rst sega ob eRe 70 Multi File Compare Options 73 Using the Spelling Checker xuiuescuatoscest bent Eat Et series 7A Checking Spelling 74 Selecting Active Dictionaries 76 e Editing the User Dictionary 76 Using an External Spelling Checker 76 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Working with International Text 77 An International Text Primer 0 0 2c eee eee eee 77 HOw Script oVStCINS WOK occ etn npe AE RUBA Reh Goel fta pos 78 Usine Script SyS teM is chase terion Seba equitis eis MaRS debe 79 Script Systems in BBEdit 80 MTC AC vac ase eee Enea has Ys n A en ore re Dolce a te OE 81 Saving Unicode Files 81 Opening Unicode Files 82 Work
189. ddressing Full 2 Root L Bn Relative Repeat Default m Left Attach i Default m Top amp 188 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Padding Margins These similar dialogs allow you to edit the padding and margin properties In both cases the icons on the left edge of the dialogs represent the entire box top right bottom and left respectively Padding Margins Selector BODY Selector BODY m 3 599 r3 Een aed o 3999 a3 A p e u 3 e rb A En 3 m ul Font Allows you to edit values for the following font properties color font size line height font family font style font weight and font variant Note that BBEdit will parse the font shortcut property but never generates it instead BBEdit generates exploded values for font style font variant font family and font weight Font Selector BODY Color mmm Style Default m Size a Weight Default m Line Height 1 5em a Variant Default PA Font Family Helvetica sans serif f Cancel 4 ee HTML Tool Descriptions 189 190 Text Allows you to edit the following text properties text decoration text indent text align vertical align line height text transform word spacing letter spacing and white space Text Selector BODY Text Indent Line Height 1 5em Alignment Default m Word Spacing 3 39 39 Vertical Align a Letter
190. de frequently used sequences from the file Include Byte Order Mark When saving Unicode files you should always include a Byte Order Mark BOM so that the reading application knows what byte order the file s data is in For maximum compatibility the BOM should be used whenever possible and should only be left off if there is a specific reason to do so such as providing compatibility with a broken third party application Anyone preparing HTML files in UTF 8 format may want to save them without the byte order mark due to a bug in Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 for the Macintosh This should be addressed in a future version of Internet Explorer When you save as Unicode you can also choose Unicode from the Line Breaks pop up in this dialog Unicode has its own line ending standard Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of utxt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTF8 Long File Names When running on Mac OS X and only on Mac OS X BBEdit supports the use of long and Unicode file names Such file names can be up to 255 characters long when stored on disks formatted as HFS Plus Mac OS 9 will accept and preserve files with long names but you cannot create names greater than 31 characters and longer names will appear truncated in most applications in
191. der will be shown here instead On Mac OS X new disk browsers will open with a view of the current user s home folder You can use this menu to back out of any folder you are currently in to a higher level folder like you can in the Finder You can also choose the Other option to get a folder selection dialog from which you can choose any folder on any currently mounted volume Disk Browsers 143 144 Tip Open Button Clicking the Open button in the status bar opens the selected item or you can double click on the item If you open a folder BBEdit displays the contents of that folder in the file list pane If you click one or more files BBEdit opens those files into editing windows Hold down the Option key as you Open or double click on a file name to open the file with the application that created it Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers The list pane of a disk browser displays disks files and folders When you are at the desktop level the list shows all mounted volumes and the files and folders on the Desktop When you click a folder or disk BBEdit displays the names of all the files it can open in the text pane The names listed in the text pane cannot be double clicked to open them You can however select a name and use the Open Selection command to open that file When you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane To open a folder or disk and display its contents in the
192. ding its language sensitive mode please refer to Chapter 12 Chapter 6 Working with Windows Note Plug In Tools The Tools floating window displays a list of all the plug ins in your BBEdit Plug Ins folder Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tool List window and on the Tools menu itself See Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins for more information on installing plug ins Scripts The Scripts floating window displays all the currently installed OSA scripts in your BBEdit Scripts folder In most cases OSA scripts are all AppleScripts See Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit for information about using AppleScript with BBEdit Stationery The Stationery List is a floating window that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder in the BBEdit Support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking it in this list Although the document created will have the content and all the state information from the stationery pad it is a new untitled document separate from the stationery pad To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternately any document can be changed into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order b
193. dir to Script s Folder Check this box to set the working directory to the folder that contains the script before running it This checkbox is only available when running on Mac OS 9 and earlier Output Options Mark these checkboxes to clear the output file before writing and to save it after writing respectively Run in MacPerl Available only on Mac OS 9 this command will run the script in MacPerl regardless of the most recent settings in the Run Perl Script dialog above Run in Terminal Available only on Mac OS X this command will run the script in a new Terminal window regardless of the settings in the Run Perl Script dialog Run in Debugger Runs the script in the Perl debugger regardless of whether the Use Debugger option is set for the Run command also any output options set in the Run command will be ignored The Run in Debugger command is not available for languages other than Perl When you choose Run in Terminal or Run in Debugger on Mac OS X BBEdit will create a file called Terminal term or Debugger term inside the Terminals folder in the Unix Support folder This file will be opened by the Mac OS X Terminal application After the script has run if you customize the font colors and window size and position just choose Save from the Terminal s Shell menu and those settings will be saved for the next Run in Terminal or Run in Debugger session that you start Run File Runs a script from an arbitrary file rather than f
194. dit has a tag editing dialog for it When there is only one tag permitted in the current context Tag Maker does not display the Insert Tag dialog but simply inserts the appropriate tag at the insertion point Choose Undo from the Edit menu if this tag is not what you expected If there are no valid tags in the current context Tag Maker sounds the system alert beep Tag Maker also works with CSS With the insertion point in a CSS selector or declaration Tag Maker will open a list of valid properties Option click while clicking the Insert button and Tag Maker will open a follow up dialog for editing the property for classes that BBEdit offers editing dialogs Invoking Tag Maker when the insertion point is not within a CSS selector will create a new skeleton rule set Tag Maker is also available by using contextual menus Simply control click at any point in your markup and BBEdit will open a contextual menu that includes all valid attributes or properties for the context of the insertion point 184 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Once you have used Tag Maker to enter a tag you can place the insertion point inside a tag and invoke Tag Maker again to show a list of available attributes for the tag Attributes which are already present in the tag are not shown in the list The list below for instance shows attributes of the lt BODY gt tag under HTML 4 0 Transitional Selecting an attribute from the list adds it to the tag and places the
195. dow 266 Toolbox Call Template command 70 Tools menu 266 Tools Preferences 175 ToolServer 254 Tools folder 255 TR tag 193 transformations case 125 Translate Line Breaks 171 translation 267 HTML 205 210 TT tag 200 two up printing 41 typing text 44 typographer s quotes 269 U U underline tag 200 UL tag 193 Un Comment plug in 269 Undo command 46 Unicode 24 77 Unix line breaks 24 Unix shell scripts 245 unordered lists 193 Update submenu 202 updating to BBEdit 6 231 upgrading to BBEdit 6 11 upper case 59 User Dictionary 12 user interface 3 UTF 8 25 Utilities submenu 204 V validation 201 202 VAR tag 200 variables 292 VisiBone 210 W watermark 42 Web Safe Colors palette 210 wildcards 114 window list 85 Window Options pop up menu 48 windows arranging 87 exchanging with next 89 Info button 88 sending to back 89 split bar 49 status bar 47 Windows floating window 26 Windows menu 83 Windows Preferences 176 worksheet 243 wrap around 94 Wrap while Typing option 63 wrapping text 55 63 X XML declaration 182 Y none Z Zap Gremlins command 61 Index 305
196. down the Shift key while clicking extends the selection No Modifier Shift Click Move insertion point Extend selection Double click Select word Extend selection to word Triple click Select line Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command in the Edit menu Holding the Command and Option keys as you click or double click triggers special actions Command Option Command Option Click Open URL Double click Look up selected Select word and word in program search for next ming reference occurrence of the word Holding down the Option key as you double click on a word is the same as selecting the word and choosing Find in Reference in the Search menu BBEdit optionally allows you to select entire lines by clicking in the left margin of an editing window Click and drag to select multiple lines Double click to select an entire paragraph double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs A checkbox in the Text Editing preferences not shown labeled Allow Single Click Line Selection controls this behavior If the checkbox is turned off clicking in the left margin moves the insertion point to the beginning of the clicked line as in previous versions of BBEdit Note that the line number bar if displayed is not part of the left margin Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit new in 6 5 Arrow Keys Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down a
197. duction to the HTML Tools 179 180 Configuring the HTML Tools Before using the HTML Tools you should prepare your source documents and your copy of BBEdit Although you can change your settings at any time we suggest visiting the Preferences before starting First create a folder to contain working draft copies of your HTML documents Put the HTML documents you are working on in this folder either copying them from your Web site or moving them from elsewhere on your hard drive then upload them to your Web server when you are satisfied with them Next open BBEdit and choose Preferences from the Edit menu BBEdit s Preferences window appears For now we will only set the preferences for working with HTML Refer to the following sections of this manual for further details HTML Colors Preferences on page 158 to choose a layout for the Web Safe Colors palette HTML Markup Preferences on page 159 to choose options for formatting HTML tags and attributes HTML Palette Preferences on page 160 to select the appearance of the HTML Tools palette HTML Tools Preferences on page 161 to tweak the function of the HTML Tools HTML Web Site Preferences on page 162 to tell BBEdit where your Web site is locally and on your server Using the BBEdit HTML Tools There are two ways to use BBEdit s HTML Tools via the HTML Tools HTML Tools New Document Tag Maker Edit Tag Document Type
198. e creator type creation date last modification date Projector status and more Enhanced FTP capabilities including use of alternate ports allowing the use of third party port reflectors and SSH tunnels for FTP and new FTP Browser windows which present a persistent view of remote directories Multiple clipboards to ease copying and moving multiple bits of text Expanded online help using Apple s HTML Help system provides the complete contents of this manual right inside BBEdit including frequently needed tidbits like glossary placeholders and grep metacharacters The BBEdit Table Builder is no longer available For a discussion of this please see Chapter 2 Since then we have been working on further enhancing BBEdit s core strengths and its integration with the Mac OS X platform Here is an overview of the major improvements that BBEdit 6 5 incorporates e BBEdit 6 5 is now supplied as a single application which runs on Mac OS 8 6 or later and is native on Mac OS X For use on Mac OS X at least version 10 0 is required and version 10 1 or later is recommended Also when running on Mac OS 8 6 or 9 BBEdit now requires CarbonLib version 1 4 or later Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit new in 6 5 e Integrated support for CSS cascading style sheets syntax coloring function navigation and markup support including contextual markup via Tag Maker e All new regular expression matching using the PCRE engine to br
199. e of their own where they can be selected by a pop up menu at the top of the dialog The resulting dialog is shown on the following page Note You set the default settings for most printing options in the Printing section of the Preferences Printing 39 40 Print Printer HP Laserjet 55i m Saved Settings Standard m BBEdit 6 5 oo 3 E Font Courier 10 4 spaces per tab L Use Document s Font Monaco 9 4 spaces per tab W Fractional Widths Options Print Selection Only Preview Cancel E Print To print one copy of the active document without opening the print dialog box choose the Print One Copy command from the File menu Options Available from Print Dialog You can set the following options from the print dialog box Font Button Click this button to open a dialog box that lets you set the font size style and tab settings to use while printing Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font when printing Fractional Widths When this option is selected BBEdit prints proportionally spaced fonts with better letter spacing This option works only on PostScript printers Options Button Click this button to open the Printing Options dialog box See The Printing Options Command below Print Selection Only When this option is selected BBEdit prints only the selected text Chapter 3 Working with Files Note The Printing Options Command The Pri
200. e previous versions of BBEdit scrolling the non active split view no longer automatically changes view focus To split the window drag the split bar some distance into the window and let go eoe i index html Fe Last Saved 10 06 01 08 19 28 PM E L3 n File Path sers admin Dasktop indas Ban lt IDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC z WsCz z DTD HTML 4 601 7 EN http www ws Jorge TRALIIS REC htm L461 19991 224 strict dtd xhtml lt head gt stit les BBEdit Secretale tit le gt lt meta name generator contentz BBEdit 5 5 tyle type text css gt lt l aimport additional css 5 4 3 be 4 To return to a single pane window drag the split bar back to its original place near the top of the window You can drag anywhere on the split bar not just at the right end Double clicking the split bar unsplits a split window or restores the last used split position If the window has never been split the window is split 50 50 To force a 50 50 split for a previously split window you can Option double click on the split bar when it is closed Window Anatomy 49 50 Cursor Movement and Text Selection BBEdit gives you several ways to move the insertion point and change the selection You can click and drag using normal Macintosh text selection techniques or you can use the various keys on the keyboard Clicking You can select text in an editing window in the normal Macintosh fashion by clicking and dragging Holding
201. e As command 22 Save As options 23 file creator 23 line breaks 24 Options button 23 Save As Stationery 23 Save Selection Only 23 state information 24 Save command 22 Save to FTP Server command 33 script placeholder 217 script systems 77 SCRIPT tag 191 198 Scripts 251 Scripts menu 14 Scripts palette 14 scrolling synchronized 89 search results window 97 145 searching 92 backward 94 106 batch find 95 case sensitive 94 106 S cont searching cont exclude matches 96 extending selection 94 for non printing characters 95 for whole words 94 grep 94 see also grep in a folder 99 in multiple files 95 in results of a previous search 100 in selection only 94 menu reference 107 multiple files 95 non printing characters 117 replacing in multiple files 104 results window 97 145 search set 99 with scripts 101 wrap around 94 Select All command 4 44 Select Line command 44 Select Paragraph command 44 select placeholder 216 SELECT tag 195 selected text 44 selecting text 44 50 by clicking 50 extending the selection 51 Send PostScript plug in 269 Send to Back command 89 Set Breakpoint command 252 Set Marker command 48 67 Set Menu Keys 3 Set Target command 252 setting markers 67 using grep 68 SGML 179 prologue 182 Shebang Menu 247 Shell scripts 245 shell worksheet 243 Shift Delete keystroke 52 shifting text 59 Show Invisibles command 48 Show pop up menu 143 simple includes 291 SMALL tag 200 Smart Editing 55 1
202. e ToolServer option is disabled when running on Mac OS X The Mac OS X Developer Help option is only available on Mac OS X With this turned on you can use Find in Reference to search the Carbon API help book Windows Preferences The Windows preferences control the size and appearance of both newly created windows and windows which do not contain their own display state information See the State panel to tell BBEdit how to store state information in files Window Zooming The Maximum Width pop up menu lets you specify the maximum width of a zoomed window The default setting is 13 inch Display The Zoom Windows To pop up menu lets you choose which screen BBEdit should use when zooming You can choose the main screen the nearest screen the largest screen or the smallest screen The nearest screen is the screen that contains most of the active window Always Zoom Windows Mark this checkbox to always expand windows to their maximum size when opening them regardless of their saved window size state Move As Little As Possible When this option is selected BBEdit keeps the windows as close to their original location as possible when you zoom them Window Stacking These icons determine how BBEdit stacks windows down and to the left straight down or down and to the right Leave Room for Finder When these options are selected BBEdit leaves room on the right side and or the bottom of the screen so that you can see icons on
203. e can be retrieved from a stylesheet In contrast with lt DIV gt which marks paragraph level classes SPAN marks character level classes You will be prompted for an ID for this span a class name which should correspond to a stylesheet entry and inline style information All are optional Subscript Marks the selected characters as a subscript lowered below the baseline Superscript Marks the selected characters as a superscript raised above the baseline Phrase Elements Phrase elements are HTML tags that mark sentences or phrases within a block element such as a paragraph with certain content related styles such as emphasis strong emphasis citation and so on Indirectly this determines the displayed format of the enclosed text although exactly what emphasis and so on mean is left up to the browser and or the stylesheet Abbreviation The enclosed text is an abbreviation Acronym The enclosed text is an acronym Citation The enclosed text is a citation of another document Computer Code The enclosed text is computer source code Deleted Text Inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it i e struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Defined Term The enclosed text is term defined in a glossary Emphasis The text should be displayed with visual emphas
204. e cases you may want to match all the text that appears between a pair of delimiters One way to do this is to bracket the search pattern with the delimiters like this ox e This works well if you have only one delimited string on the line But suppose the line looked like this apples oranges kiwis mangos penguins The search string above would match the entire line This is another instance of the longest match behavior of BBEdit s grep engine which was discussed previously Once again non greedy quantifiers come to the rescue The following pattern will match delimited strings 9p Marking Structured Text Suppose you are reading a long text document that doesn t have a table of contents but you notice that all the sections are numbered like this 3 2 7 Prehistoric Cartoon Communities 5 19 001 Restaurants of the Mesozoic Examples 127 128 You can use a grep pattern to create marks for these headings which will appear in the Mark pop up menu Choose Find amp Mark All from the Mark pop up menu in the status bar Then decide how many levels you want to mark In this example the headings always have at least two digits and at most four Use this pattern to find the headings Nd N Nd N 2Nd N 2Nd t a z and this pattern to make the file marks NZ The before the first search group ensures that BBEdit matches the numeric string at the beginning of a line The pattern d matc
205. e it is written in BBEdit 6 5 now lets you test the content of a file using the Contents criterion The middle column lets you choose the test to be applied to the selected attribute The available options here change depending on what attribute you selected If you choose Visibility in the first column for instance your only choices are whether the file is or is not visible However if you choose File Name in the first column the middle column lets you test to see if the name does or does not exactly match contain begin with or end with a particular string You can also test filenames to see if they match wildcard or Grep patterns In wildcard patterns the asterisk and question mark characters have special meanings The asterisk matches any number of characters such that c matches any file whose name ends with c The question mark matches a single character so that foo matches food fool foot and many other names Both the asterisk and the question mark can be used anywhere in a wildcard pattern and any number of either can be used in a single pattern Grep patterns also known as regular expressions are a powerful method of selecting filenames based on classes of text or repeating text They are covered in great detail in the next chapter The right column specifies the match criterion For example when filtering by File Name you type the text you want the name to match contain begin
206. e might use the following scripting command find index html searching in alias Files WebSite Likewise to find JavaScript line comments find searching in alias Files WebSite options search mode Grep To search in a single file find crash searching in alias Files WebSite index html Scripting the Clipboard BBEdit now has multiple clipboards These are fully accessible via the scripting interface Most operations due to the way Mac OS works with respect to clipboard data require the application to be frontmost Here are some examples count clipboard e Returns the number of clipboards supported by the application clipboard 1 e Returns index 1 contents Files WebSite length 14 is multibyte false display font ProFont display font size 9 style plain clipboard 1 as text Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Note e Returns Files WebSite clipboard 1 as reference e Returns clipboard 1 of application BBEdit 6 5 current clipboard e Returns the current clipboard as a record you can coerce it to reference or text or get individual properties To set the text in a given clipboard to literal text set contents of clipboard 3 to foobar To set the text in a clipboard to text represented by an object specifier set contents of clipboard 3 to selection of window 2 To copy the contents of one clipboard to another set contents of clipboard 5 to clipboard 3 or to set the current clipbo
207. e modules are supplied with the default installation Python Setext and TeX A list of additional modules from third party developers is available on our Web site The factory supplied language modules will run on both Mac OS X and Mac OS 9 Some third party language modules may need to be updated to run on Mac OS X Visit our Web site for the latest information 12 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit new in 6 5 Upgrading Note Upgrading WARNING MacPerl Support This folder contains the Perl Scripts and Perl Filters folders which are used to build the Camel menu and the floating Perl Scripts and Perl Filters palettes when running on Mac OS 9 and earlier See Unix Support below if you are running BBEdit on Mac OS X You can place scripts and filters within sub folders up to four levels deep of their respective folders to organize them Some example Perl scripts and filters are also supplied with the standard installation The Perl Output file stores output from Perl and the Perl Logs folder stores output logs for specific source files See Chapter 14 for more information on this folder You can move or copy over any Perl scripts or filters that you wish Note however that BBEdit 6 1 looked for a single folder named Perl Support that was used on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Starting with BBEdit 6 5 this is no longer the case Perl scripts and filters must now be placed in the Unix Support folder for use on Mac OS X See Chapte
208. e of text which does not match in other words a long line of text that does not end with abcd Because matching proceeds from left to right the grep engine will look for each a in the subject and then see if what follows matches the rest of the pattern If the pattern is specified as abcds Chapter 8 Searching with Grep the initial matches the entire line at first but when this fails because there is no following a it backtracks to match all but the last character then all but the last two characters and so on Once again the search for a covers the entire string from right to left so we are no better off However if the pattern is written as gt lt abcd there can be no backtracking for the item it can match only the entire line The subsequent lookbehind assertion does a single test on the last four characters If it fails the whole match fails immediately For long strings this approach makes a significant difference to the processing time When a pattern contains an unlimited repeat inside a subpattern that can itself be repeated an unlimited number of times the use of a once only subpattern is the only way to avoid some failing matches taking a very long time literally millions or even billions of years in some cases The pattern D lt d gt matches an unlimited number of substrings that either consist of non digits or digits enclosed in lt gt followed b
209. eScript you can write tell application BBEdit 6 5 set result to find BBEdit searching in window 17 with selecting match if found of result then set text of found object of result to Replacement end if end tell BBEdit and AppleScript 235 236 When performing a grep search you can t just replace the matched pattern with a replacement string the grep subsystem needs to compute the substitutions The grep substitution event is provided for this purpose given a preceding successful Grep search it will return the appropriate replacement string 5o if you perform a grep search the script would look like tell application BBEdit 6 5 set result to find BBEdit searching in window 1 options search mode grep if found of result then set text of found object of result to grep substitution of 1 end if end tell Note that when using a backslash character in AppleScript it needs to be escaped by means of another backslash thus in the above example 1 used in the script will become the grep replacement string 1 when passed to BBEdit Scripting Multi File Searches In BBEdit 6 a multi file search is a simple extension of the find scripting command To search a single file or folder for all occurrences matching the search parameters specify the file or folder as the searching in parameter of the search For example to find all occurrences of index html in a web site on
210. each alternative to temporarily move the current position back by the fixed width and then try to match If there are insufficient characters before the current position the match is deemed to fail Lookbehinds in conjunction with non backtracking a k a once only subpatterns can be particularly useful for matching at the ends of strings an example is given in the section on once only subpatterns below Several assertions of any sort may occur in succession For example 2 lt d 3 lt 999 oo matches foo preceded by three digits that are not 999 Notice that each of the assertions is applied independently at the same point in the subject string First there is a check that the previous three characters are all digits and then there is a check that the same three characters are not 999 This pattern does not match foo preceded by six characters the first of which are digits and the last three of which are not 999 For example it doesn t match 123abcfoo A pattern to do that is 2Nd 3 1999 foo This time the first assertion looks at the preceding six characters checking that the first three are digits and then the second assertion checks that the preceding three characters are not 999 Assertions can be nested in any combination For example foo bar baz matches an occurrence of baz that is preceded by bar which in turn is not preceded by foo wh
211. ear within BBEdit itself on the Tools menu This chapter describes the basic plug ins that ship with BBEdit Other developers have also written many BBEdit plug ins some of which are included on the BBEdit CD ROM and many more are available from various Web sites including our own If you would like to write your own plug ins for BBEdit please refer to the BBEdit Plug in Developer s Kit available from the Bare Bones Software web site In this chapter Usine BBEdit Plug InS 25459 Sx Mars queer exea cue mE OSes 265 The Tools Menu and Floating Window 266 The Set Key Button 266 SUPP Weds PMC TIS ua orae o aob Tow oe SOR ox nce Sue d dedi n huida gU a s 267 Add Remove Line Numbers 267 Columnize 267 Concatenate 267 Configure TeX Coloring 267 Convert to ASCII 267 Clear Lines Containing 268 Copy Lines Containing 268 Cut Lines Containing 268 Educate Quotes 269 Hex Dump 269 Make Prototypes 269 Prefix Suffix Lines 269 Reverse 269 Send PostScript 269 Sort 269 Un Comment 269 itd Patty le NS a5 cesaceswiqedtongd db v ete Xi dc des 270 Finding more plug ins 270 Plug in compatibility 270 Mac OS X Plug ins 270 Using BBEdit Plug Ins To use BBEdit plug ins you need to activate the BBEdit Plug ins option in the Application section of the Preferences dialog BBEdit plug ins are accessed through the Tools menu any plug in installed in your BBEdit Plug in
212. eaves the short lines alone This is what happens to the same text when you wrap with Paragraph Fill on e o8 P Wrap Music 42 52 PM JE oe File Path Lisers admin op Wrap Music This is a short Line of text This is a much longer Line of text i much longer than 65 characters n fact it s so long it goes off the right edge of the window And this is another short line 4 3 Pe BBEdit joins all the lines together to form a paragraph then wraps the text to the 65 character margin The Paragraph Indentation buttons let you indent paragraphs after they ve been wrapped e Flush Left does not indent paragraphs at all e First Line Only indents the first line by one tab stop The rest of the paragraph is flush against the left edge of the window e All Lines indents all lines in the paragraph by one tab stop e Reverse Indent places the first line in the paragraph flush against the left edge of the window and will indent all other lines in the paragraph by one tab stop e Same As First Line indents all lines to the same indentation as the first line of the selection or document 66 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Note Mark the Relative to First Line checkbox to make any paragraph indents relative to the original indent of the first line of the selection or document If you want paragraph indents to be relative to the left margin of the document make sure this checkbox isn t marked Click
213. eb server where your pages will be hosted Web Server Name Enter the name of your Web server here in URL format this might be something like http www example com for instance BBEdit uses this information to determine which links are on local to your server Site Path on Server Enter the server path of your site s main page here For example if your Web site is at http www example com foo bar you would enter http www example com for the Web Server Name and foo bar for the Site Path on Server Default Page Name Specify the default name used by your server for the document that is sent to a Web browser when a browser accesses a directory without specifying a file name Most servers use index html default html main html or home html Local Site Root Use the Choose button to select the folder that is the root of your Web site on your local hard disk or on a mounted server volume You can also drag the icon of the folder to the text box to the left of the Choose button Look for Templates and Include Files In Use the Choose button to select the folder that contains your HTML document templates and Include files You can also drag the icon of the folder to the text box to the left of the Choose button Languages Preferences The Languages preferences list how BBEdit associates file name suffixes e g html with the source language a file contains Chapter 10 Preferences Note new
214. ed in the Date amp Time control panel Title of the current document as entered using the New HTML Document command The owner name from the File Sharing control panel on Mac OS 9 and earlier or the currently logged in user on Mac OS X The current year e g 2001 Placeholders 289 290 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder When dealing with large Web sites that have multiple content folders it is often useful to specify relative rather than absolute paths for linking documents The RELATIVE placeholder allows you to easily generate relative references in templates and include files by providing a virtual path that uses the construction to back up the hierarchy to the root directory of the site To use this placeholder write your links as if they were all relative to the top of your web site including RELATIVE as the first directory in the path For example consider that you have the following file structure where each page includes a file which references the separate GIF image My Web Site Folderl Filel html Folder2 File2 html File3 html Folder3 Folder4 Folderb5 File4 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif If you write a relative link as follows img src irelativeidGraphics Buttons my footer button gif alt n gt and then run the Update command the following links will be generated In Filel html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif In File2 html Graphics Buttons m
215. elative to First Line iL ida f Don t Wrap Cancel C Wrap gt The controls on the left half of the dialog control how much of the text is hard wrapped and the maximum length of lines after hard wrapping The controls on the right side of the dialog control how this command deals with paragraphs The Selection Only option limits the effect of the command to the selected text If this option is not selected the command affects the entire contents of the window The Limit buttons let you specify the wrapping margin If the Paragraph Fill option is selected BBEdit forms the lines into paragraphs before wrapping the lines An example is the best way to illustrate this option How BBEdit Wraps Text 65 Start with this text eo Wrap Music Last Saved 10 05 01 08 42 52 PM ao File Path Users admin op Wrap Music mmm This iz a short Line of text This is a much longer line of text much longer than 65 characters n fact it s And this is another short line 4 E This is what happens when you wrap to 65 characters with Paragraph Fill off 408 9 ovwwuc CO L3 Fle Path Users admin op Wrap Music This is a short line of text This is a much longer line of text much longer than 65 characters n fact it s so long it goes off the right edge of the window And this is another short Line Y 4 3 be BBEdit breaks the long line at the 65 character right margin twice because the line was so long and l
216. elling checker adds it to the User Dictionary file in the BBEdit Dictionaries folder While the Add button is adequate for adding a few words it would be tedious to use it to add dozens or hundreds of words to the User Dictionary The User Dictionary is a BBEdit text file that you can edit yourself Each word must be On a separate line The file begins with a magic number that lets the spelling checker verify that the file is a dictionary Also it has Unix line breaks If you just edit the file and save it BBEdit will do the right thing We do not recommend that you try to create a user dictionary from scratch Do not change or remove the magic number or your User Dictionary will no longer be recognized by the spelling checker Using an External Spelling Checker You can use any external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite To set up an external spelling checker 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu and select the Spelling page 2 Select the Word Services option 3 Click the Set button and select an external spell checker You can also drag the icon of the spelling checker from the Finder to the text box to the left of the Set button To start the external spelling checker use the Check Spelling command just as you would for the built in spelling checker See the documentation for your spelling checker for details on how to use it once it has been invoked Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit CHAPTE
217. em in effect at the time the file is saved e Swap Bytes Since Unicode uses two bytes to represent each character this leaves the question of which of the two bytes comes first whether it is little endian or big endian By default BBEdit writes Unicode big endian the Unicode standard By marking Swap Bytes you can write little endian files instead some programs require this format Unicode 81 82 e UTF 8 Encoding UTF 8 encoding is a more compact variant of Unicode that uses 8 bit tokens where possible to encode frequently used sequences from the file This format makes it easier to view and edit content in non Unicode aware editors e Include Byte Order Mark When saving Unicode files you should always include a Byte Order Mark BOM so that the reading application knows what byte order the file s data is in For maximum compatibility the BOM should be used whenever possible and should only be left off if there is a specific reason to do so such as providing compatibility with a broken third party application e When you save as Unicode you can also choose Unicode from the Line Endings pop up in this dialog Unicode has its own line ending standard Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of utxt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTFS Opening Un
218. ent Cmd F Cmd Opt F Cmd G Cmd Shift G none or Cmd H Cmd Shift H Cmd E Cmd Opt E Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd T none none none Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Shift Cmd Opt Up Cmd Opt Down Ctrl Shift Ctrl none Cmd left arrow Cmd right arrow none Cmd Cmd Opt none none none none none none none none Listing by Menu and Command Name 273 Window gt Palettes ASCII Table Glossary Plug in Tools Scripts Stationery Windows HTML Markup Tools Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Table Utilities Web Safe Colors Perl Tools Perl Filters Perl Scripts ToolServer Scripts ToolServer Start ToolServer ToolServer Worksheet Send Command Commando Execute Commands Cancel Current Cmd ToolServer Tools List Scripts Open Script Editor Open Scripting Dict Start Recording installed scripts Appendix A Command Reference none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none Mac OS 9 only none none none none none Cmd none none none none none CodeWarrior CodeWarrior IDE Absoft IDE Compile Check Syntax Debug Set Breakpoint Set Breakpoint amp Go Add Add amp Compile Precompile Preprocess Bring Up To Date Make Run Projector Check In Check Out Modify Read Only Get Revisio
219. ent will be resolved by the browser relative to this location No BASE tag is created if you leave this field blank Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Note Meta Enter the META tag to be included at the top of the document here if any META tags can be used for client pull techniques for indicating search keywords and for a wide variety of other purposes Link If you want to use a LINK tag to specify a relationship between this document and other documents an email address style sheet or other information about the document enter the desired information in this field If you use a template to create the HTML document the template must include the META and LINK placeholders to indicate the location at which this information should be inserted into the generated document Template This pop up menu displays the templates present in the Templates folder specified in the HTML Web Site Preferences The names of template files must end with tmpl for them to be displayed on the menu Selecting a template other than Default will use the specified template to create a new document potentially ignoring some or all of the settings specified in this dialog HTML Tool Descriptions This section describes all of the HTML Tools as they appear in the hierarchical Markup menu For a description of the tools as they appear on the palette see the HTML Tool Palette Index which appears after the Tool Descriptions Tools that
220. ents or for documents that don t have a saved state see the Fonts panel of the Preferences BBEdit also displays a Fonts menu in its menu bar by default as a shortcut to opening the Font amp Tabs dialog to change the font This menu is especially useful when working with multi byte text documents for which you need to choose specific display fonts If you do not need this menu use the Application panel of the Preferences to turn it off Text Transformation BBEdit provides several commands that transform text in useful ways All of these commands are in the Text menu Balance Locates the pair of parentheses braces brackets or smart curly quotes that surround the insertion point or the current selection If there are unmatched delimiters within this area BBEdit beeps You can also double click on a delimiter character to invoke this command When syntax coloring is active for a document Balance including auto balance will ignore balance characters that appear inside of strings or comments Exchange Characters This command formerly known as Twiddle swaps two characters according to the following rules e If there is no selection and the insertion point is not at the beginning or end of a line or of the document this command transposes the two characters on either side of the insertion point e If the insertion point is at the beginning of a line or document this command transposes the two characters following the ins
221. ep pattern red white king queen Advanced Grep Topics 131 132 is matched against the text red king the backreferences will be set as follows l red king 2 red 3 king Sometimes however parentheses are needed for only for clustering not capturing BBEdit now supports non capturing parentheses using the syntax PATTERN That is if an open parenthesis is followed by the subpattern matched by that pair of parentheses is not counted when computing the backreferences For example if the text red king is matched against the pattern red white king queen the backreferences will be set as follows X1 red X2 king Perl Style Pattern Extensions BBEdit 6 5 s grep engine supports several extended sequences which provide grep patterns with super powers from another universe Their syntax is in the form KEY in other words an open parenthesis followed by a question mark followed by a KEY for the particular grep extension followed by the rest of the subpattern and a closing parenthesis This syntax specifically an open parenthesis followed by a question mark was not valid in older versions of BBEdit thus none of these extensions will conflict with old patterns We have already seen one such extension in the previous section of this document non capturing parentheses The remainder are listed in the chart below and discussed in detail afterward Extensi
222. ept these terms and conditions then do not break the package seal or install the software and return the package for a full refund License You may use the program and documentation on a single machine and copy the program and documentation into any machine readable or printed form for backup or support of your use of the program and documentation on the single machine provided that no more than one copy of the program and documentation may be used on a single machine by no more than one user at a time You may not use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or in part except as provided in this Agreement If you use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or part except as expressly provided for in this agreement your license is automatically terminated The license is effective on the date you accept this Agreement and remains in effect until terminated as indicated above or until you terminate it If the license is terminated for any reason you agree to destroy the program and documentation together with all copies thereof in whole or in part in any form and to cease all use of the program and documentation Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies The program documentation and any support from Bare Bones Software Inc are provided as is and without warranty express and implied including but not limited to any implied warranties of
223. er by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and Other Menu BBEdit behaves in a number of possible ways when you choose a tool or script from the ToolServer menu or the Tools List e If the menu item is an MPW tool that supports Commando BBEdit makes ToolServer active to display the Commando dialog for that tool Working with MPW 255 Important 256 E Note e If the menu item is an MPW tool that does not support Commando or a script file whose name ends with an ellipsis Option Semicolon BBEdit displays a dialog in which you can type the arguments for the tool You can press Return in the argument text to insert a carriage return use the Enter key as a shortcut for the Run button e If the menu item is a script with a cmdo resource in it BBEdit makes ToolServer active to display the Commando dialog for that script e If the menu item is a script that doesn t have an ellipsis at the end of its name and it doesn t have a cmdo resource in it BBEdit just executes that script BBEdit and Projector Projector is Apple s source control database which is available via the MPW Shell or through the stand alone SourceServer application included with MPW Either method works seamlessly with BBEdit thanks to the Projector pull down menu shown at left
224. er by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These naming conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Using File Groups If you frequently work with many related files you may want to create a file group for them A file group is a special kind of BBEdit file that contains references to other files and folders These files will usually be BBEdit text files but you can place any kind of file in a file group including aliases to a file and URL clippings File groups are persistent Once you have created one you can save it to disk using the Save command then open it in a later BBEdit session to have instant access to the same set of files Creating a File Group To create a new file group pull down the File menu and select File Group from the New submenu A new File Group window appears e o8 Et untitled group Add Files 4 f Add Folder 4 6 5 Grep Changes etx index html 6 gt To add files to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Files button When you click the Add Files button BBEdit
225. er pop up menu If you click the File button you will be prompted to choose a file from an Open dialog Normally all types of files will be displayed here If you select the Only Show HTML and Image Files checkbox at the bottom of the Anchor dialog however you will only see images and files whose names match those defined as HTML in the Languages section of BBEdit s Preferences dialog Alternatively you can drag and drop a file into the HREF field in order to insert its path and name BBEdit displays a warning message when the URL doesn t exist on your computer or is outside the scope of your site these warnings can be disabled using the checkboxes at the bottom of the dialog Image Inserts an lt IMG gt tag to display an image As with the Anchor tag you can select the Source from the Recent URLs or Current Folder pop ups by typing a URL or by clicking the File button If the Canto Cumulus image cataloging tool is running on your computer you can also click the Cumulus button to choose an image from Cumulus s catalog or you can use drag and drop Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools After choosing an image file you can specify alternate text which will appear in browsers that don t support images or for users who are surfing with image loading turned off enter the Size of the image select the amount of horizontal and vertical Space for wrapping around the image and choose the thickness of the border and the image s alignment Ima
226. ertion point e If the insertion point is at the end of a line or document this command transposes the two characters before the insertion point e If there is a selection this command transposes the characters at either end of the selection If you hold down the Option key as you choose this command Exchange Characters becomes Exchange Words Exchange Words behaves like Exchange Characters except that it acts on entire words rather than individual characters Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Change Case This command lets you change between upper and lower case characters or capitalize word line or sentence starts You can choose to change the text in the current selection or in the whole document When you choose the Change Case command the following dialog appears Change Case Upper Case Lower Case Capitalize Words Capitalize Sentences Capitalize Lines Form Words i Form Sentences Cancel Selection Only Change The radio buttons let you choose how to change the case of the text To limit the change to the selection click the Selection Only option The following table explains the function of each radio button in this dialog This button Changes the text like this Upper Case Every character changes to upper case Lower Case Every character changes to lower case Capitalize Words The first character of every word changes to upper case other characters remain unc
227. ertion point backward 1 place delete char Delete forward 1 character end of line Move insertion point to end of current line forward char Move insertion point forward 1 place keyboard quit cancel pending arguments kill line Delete to end of current line recenter Scrolls the current view so the selection is centered on screen next line Move insertion point down one line open line Inserts line break without moving insertion point previous line Move insertion point to start of line above current isearch backward Quick Search with the Backwards option isearch forward Quick Search transpose chars Exchange Characters universal argument See note below scroll up Page down kill region Cut yank Paste undo Undo Emacs Key Bindings 285 286 Key Sequence Action Ctl X Ctl C Ctl X Ctl F Ctl X Ctl S Ctl X Ctl W Esc Esc gt Esc Q Esc V Esc W save buffers kill emacs Quit find file Open file save buffer Save current document write file Save As beginning of buffer Move insertion point to start of document end of buffer Move insertion point to end of document fill paragraph Hard Wrap with current settings scroll down Page up copy region as kill Copy The universal argument command Ctl U does not work quite the same way as it does in Emacs In BBEdit it is a simple repeat count For example if you type Ctl U then type a 3 then type Ctl N the inserti
228. es to the permissions and click the Set button to change them Take care not to set the permissions such that the file becomes inaccessible to you BBEdit also supports FTP URL clippings You can make a clipping of the FTP URL for a file add the clipping to a file group double click on it and BBEdit will open the specified file for editing If the clipping contains the FTP URL for a directory BBEdit will open a new FTP Browser window see next section for more information about FTP Browsers Alternatively you can double click on an FTP clipping in a disk browser or drop one on BBEdit s icon in the Finder with the same results as just described Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP server will create a clipping containing that file s URL Once you have selected a file and opened it BBEdit displays the file in a text editing window The status bar displays the URL of the FTP file not the pathname of the file on your hard drive as it does for local files The window path pop up menu in editing windows for files opened via FTP now displays the file s path on the FTP server rather than the local path to the temporary file Choosing one of the items from the pop up will open a new FTP Browser window to the chosen directory When you open a file from an FTP server BBEdit downloads it raw in binary mode then performs a standard linefeed conversion on the downloaded file Cha
229. et selection makes it even easier to use than before while its ability to perform keyword substitution combined with an option to run OSA scripts and insert their results further extends its flexibility a Glossary Set HTML Glossary html Y HTML Glassary html Anchor Bigger Font Bold Center italicize Link Page Template W Universal Items Current Date amp Time Choosing the Glossary command from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu opens the Glossary floating window shown at left This window lists the contents of the active glossary set plus the contents of the Universal Items glossary set and any glossary items which are contained directly within the Glossary folder i e which do not belong to a set In order to create a glossary item type or paste the desired text or text and keywords into a BBEdit document window then save the text into an appropriate place within the Glossary folder 213 214 You can create multiple levels of folders inside the Glossary folder to better organize different types of content The first level of these folders appear in the Set pop up menu allowing you to reveal only the group of glossary items you wish to work with at a given time Any glossary items that are not placed in a subfolder are always shown in the Glossary window as are the contents of the Universal Items set Language Sensitivity of the Glossary If you have selected the Glossary is Language Sensitive option i
230. etals 212 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Using the Glossary 213 The Glossary Command ua etr ette on ees eee ages 213 Language Sensitivity of the Glossary 0 000 214 Manually Sorting the Glossary 0 0 0 eee eee eee 214 Using the Glossary merr avis edna deudas eT eie e oe pu M bed 214 The bet Rey BUON 265 due SE e E PRO os hat oy eae sas 215 Glossary DUDSHLPUOEIS soc dte rro eee Exalr Eua eR tU en 216 Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary esses 217 Scripting BBEdit 219 Verba 53pIenilla sip ie oan pinta remnant dubitem ated darte 219 ADDIe5eHpl OVeDVIOW eceso rirna i perri mici aque pela qe Dat e Nos 220 About Macintosh Scripting 220 e Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 220 Recordable Applications 221 e Saving Scripts 222 Using Scripts with Applications 222 e Scripting Resources 222 BBEditand Applescript oos SER EDS S a doe E ERA 224 Recording Scripts for BBEdit 224 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 226 Sample Scripts 230 e AppleScript Pitfalls 230 e Moving Scripts to BBEdit 6 231 Wotkine atto 5ctrIple S au qs Merten ote amen ed teca eae S 237 The Scripts Menu 237 Manually Sorting the Scripts List 238 e Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 238 Working with Development Tools 241 Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments 242 Syntax Coloring 242 Working with Development Environments
231. etu Pa S be eS qx ea dates oh Sie 237 The Scripts Menu 237 Manually Sorting the Scripts List 238 Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 238 Verba Sapientia Beginning with version 6 0 many facets of BBEdit s scripting support have changed substantially and we recommend that you review the following sections on BBEdit and AppleScript and Working with Scripts carefully regardless of whether you are new to scripting BBEdit or are familiar with scripting previous versions 219 220 Note AppleScript Overview If you are familiar with AppleScript you should have little difficulty scripting BBEdit It has a robust and highly flexible object model If you don t know much about scripting though read on for an introduction to the necessary concepts About Macintosh Scripting In System 7 Pro Apple introduced the Open Scripting Architecture OSA and with it AppleScript OSA and AppleScript became a standard part of the Macintosh experience and both have been with us ever since AppleScript is by far the most popular OSA language but there are others including UserLand Frontier and a relatively new JavaScript implementation Most OSA languages are capable of accomplishing more or less similar things although the actual commands to do so are usually very different from one language to the next In this chapter we will focus on AppleScript since it s the scripting language that comes with the Mac OS However BBEdit can be sc
232. everal different encoding standards vying for supremacy and email messages would often have information about what script they were in stripped right out of them by mail servers that assumed ASCII was sufficient This led to the development of a new international standard for character encoding dubbed Unicode Like existing Asian encodings Unicode uses two bytes to represent each character of text However as the name implies Unicode is a single code that contains characters from Roman Cyrillic Asian Middle Eastern and various other scripts Asian languages get short shrift unfortunately There just isn t room for all the characters of Korean Japanese and Chinese in a single two byte code Only the most frequently used characters from each are included Fortunately most speakers of Asian languages don t use anywhere near all the symbols which are remember words and not letters available in their language Apple began supporting Unicode in Mac OS 8 1 and all later versions of Mac OS include this capability Saving Unicode Files BBEdit 6 5 supports Unicode in addition to Apple s proprietary text encoding systems When saving a file you can choose to save text composed in any script as a Unicode document by clicking the Options button in the Save dialog The Options dialog gives you the following Unicode related choices e Save as Unicode Saves the file as Unicode if marked Otherwise the text is saved using the script syst
233. ews It is not a full Emacs emulation mode rather it is more of a comfort blanket for individuals with Emacs key bindings hard wired into their muscle memory See Appendix B Editing Shortcuts for a list of the Emacs commands BBEdit supports If you turn on the Display Status Window option a small floating window will appear when you type an Emacs shortcut indicating which command you have applied Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior These two checkboxes let you swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys when used with cursor navigation keys to move through a window s contents You can set this separately for horizontal and vertical cursor movement For details on using cursor navigation keys see Chapter 4 and Appendix B Allow Text Smoothing If turned on this option allows the system to draw smoothed anti aliased text in text editing views When turned off text smoothing is suppressed which may make certain fonts and sizes more readable This option is only available on Mac OS X Chapter 10 Preferences Note Extra Space in Text Views To have BBEdit leave extra empty space when you scroll to the end of a text view choose Half Window or Full Window here Text Files Opening Preferences The Text Files Opening preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it opens files Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves
234. extend selection to word Triple click select line Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command in the Edit menu Holding the Command and Option keys as you click or double click triggers special actions Option Command Command Option Click Open URL Double click look up selected select word and search word in program for next occurrence of ming reference the word 283 284 Arrow and Delete Keys You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down You can augment these with the Command and Option keys to move by word line or screens or with the Shift key to create or extend selections For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point In BBEdit 6 5 you can now hold down the Control key while using the arrow keys to scroll through editing windows without moving the position of the insertion point Key Modifier Action left right Arrow none Move 1 character left right left right Arrow Option Move 1 word left right left right Arrow Command Move to beginning end of line up down Arrow none Move up down 1 line in file up down Arrow Command Move to top bottom of file up down Arrow Option Move to previous next screen page any of the above Shift Make or extend a selection range Delete none Deletes selection range or character preceding to the left of the insertion point
235. ez resource description language NOx followed by the character code in hexadecimal base 16 This option is useful to identify both the value and location of gremlin characters Later you can search for occurrences of VOx to locate the converted characters Searching for the grep pattern of NNOx will select the entire character code for easy modification or deletion Replace with Replaces the gremlin with the character you type in the edit field next to the radio button This option is useful for identifying the location of gremlins but not their value Selection Only If this checkbox is marked only the selection is processed Otherwise gremlins will be zapped throughout the entire document Entab Converts runs of spaces into tabs according to the setting in the Font amp Tabs dialog box This transformation is useful when downloading text from a mainframe computer or on line service when the document uses spaces to line up columns of text If you don t use a monospaced font columns usually won t line up unless you Entab the text first Detab Converts tabs into runs of spaces according to the setting in the Font amp Tabs dialog box This command is useful when uploading text to a mainframe or on line service that has no concept of tabs as column separators Resolve URL To resolve a URL Uniform Resource Locator place the insertion point anywhere in the URL and choose this command BBEdit examines the URL and launche
236. filters when running the same copy of BBEdit on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Other BBEdit Files and Folders When you start up BBEdit it may create the following files and folders BBEdit Preferences Folder BBEdit stores various settings files in a folder named BBEdit Preferences which can be located either in the BBEdit Support folder or in the Preferences folder of your System folder The settings in the BBEdit Support folder have precedence although if neither is found BBEdit will create a set of default preferences in your system Preferences folder On Mac OS X the default location for the BBEdit Preferences folder is in the Preferences folder in the Library folder in the current user s home folder Settings in the BBEdit Support folder have precedence BBEdit Prefs Data Basic BBEdit settings are stored in a file called BBEdit Prefs Data in the BBEdit Preferences folder BBEdit 6 5 will not import preference settings from versions of BBEdit prior to BBEdit 6 0 If you are upgrading to BBEdit 6 5 from BBEdit 5 1 or earlier you will need to reset any preferences for which you do not want to use the factory default value Other BBEdit Files and Folders 15 Upgrading Note Upgrading 16 Note BBEdit FTP Bookmarks BBEdit stores user defined FTP bookmarks in this file which is found in your active BBEdit Preferences folder In some previous versions of BBEdit these bookmarks were stored in the Prefs file If yo
237. fixed depth of nesting It is not possible to handle an arbitrary nesting depth Perl 5 6 has provided an experimental facility that allows regular expressions to recurse amongst other things It does this by interpolating Perl code in the expression at run time and the code can refer to the expression itself Obviously BBEdit s grep engine cannot support the interpolation of Perl code Instead the specialitem R is provided for the specific case of recursion The following recursive pattern solves the parentheses problem NCGGOE 0 1 CR 88 First it matches an opening parenthesis Then it matches any number of substrings which can either be a sequence of non parentheses or a recursive match of the pattern itself i e a correctly parenthesized substring Finally there is a closing parenthesis This particular example pattern contains nested unlimited repeats and so the use of a once only subpattern for matching strings of non parentheses is important when applying the pattern to strings that do not match For example when it tries to match against this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it yields no match quickly However if a once only subpattern is not used the match runs for a very long time indeed because there are so many different ways the and repeats can carve up the subject and all have to be tested before failure can be reported Chapter 8 Searching with Grep CHAPTER
238. folders of the selected folder mark the Search Nested Folders checkbox The Skip Folders checkbox skips folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses The Search Invisible Folders checkbox allows you to search inside invisible folders Multi File Searching 101 102 Note Note You can also choose to search only text files or to search all file types If you have graphics or other types of files in the search set it may be a good idea to restrict the search to only text files This setting is in addition to any file filter see next section and is in fact applied before the filter File Filters If you do not want to search every file in the set you selected but want to include only those that meet certain criteria such as those created on a certain date or only those created by BBEdit and not some other program or those that are C source code you can use a file filter Mark the Use File Filter checkbox then choose the desired file filter from the Filters pop up menu If none of the filters you have already defined meets your needs you can define a new one or create a temporary filter The process of creating and managing file filters has changed in BBEdit 6 5 from its original incarnation in BBEdit 6 0 If you use file filters we suggest you read through this section again New Filter To define a new saved file filter select New Filter from the pop up menu BBEdit will ask you for a filter name then the Edit
239. following section Attaching Scripts to Menu Items for complete details on BBEdit s attachability Recording Scripts for BBEdit Any language is easier to read than to write easier to understand than to speak AppleScript is no different That s because even though all the commands it uses are English words arranged in ways that more or less make grammatical sense you still have to know or find out from the application s dictionary exactly which words to use and what order they should go in But it s easy to get started making scripts by recording them 224 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit First launch both BBEdit and the Script Editor If you don t know where your copy of the Script Editor is use Find File or Sherlock to locate it If you don t have it maybe you deleted it because you thought you d never use it just re install it from your Macintosh system software CD When you launch the Script Editor a new blank script window appears Click the Record button circled in the illustration below eos untitled Y Description Record Check Syntax AppleScript 3 Tr Now switch to BBEdit and perform your task Remember that the Script Editor is recording everything you do in every recordable application you are running not just BBEdit If you do something in the Finder for instance that will get recorded too Since almost everything you do is recorded remember that if you make an error and then Und
240. for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information If a selection exists each paragraph in the selection has lt P gt and lt P gt tags inserted around it HTML Tool Descriptions 191 192 Div Begins a new division A division is a generic block of text containing one or more paragraphs or other block elements that all have some type of structural attribute in common Use lt DIV gt when no predefined block type is appropriate You can specify alignment ID a class for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information Horizontal Rule Inserts a HR tag You may specify the alignment the thickness size of the rule its width and whether it contains a three dimensional shade Heading Inserts a heading of any level and allows you to specify the alignment of the heading H1 through H6 Inserts a heading of the specified level The alignment attribute used will match the last one chosen when using the Heading tool Address Inserts an lt ADDRESS gt block The formatting of this element is browser dependent but it is usually used to indicate that a block of text is a postal address Blockquote Inserts a block quote i e several lines of text that have been quoted from another document Most browsers display this as indentation leading many authors to use this tag to indent a section of text although stylesheets are a more correct and flexible way to a
241. for reopening the worksheet if you have closed it while ToolServer is still in use Note also that if you close the worksheet but do something that causes ToolServer to send output to BBEdit e g run a script from the ToolServer menu or the ToolServer Scripts floater BBEdit will automatically open the worksheet To execute a file full of commands for example the output of a make file open the file and choose Execute Commands from the ToolServer menu ToolServer executes each command in the file The Go To Next Error and Go To Previous Error commands on the Search menu work in the ToolServer Worksheet ToolServer Tools By placing MPW tools or aliases to tools in the ToolServer Tools folder inside the BBEdit Support folder you can make tools available in the ToolServer menu in BBEdit These tools are also available in the ToolServer Tools list which can be opened from the ToolServer menu This list works like the other hierarchical floating windows in BBEdit for example the Scripts floater you can assign keyboard shortcuts to tools as well By default items in the ToolServer Tools List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Compile would sort before 01 Build For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divid
242. format e g 07 Oct 01 CREATIONDATE The creation date of the current file e g 07 Oct 01 CREATIONTIME DIRPAT H The creation time of the current file in the format specified in the Date amp Time control panel The path on the server as specified in the HTML Web DOCSIZE Site panel of the Preferences Strips any leading slash from the path string The size of the current document plus included images DOCTITLE DONT_UPDATE in bytes The title of the current document as extracted from the lt TITLE gt tag Marks a document so that the HTML Update tool will FILENAME ignore it during processing The filename of the current file GENERATOR Generator name used for Give BBEdit Credit in New 1C_EMAIL HTML Document function e g BBEdit 6 5 Email address returned by Internet control panel 1C_ORGANIZATION 1C_REALNAME Organization value returned by the Internet control panel not available on Mac OS X Name value returned by Internet control panel LANGUAGE The language specified in the New HTML Document LINK command in format space lang en The LINK tag as entered using the New HTML LOCALPATH Document command The full local path to the current file LONGDATE Long Date format e g Sunday October 07 2001 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Placeholder MACHINE META MODIFIEDDATE MODIFIEDTIME
243. formerly named Unwrap removes carriage returns and spaces between groups of text Use this command to turn text that has hard line breaks into text that can be soft wrapped See How BBEdit Wraps Text below for more information Rewrap Quoted Text Rewraps hard wrapped text with Internet style quoting while retaining the quoting characters In Internet messages it is common to use the gt symbol to indicate that part of a message is quoted from a message that s being replied to As a message gets batted back and forth in a discussion the oldest bits of text will end up having several symbols in front of them Each line of text in the message has a carriage return at the end making rewrapping the text to a different width somewhat problematic In this command BBEdit first extracts each chunk of quoted text that is successive lines of text with the same number of markers The markers are temporarily removed and BBEdit removes the hard line breaks in the text forming it into a soft wrapped paragraph The text is then hard wrapped according to the settings in the dialog which are the same as for the Hard Wrap command described later and the quote markers are re inserted Increase and Decrease Quote Level Inserts or deletes a standard Internet quote character gt from the selected hard wrapped text or on the current line if there is no selection Strip Quotes Removes all Internet style quoting from the
244. fy an alternate port place it on the end of the host name separated by a colon e g ftp example com 1111 Alternately select an item from the Bookmarks pop up menu to fill in a predefined server user name and password Bookmarks can be set by entering the appropriate information in the FTP dialog and choosing Add from the Bookmarks pop up menu or by using the bookmark list in the FTP Settings preference panel To store FIP passwords BBEdit now takes advantage of Apple s Keychain Manager which is installed as part of Mac OS 9 and later As a security measure we do not recommend preserving FTP passwords on systems which do not have Keychain support If you do need to store such information we suggest you consider using the bookmark facility of a stand alone FTP client or a secure information storage application such as PGP or Web Confidential In the FTP dialog the Remember Password option applies only to the last FIP session that was initiated before dismissing the FTP dialog The Auto Connect option depends on this switch so if Remember Password is turned off or disabled Auto Connect will be disabled Opening From and Saving to FTP Servers 31 32 Note As long as the Keychain is unlocked whenever you enter a server and user name pair for which there is a record the corresponding password will be filled in automatically This will happen regardless of whether the Remember Password option in the dialog is on or off If
245. g 192 BODY tag 190 bookmarks 31 BR tag 198 breakpoints 252 Bring Up To Date command 253 broken links 202 Browser Display Preferences 150 browser plug ins 197 browsers 141 differences 72 disk browser 142 errors 243 file list panel 144 search results 97 145 splitter 142 status bar 142 143 text panel 142 144 BUTTON tag 195 C C programming language 62 Cancel button 4 Cancel Check Out command 259 capitalize lines 59 sentences 59 words 59 CAPTION tag 194 Cascading Style Sheets 186 297 C cont case sensitivity 94 case transformations 125 CENTER tag 192 changing case 59 character classes 116 Check In command 256 Check In Folder 261 Check Out command 257 Check Out Folder command 262 Check Spelling command 12 74 Check submenu 201 Check Syntax command 252 checking links 202 checking spelling 74 external spell checker 76 user dictionary 76 CITE tag 199 Clear command 4 44 Clear key 44 Clear Lines Containing plug in 268 clearing a marker 68 client pull 191 client side image maps 198 client side scripts 191 192 198 Clipboard 45 clipboard placeholder 216 clipboards multiple 45 CODE tag 199 CodeWarrior 11 252 COL tag 194 COLGROUP tag 194 colored text 57 in HTML documents 190 Columnize plug in 267 268 Command and Option keys in document windows 51 Command key 5 command keys assigning to menu items 271 in dialogs 4 181 in menus 3 listing by default key 279 listing by menu 272 shortcuts 283
246. g Maker 184 185 templates 211 tool descriptions 183 translation 205 210 updating documents 202 utilities 204 variables 292 HTML Tools Preferences 161 HTML Web Site Preferences 162 human interface 3 I italic tag 200 image maps 198 IMG tag 196 inactive windows 44 include files 291 variables 292 see also templates indenting 59 indexing HTML documents 205 206 Info button 48 Inline Elements submenu 196 INPUT tag 195 INS tag 192 200 Insert pop up menu 48 inserted text 192 inserting files 69 inserting folder listings 69 inserting page breaks 70 inserting project listings 70 inserting text 69 inserting Toolbox calls 70 insertion placeholder 216 insertion point 44 installing BBEdit 9 international text 26 77 invisible characters 56 invisible files 29 on FIP servers 32 Invisible Folders 101 Java applets 197 JavaScript 191 192 198 K KBD tag 200 key icon 48 keyboard shortcuts 266 271 283 in dialogs 4 181 keywords see placeholders L LABEL tag 195 Languages Preferences 162 language sensitive glossary 214 launching BBEdit 19 LEGEND tag 195 LI tag 193 line breaks 24 60 line feeds 61 line numbers 47 56 on printouts 41 line prefixes and suffixes 269 link checker 202 LINK tag 183 191 list items HTML 193 Lists submenu 193 longest match issue 122 lower case 59 Macintosh Drag and Drop 46 see also drag and drop Macintosh line breaks 24 MacPerl 245 Macromedia Dreamweaver 205 Make Proto
247. g in can be used to reverse the effects of the Educate Quotes plug in Clear Lines Containing Removes from the active window all the lines that contain a specified search string Unlike Cut Lines Containing however this plug in does not affect the contents of the clipboard Copy Lines Containing Copies to the Clipboard all the lines that contain the specified string Cut Lines Containing Cuts from the active window all the lines that contain a specified search string This plug in places the cut lines on the Clipboard The Clear Copy Cut Lines Containing dialog boxes next page now have a grep pop up menu This is the same menu from the Find dialog You can add or delete patterns in the Text Search panel of the Preferences Also like the Find dialog these plug ins now have a Selection 8 button clicking this button enters the current selection from the frontmost document window into the search pattern field Cut Lines Containing t8 foa Case Sensitive C Use Grep Cancel ems fg a Note Starting with BBEdit 6 1 the old Cut Copy Lines Containing plug in has been replaced by a plug in named Process Lines Containing which contains both the Cut and Copy Lines Containing commands as well as the new Clear Lines Containing command 268 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins Educate Quotes Converts straight quotes and to typographer s quotes and in the text of the active window Hex Dump This plug in
248. ge height and width should be specified whenever possible to speed layout of the page in the browser BBEdit will enter these values for you automatically when you choose an image file You can also mark the Is Map checkbox to use a server side image map or the Use Map checkbox to use a client side image map embedded in the HTML document Applet Inserts the APPLET tag for specifying a Java applet You will need to specify the location the folder that contains your main Java class file the codebase as well as the name of the main class file If the file is in a ZIP or JAR archive you can specify its name here as well If you will control the applet via a client side script enter a name for it As with images you should always enter the desired size for the applet s display area to speed browser layout You can also specify alignment and white space around the applet along with ALT text to be displayed if the applet can t be used Object The lt OBJECT gt tag is a generic tag for including almost any type of data in a page including images and Java applets It can also be used to insert ActiveX controls and data intended to be used by plug ins However it is an HTML 4 tag and may not be supported in all popular browsers For this reason we suggest using IMG and lt APPLET gt for those types of objects and use lt OBJECT gt only for embedding other types of data such as that used by plug ins For an example of this see the Web
249. grapher s quotes If you need to type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a typographer s quote when the option is deselected hold down the Control key as you type the or key Smart quote marks should not be used in HTML documents as they will not display correctly you must use straight quotes or entity codes instead We recommend leaving this option turned off if you edit HTML content or program code Smart Editing The Smart Editing option has been removed from BBEdit 6 5 It wasn t smart enough Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces when you type Tab rather than inserting a Tab character Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Philip Bar the window width or a specific number of characters The Philip Bar is a gray line in the status bar that indicates the right edge of the usable viewing area on a 9 inch classic Mac monitor See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter to learn how wrapping works in BBEdit Text Options 55 56 Tip Note Display Options These options control the way BBEdit displays the text in the active document window Changes you make here affect only that window To change display characteristics for windows you open in the future use the settings available in the Status Bar panel of the Preferences dialog Stat
250. h of tab stops The current printing font settings appear in the text box to the right of the button Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font when printing Fractional Widths When this option is selected BBEdit prints proportionally spaced fonts with better letter spacing Print Backwards When this option is selected BBEdit prints documents last page first This option is useful if you are printing to a printer like the original LaserWriter that does not arrange pages in the proper order Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a box along the edges of the printed text Text Printing Preferences 173 174 Note Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page number the name of the file the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full path name of the file being printed in the header Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper Print Two Up When this option is selected BBEdit prints two pages on one sheet of paper Use this option to save paper 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Print Color Syntax If this checkbox is marked BBEdit pr
251. h relative to the current document The Target field determines the frame in which hyperlinked documents will appear by default Both fields are optional Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Link The LINK tag tells the browser about a document related to the current document The most common use for this tag is to point to an externally defined CSS stylesheet document You can choose to indicate whether this link defines a REL forward relation or REV reverse relation the type of the relation for example a stylesheet the media the URL of the referenced file including Full Root or Relative addressing and optional Type Hreflang Target and Charset attributes Meta META tags are used to define browser specific or optional information that is not a part of the HTML specification You can choose to create either a NAME or an HTTP EQUIV variation of the META tag The latter is frequently used for client pull applications in browsers that support it but more generically it makes most browsers behave as if the specified line was received as part of the HTTP protocol header After choosing the type of META tag and the desired value of the NAME or HTTP EQUIV field enter a value for the tag s CONTENT attribute and optionally its SCHEME attribute You can choose from some common values for the NAME field by using the pop up menu to the right of that field If the HTTP EQUIV value is content type then you can also select from some common
252. hanged Capitalize Sentences The first character or every sentence changes to upper case other characters remain unchanged Capitalize Lines The first character of every line changes to upper case the other characters remain unchanged Form Words The first character of every word changes to upper case other characters change to lower case Form Sentences The first character of every sentence changes to upper case other characters change to lower case Shift Left and Shift Right These commands indent or outdent the selected text by one tab stop If you hold down the Shift key while choosing one of these commands the selected text will be indented or outdented by one space instead of one tab stop BBEdit will also now entab and detab on the fly as you shift text For example if the selected text is indented one tab stop and you apply Shift Left One Space the tab will be converted to spaces and the text will be outdented one space If you then apply Shift Right One Space the spaces will be converted back to a single tab Text Transformation 59 60 Add Line Breaks This command formerly named Insert Line Breaks inserts a hard line break at the end of each line of text as displayed If there is any text selected only that text will have line breaks added otherwise line breaks will be added to the entire document See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter for more information Remove Line Breaks This command
253. hapter 7 Searching Note new in 6 5 Multi File Search When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches a set of files for the search string See Multi File Searching below to learn more about searching in several files Batch Find When this checkbox is selected and you are doing a multi file search BBEdit collects all the matches into a search results window To learn more about multi file searching see Multi File Searching later in this chapter Exclude Matches When this checkbox is selected and you are doing a multi file search BBEdit finds all the files that don t contain the search string rather than the files that do Special Characters You can use the following special characters to search for line breaks and other non printing characters as well as hexadecimal escapes to search for any desired 8 bit character Character Matches r line break carriage return n Unix line break line feed t tab AT page break form feed xNN hexadecimal character code NN e g xOD for CR NN backslash X The form of a hex escape is xNN where N is any single hex digit 0 9 A F The x may be upper or lower case You can use the ASCII Table on the Windows menu to find the hex value for any 8 bit Mac character You can perform a literal search for any character including a null using this option Malformed escapes are treated as literal strings In previous versions of BBEdit you could not
254. haracter a second abba word character followed by the second one again and the first one again We will revisit subpatterns in the section on replacement where you will see how the choice of subpatterns affects the changes you can make Using Alternation The alternation operator allows you to match any of several patterns at a given point To use this operator place it between one or more patterns x y to match either x or y As with all of the preceding options you can combine alternation with other pattern elements to handle more complex searches Pattern Text is Matches a t A cat each a and t alc t A cat each a c and t a cat dog A cat is here A dog is A cat is A dog is is here A giraffe is here A b Abba A bb and a Andy Ted Andy and Ted joined AAA Andy and Ted yesterday d 4 years I ve been a loyal member 1983 years since 1983 almost 16 years ago a z N That s almost 16 years That s almost 1 6 years Writing Search Patterns 121 new in 6 5 The Longest Match Issue When creating complex patterns you should bear in mind that the quantifiers and are greedy That is they will always make the longest possible match possible to a given pattern so if your pattern is E one or more E s and your text contains EEEE the pattern matches all the E s at once not just the first one This is usually what you want but n
255. have greater control over the listing of open documents You can choose whether items are grouped by window Kind or are all listed together without dividers You can also elect to sort windows by name or in order of creation Please refer to Chapter 10 for additional details Minimize Window This command puts the frontmost window into the Mac OS X Dock Click the window icon in the Dock to restore the window Hold down the Option key and this command will become Minimize All Windows If you are not using Mac OS X this command will not be available on the menu 83 new in 6 5 new in 6 5 new in 6 5 84 Note Bring All to Front In Mac OS 9 and earlier each application s windows are all grouped together in a single layer In Mac OS X windows from different applications can be interspersed BBEdit s Bring All to Front command will bring all un minimized BBEdit windows to the front If you are not using Mac OS X this command will not be available on the menu Palettes The Palettes sub menu provides quick access to all of BBEdit s numerous tool palettes and floating utility windows In previous versions of BBEdit the commands to access these items were scattered the HTML Tools palettes were in the Markup menu the AppleScript floating window in the Script menu etc Choosing an item from this sub menu opens the corresponding palette If a window or palette is already open selecting the corresponding listing on the sub menu wil
256. he Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Text Views option in the Text Editing pane of the Preferences window Cursor Movement and Text Selection 53 Function Keys If your keyboard has function keys you can use the following key equivalents for cutting and pasting to scroll and to move the insertion point No Modifier Option Command Shift F1 Undo Redo F2 Cut Cut amp Append F3 Copy Copy amp Append F4 Paste del forward delete delete to delete to end of word end of line Home scroll to top of move insertion document point to start of document End scroll to end of move insertion document point to end of document Pg Up scroll page up Pg Dn scroll page down Note Holding down the Command and Option keys as you press the forward delete key deletes to the end of the document Text Options You can use the Text Options command formerly Window Options to change the way BBEdit edits text and the way it displays text and additional elements in its windows Text Options Options for index html Editing Display W Auto Indent MW Balance While Typing C Smart Quotes O Auto Expand Tabs kal Soft Wrap Text to Philip Bar to Window Width to Character Width Language HTML m I f Cancel C Line Numbers Cl Cursor Position Cl Current Function W Status Bar W Philip Bar L3 Tab Stops Cl Show Invisibles Snow Spaces T Syntax Coloring d OK The Text Option dialog box is divided in
257. he Compare Files command see page 70 Revision History This command retrieves a complete version history of the frontmost window and displays it in a new BBEdit document window New Project Creates a new project database from an existing folder of source files If any of the files are already in a project they will be orphaned before the new project is created The New Project dialog appears New Project Source Folder none selected P Choose Save Project As none selected W Scan Nested Folders v Use Old Format W Skip Folders Checking in Check In Options W Text Files l Keep Modifiable W Resource Files Touch after Checking In 3 Everything v Verify Contents E Cancer 2 The New Project command skips over files named DS Store and FBCIndex folders named FBCLockFolder and invisible files like Icon M If for some perverse reason you want these files checked in the Check In command will allow you to do so Save Project As Click the Choose button to specify the location of the database usually on a server volume Working with MPW 259 260 Search Folder Click the Choose button to choose the folder that contains your source files or drag the folder from the Finder to the gray box Scan Nested Folders Check this box to scan all subfolders of the selected folder for files to include in the new project Skip Folders Check this box to have BB
258. he option setting Chapter 8 Searching with Grep These options can also be set using the clustering non capturing parentheses syntax defined earlier by inserting the option letters between the and The scope of options set in this manner is limited to the subpattern contained therein Examples Search for i saturday sunday Will match SATURDAY or Saturday or SUNday etc Search for i foo i bar Will match foobar or FOObar Won t match FOOBAR or fooBAR Positional Assertions Positional assertions anchor a pattern without actually matching any characters Simple assertions have already been described those which are invoked with the escape sequences b NB A MZ z and For example the pattern bfoo b will only match the string foo if it has word breaks on both sides but the b s do not themselves match any characters the entire text matched by this pattern are the three characters f o and o Lookahead and lookbehind assertions work in a similar manner but allow you to test for arbitrary patterns to anchor next to If you have ever said to yourself I would like to match foo but only when it is next to bar lookaround assertions fill that need Positive lookahead assertions begin with and negative lookahead assertions begin with For example wt will match any word followed by a semicolon but the semicolon is not
259. he previous options Optimize Reformats the document to use the absolute minimum of characters while remaining syntactically valid You will have difficulty editing your document in this format in fact if you don t have Soft Wrap turned on in the Window Options you might think most of your document has vanished because the command strips out all line breaks but rest assured that your document will appear the same in your browser as it always has Use one of the Format commands discussed above to put your page back into an editable format if you need to make changes Also applies the various Cleaner tools automatically Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Translate Allows you to translate plain text to HTML or vice versa The dialog that appears gives you flexible options for translating Macintosh characters to HTML entities converting paragraphs to P tags and vice versa removing HTML tags entirely and so on You can choose to have the results displayed in a new document window and to convert only the selection rather than the whole document See HTML Translation later in this chapter for more information Remove Comments or Markup Removes all HTML comments or HTML tags respectively from the selection Note that removing comments will not remove comment markers around client side scripts like JavaScript where they are required for proper functioning of the page on older browsers but will remove the comment markers used by placeho
260. he template will include your new address What you d really like to be able to do is update all the files you have already created to include the revised footer Include Files 291 292 Warning Note Since this capability is needed primarily in Web site maintenance BBEdit lets you embed the include directive in an HTML comment An end bbinclude comment is also required The included text is inserted between the two comment markers but the comments themselves remain in place The comments are not shown in the browser This is known as a persistent include A persistent include looks like this lt bbinclude footer html lt end bbinclude The first time a persistent include is processed it is handled much like a simple include However since the include directives remain in place and because they mark the beginning and end of the inserted text the Update tool can rip out the obsolete included text and replace it with the updated file Using persistent includes and the Update Folder or Update Site commands you can easily make these sorts of changes to entire sites in moments Any changes you have made to the included text after its initial inclusion will be discarded when the persistent include is updated even if you have not changed the include file Include Files with Variables Include files can be extended even further through the use of variables which provide a means of inserting arbitrary text whe
261. heet window you create BBEdit 6 5 ships with a default worksheet stationery file that provides a small tutorial on using worksheet windows When you grow tired of seeing this tutorial in every new worksheet you can either remove the Default Worksheet Stationery file from the Stationery folder or replace it with one of your own Perl Python and Shell Scripting BBEdit 6 5 provides robust integration with Perl Python and Unix shell scripting languages Previous versions of BBEdit understood Perl syntax and would color Perl source code appropriately These versions could run Perl scripts and provided support for special kinds of scripts known as filters which operate on the text in a BBEdit document window very much like BBEdit plug ins When running on Mac OS X BBEdit 6 5 extends the support provided in previous versions for Perl to encompass other Unix scripting languages such as Python and shell scripts Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 On Mac OS 9 and earlier BBEdit works with the Macintosh version of Perl dubbed MacPerl MacPerl is free software and can be downloaded from the MacPerl web site BBEdit can not run Python or Unix shell scripts when running on Mac OS 9 but it will provide syntax coloring and function browsing for files containing code in these languages http www macperl org BBEdit s MacPerl features are accessed through the Camel menu pictured at left Why a camel Because the camel is both the official masc
262. hen you double click a folder name BBEdit replaces the file list pane with the contents of the folder When you double click a file name BBEdit opens the file in an editing window If the file list pane also included a line number BBEdit scrolls to that line 141 new in 6 5 Controls above the list may allow you to determine what kinds of items are displayed in the list For example in disk browsers there s a pop up menu that lets you choose to display text files all files or other types of files and another that lets you return the browser to a parent directory of the current folder In error browsers checkboxes allow you to hide or show all errors warnings or notes For results browsers BBEdit can either show an error hierarchy where all the errors associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the error list or a flat listing showing each individual error encountered on a separate line You can choose which of these display methods to use by default in the Browser Display preferences To remove items from the display list select them and press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu Status Bar The browser status bar is like the status bar in editing windows Some browsers have additional buttons and controls in the status area as well These standard items the pencil icon the Function pop up the Text Opt
263. herever you drop it Some palette buttons are actually pop up menus Clicking a pop up menu button while holding the Command key invokes that menu s last selected menu option Try pressing Option and watch how the palette changes Many buttons that normally display a settings dialog can be forced to use their previous settings by holding Option as you click The Preview button previews your document in a new browser window when you Option click HTML Tools Palette Tool Menu Based Equivalent New Document Tag Maker Edit Tag Document Type Character Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements Anchor Image Break Font Paragraph File gt New gt HTML Document Markup gt Tag Maker Markup gt Edit Tag Markup gt Document Type Markup gt Character Set Markup gt CSS submenu Markup gt Head Elements gt Body Properties Markup gt Head Elements submenu Markup gt Inline Elements gt Anchor Markup gt lInline Elements gt Image Markup gt Inline Elements gt Break Markup gt Inline Elements gt Font Markup gt Block Elements gt Paragraph The HTML Tools Palettes 207 208 Tool Menu Based Equivalent Div Markup gt Block Elements gt Div Heading Markup gt Block Elements submenu Dreamweaver Markup gt Misc gt Dreamweaver Block Elements Inline Elements List Table Forms Phrase Elements Font Style Elements Frames Check Syntax Check Links Update Balance Tags Check Update Includes Utilities Misc Preview Chapter 11 BBEd
264. hes a possible decimal point and a digit sequence The other groups use the white space idiom and the identifier idiom You can use a similar technique to mark any section that has a section mark that can be described with grep Marking a Mail Digest You can elaborate the structured text technique to create markers for mail digests Assume that each digest is separated by the following lines From Sadie Burke lt sadie burke com gt Date Sun 16 Jul 1995 13 17 45 0700 Subject Fishing with the judge Suppose you want the marker text to list the subject and the sender You would use the following search string From t r rSubject t And mark the text with this replacement string 2 M Note that for the sequence r r in the middle of the search string the r before Subject is necessary because as previously discussed the special character does not match carriage returns At least not by default See Advanced Topics below for details on how to make dot match any character including carriage returns Rearranging Name Lists You can use grep patterns to transform a list of names in first name first form to last name first order for a later sorting for instance Assume that the names are in the form Junior X Potter Jill Safai Dylan Schuyler Goode Walter Wang Chapter 8 Searching with Grep new in 6 5 If you use this search pattern I 19 5 And this replacement string 2
265. his command is part of the HTML Tools it can be used in any document whenever you want to use placeholders When a file is included in another file using the bbinclude directive or a related directive any placeholders in the included file are replaced with their current values before the text is included The include file itself is not changed only the included text is substituted All of the above methods of invoking placeholders can also invoke included files which can have placeholders of their own The placeholders described in this chapter are only for use with the HTML Tools Update command They cannot be used with BBEdit s Glossary function nor can Glossary placeholders be used in include or template files 287 BBEdit supports the following placeholders Placeholders are not case sensitive Placeholder ABBREVDATE BASE Replaced By Abbreviated date e g Sun Oct 07 2001 The BASE tag as entered using the New HTML Document command The value of the BASE URL specified in an HTML BASE_URL BODYTEXT document s header useful if you want to refer to the document s location on the server When invoking a template using the New HTML Document command and the Create New Window checkbox is not marked the current contents of the frontmost window if any will replace this placeholder CHARSET COMPDATE The character set specified in the New HTML Document command Compact Date
266. his command will open the listed error which came before or after the selected error See Chapter 9 for more information on error browsers Go to Previous Next Placeholder When you use a glossary file that contains multiple SINSERTION F cookies the second and subsequent cookies are replaced with the string You can use the Go To Previous Next Placeholder commands to jump back and forth between these special strings from the keyboard For example you might use this command when filling in the parameters of a function call or a series of tag attributes Chapter 7 Searching Find Differences Finds the differences between two files or all of the files contained in two folders See Chapter 4 for more details Apply to New Applies the currently selected difference to the New version of two files which are being compared See Chapter 4 for more details Apply to Old Applies the currently selected difference to the Old version of two files which are being compared Find in Reference Looks up the selected text using your chosen Macintosh Toolbox reference program Find Definition Looks up the selected text from whatever project document is currently open in CodeWarrior Search Menu Reference 109 110 Chapter 7 Searching CHAPTER Searching with Grep The Grep option in BBEdit s Find command offers a powerful way to make changes to your data that plain text searches simply can t Grep patterns also kno
267. his function when you wish to record a revision but are not yet finished working on the file Check In as Branch Check this box to start a new branch on the source tree for this file Delete after Checking In Check this box to delete the local copy of a file after checking it in Touch after Checking In Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file written to the database matches the local file before deleting the local file Check Out Checks the source file in the frontmost window or some other file so it can be modified When you open a file which contains Projector information you are not permitted to edit it until you formally check it out using this command The Check Out dialog box appears Check Out none selected NU R MM M l p File Task Description Ooo Revision Options C New Branch U Put History in CKID I Touch Modification Date S Verify Contents A P ri a Eu List All Revisions l Cancel OK File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the rectangle displaying the file path Task Description A notes field that can be used to record the reason the file was checked out Revision Lists the available revisions of the document By default the current local version is selected Cl
268. hose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be checked and indicate that nested folders should or should not be included in the check HTML Tool Descriptions 201 202 If a Check Syntax or Check Links operation generates any errors or warnings BBEdit will display an error results browser listing For more details on the new error results browser format please refer to Chapter 9 Syntax A syntax check validates your HTML document to the specification defined in the lt DOCTYPE gt SGML prolog at the top of the HTML document Errors are displayed in an error results browser Scroll through the list at the top of the window to see the errors that have been found single click to see the text that caused the error in the lower part of the window Double click an error message to open the file for editing Note that an HTML document can display the way you expect it to in a browser and still contain invalid HTML Browsers are designed to be lenient in the markup they accept so you can get away with a certain amount of sloppy markup However producing well formed syntactically correct HTML documents is the best way to assure that your document will display in some reasonable fashion in a wide variety of Web browsers even those you haven t tested the page in Links BBEdit scans your document or a folder of documents looking for links and object references such as images and Java applets that cannot be resolved Note that BBEdit
269. i Linse 253 30 Fike indes bomi Liew 295 detererens tund e Tip You can change this arrangement with the Arrange command in the Windows menu To change the default arrangement use the Differences section of the Preferences dialog The Differences window lists all of the differences between the new file and the old file To see the differences click a line in the Differences window BBEdit scrolls and selects that spot in both files Use the Apply to New and Apply to Old buttons to make the new file look like the old file or vice versa After you use the Copy to New or Copy to Old buttons BBEdit italicizes the line in the Differences window to indicate that you have already applied that change new in 6 5 If a Differences results window is open and frontmost The Compare Again command in the Search menu will re compare the two files being compared and refresh the list of differences accordingly The small button with the circular icon between the Apply to New and Apply to Old buttons performs the same function For folders the Find Differences command lists all of the files and marks those which are different with a bullet Note You can now compare the current Clipboard contents against any file To do so just select Clipboard from either the New or Old pop up menus in the Find Differences dialog when the Clipboard window is open 72 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit new in 6 5 Multi File Compare Options When comp
270. i m ion Onl S Skip ALL CAPS Pn mr ta W Start At Top Guesses Questioned Word Replace With meee pom 2 Set spelling options Select Selection Only to limit spelling checking to the selected text Select Start At Top to check from the beginning of the text otherwise BBEdit checks from the insertion point to the end of the document Select Skip ALL CAPS to avoid checking words consisting of only capital letters These settings will now persist across runs of the application Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit 3 Click Start to begin checking BBEdit scans the text Words that aren t in a dictionary appear in the Questioned Word text box The text box in the middle of the dialog shows the questioned word in context eo BBEdit Preferences These settings establish the defaults for spell checking K Reve f Save HTML Markup A 9 Built In HTML Palette Use Dictionaries HTML Preview American Dictionary KC ud HTML Tools British Dictionary HTML Web Site ipsc i ctionan f Forget Languages Software Update Spelling Startup State Status Bar Text Colors Text Editing Text Files Opening Text Files Saving Text Printing Word Services Text Search none selected f Choose 4 Tools Windows BBEdit lists guesses for the questioned word in the list box The first one appears in the Replace With box 4 If the Questioned Word is a misspelled word choose the correct word from the
271. ication is scriptable and OSA scripts aren t the best solution for automating applications that aren t What goes on in an application that s scriptable The foundation of OSA scripting is something called the Apple Event Macintosh applications are designed around an event loop they go around in circles waiting for you the esteemed user to do something select a menu command press some keys etc These actions are passed to the application by the operating system in the form of an event The application decodes the event to figure out what you did then performs an appropriate operation After an event has been handled the application goes back to waiting for another one At this point the Mac OS may decide to give some time to another application on your computer Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Apple Events are special events that applications send to each other enabling a feature called inter application communication LAC It s a mouthful but it just means applications can talk to each other Apple Events are also the way OSA scripts tell applications what to do and which data to retrieve 5o to be scriptable an application must first support Apple Events Apple Events in their naked form are raw and cryptic things bits of hieroglyphics only a programmer could love So a scriptable application also has a scripting dictionary The scripting dictionary tells any application that lets you write OSA scripts like the Script Edi
272. ick List Previous Revisions to retrieve a list of all revisions from the database New Branch Check this box to start a new branch on the source tree for this file Working with MPW 257 new in 6 5 Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the document s ckid resource If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Touch Modification Date Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is actually the same file as the one in the Projector database Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Get Revision Gets a revision for the current document or for some other file The Get Revision dialog appears Get Revision mone selected l h l File Revision Options U Put History in CKID f Touch Modification Date NY verify Contents P m Cancel Get Revision now works on files that have been checked out or on which Modify Read Only has been used Get Revision will perform a checkout or Modify Read Only operation if necessary and notifies you that you will lose your changes File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the re
273. icode Files When opening files BBEdit will ordinarily determine the format of a file based on its file type and content and automatically process Mac text Unicode and UTF 8 However some files are structured such that BBEdit is unable to correctly determine their format based on their type or contents The cases that we know of are e UTF 8 files whose type is TEXT and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 8 file is of type TEXT but has a byte order mark it will be correctly interpreted as UTF 8 e Byte swapped Unicode files which were written without a byte order mark usually by broken Windows software Unicode files whose type is TEXT instead of the Mac standard utxt and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 16 file lacks a BOM but is of type utxt BBEdit will treat it as big endian Unicode If you know that a file you are trying to open is in Unicode but it displays as gibberish on your screen close its window without saving Then try reopening the file using the Open As pop up menu in the Open dialog to specify whether to treat the file as Unicode byte swapped little endian Unicode or UTF 8 When opening a malformed UTF 8 document BBEdit will present an alert to warn you When such a file is encountered during multi file searching a warning will be logged Chapter 5 Working with International Text CHAPTER new in 6 5 new in 6 5 Working with Windows This chapter describes the c
274. ics with it You do not need to know SGML to create Web pages but you may find that studying it improves your understanding of some HTML issues What is SGML and why should I use it by the SGML Project http www oasis open org cover exetwhat html SGML on the Web by Softquad Inc http www ncsa uiuc edu SDG Software Mosaic WebSGML html What You Need Before you start make sure you have the following available e A modern Web browser for previewing your pages We suggest having each of iCab Microsoft Internet Explorer OmniWeb and Netscape Navigator or Communicator available as these are the most widely used browsers but do not always display pages the same way e A general purpose FTP client such as Fetch Interarchy or Transmit While BBEdit does have built in FTP tools such dedicated applications are naturally more powerful and of course also allow you to upload things other than text files You will find them useful in creating and managing your Web site e Access to a Web server either your own or someone else s where you will publish your pages on the Web Your Internet provider is a good place to start and can help you find the answers to questions about obtaining your own domain name setting up your own dedicated server and so on You will also want to be familiar with BBEdit s basic capabilities The other chapters in this manual will help you learn more about editing and searching text using BBEdit Intro
275. ier in most programming languages you might use this search pattern a z a zA 20 9 This pattern matches any sequence that begins with a lowercase letter and is followed by zero or more alphanumeric characters If other characters are allowed in the identifier add them to the pattern This pattern allows underscores in only the first character of the identifier a z_ a zA Z0 9 The following pattern allows underscores anywhere but the first character but allows identifiers to begin with an uppercase or lowercase letter a zA Z a zA Z0 9_ Matching White Space Often you will want to match two sequences of data that are separated by tabs or spaces whether to simply identify them or to rearrange them Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For example suppose you have a list of formatted label data pairs like this User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You can see that there are tabs or spaces between the labels on the left and the data on the right but you have no way of knowing how many spaces or tabs there will be on any given line Here is a character class that means match one or more white space characters t So if you wanted to transform the list above to look like this User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You would use this search pattern a z t a z and this replacement pattern NEN CAZES Matching Delimited Strings In som
276. ile 2 2Nd 3 21999 foo is another pattern which matches foo preceded by three digits and any three characters that are not 999 Assertion subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns and may not be repeated because it makes no sense to assert the same thing several times If any kind of assertion contains capturing subpatterns within it these are counted for the purposes of numbering the capturing subpatterns in the whole pattern However substring capturing is carried out only for positive assertions because it does not make sense for negative assertions Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Conditional Subpatterns Conditional subpatterns allow you to apply if then or if then else logic to pattern matching The if portion can either be an integer between 1 and 99 or an assertion The two forms of syntax are if then condition yes pattern if then else condition yes pattern no pattern If the condition evaluates as true the yes pattern portion attempts to match Otherwise the no pattern portion does if there is a no pattern If the condition text between the parentheses is an integer it corresponds to the backreferenced subpattern with the same number Don t precede the number with a backslash If the corresponding backreference has previously matched in the pattern then the condition is satisfied Here s an example of how this can be used Let s say we want to match the words red or blue
277. ill also be displayed when you perform any other batch operation that modifies files and a file with a Read Only ckid is encountered Quick Search The Quick Search command formerly located on the Window menu is now available on the Search menu Whenever you need to interactively locate a string in a window you can use this feature Quick Search lets you do an incremental search In other words it shows the matching text as you type the search string so you only have to type until you find the text you want To use Quick Search 1 Choose Quick Search from the Search menu 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Quick Search window e Quick Search FA Case Sensitive F Search Backwards As you type BBEdit selects the first occurrence of what you have typed so far 3 To find the next occurrence of the matching text click Find Again You can use the Case Sensitive and Find Backwards options to change the way Quick Search looks for text 106 Chapter 7 Searching Tip Tip You can keep the Quick Search window open all the time and bring it to the front when you want to search Quick Search always searches in the text view of the window immediately behind the Quick Search window Search Menu Reference This section describes all of the commands in the Search menu Find Opens the Find dialog box You can set the search and replace strings choose searching options and for a multi file search specify the set of fi
278. ill any Unix commands which expect to be dealing with terminals for example try running emacs in a shell worksheet When dragging files into a shell worksheet window the behavior is different than when dragging files into regular text windows An unmodified drag will insert the POSIX style path of the dragged file at the drop location Multiple dragged files generate multiple paths separated by carriage returns If you hold down the Command key while dragging it will cause the file s contents to be inserted or a folder listing if the item you are dragging is a folder The default working directory for new shell windows is the user s home directory New shell windows are colored using the Unix Shell Script language If you are not familiar with Unix command line tools we strongly urge you to obtain and read an introductory guide to using a Unix shell Command line tools can be very useful but if used incorrectly they can render files or even your entire system unusable Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools new in 6 5 Default Worksheet Stationery When creating a new worksheet window BBEdit will look for a worksheet stationery file named Default Worksheet Stationery This file is located in the Stationery folder in the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 for more information regarding the BBEdit Support folder If the default worksheet stationery exists you will see the contents of this file in every new works
279. ill be displayed as any other text Input Defines an input field which can be a text or password input various types of buttons and even files images or hidden fields Specify the name and the default value of these fields and if applicable their size maximum length tab index access key and disabled or read only attributes Disabled Read Only Tab Index and Access Key are HTML 4 features and may not be supported by all popular browsers You may also specify handlers for the JavaScript onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange handlers Label HTML 4 allows you to specify that text next to a control is a Label and in browsers that understand the tag clicking the label associated with a button activates the corresponding control BBEdit lets you create a LABEL tag specifying the name of the control it should be associated with an optional keyboard equivalent to activate the control and onFocus and onBlur JavaScript handlers Select Defines a scrolling list or pop up menu Enter the name of the control the number of items to display leave the size blank for a pop up menu rather than a scrolling list and whether the list allows multiple items to be selected Optionally mark the control as disabled and specify onFocus onBlur and onChange handlers HTML Tool Descriptions 195 196 Option Group Using the lt OPTIONGROUP gt tag you can create submenus in pop up menus in browsers that support them All lt OPTION gt t
280. ils on the results browser format that BBEdit displays please refer to Chapter 9 Choose the Document Folder or Site command from the Update submenu to update all includes and placeholders in the selected set of file s Appendix C contains information regarding the use of placeholders Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools new in 6 5 Choose the Document Images Folder Images or Site Images command from the Update submenu to update the HEIGHT and WIDTH attributes of image tags and optionally to insert empty ALT attributes when missing in the selected set of file s When choosing to update a Folder or a Site using either of these sets of tools a dialog like the one below appears Update Folder ALsers admin Desktop Files P A Folder O Skip Folders f Check Nested Folders Cancel f Update b This dialog allows you to choose the desired folder click the Folder button to choose a folder using an Open dialog or drag a folder from the Finder to the gray box optionally specify that subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be updated and indicate that nested folders should or should not be included in the update Updating Files with Projector CKIDs During an Update operation whenever BBEdit attempts to modify a file containing a Projector ckid resource which is designated Read Only it will display the following dialog asking you how to handle the file Kavier
281. ing new power and flexibility to BBEdit s search and replace capabilities including the use of back references within search patterns non greedy searching and discrete match quantifiers e Enhancements to BBEdit s powerful file filtering option for multi file searching you can now filter files based on their content e Pervasive integration with Unix scripting systems you can now run Perl Python and Unix shell scripts and filters from within BBEdit Mac OS X e Manual selection of the source language for any file plus new automatic guessing of language based on content for files without file name extensions e Syntax coloring function navigation and updated keywords to support PHP4 PHP3 was included in 6 0 e Syntax checking support for WML 1 2 and 1 3 e Pervasive support for long an d Unicode file names Mac OS X e Super Get Info integration if you have Super Get Info installed click an icon to get information about the open document Mac OS X e Authenticated saves automatically prompts for administrator name and password when working with protected files Mac OS X e New bbedit command line tool invoke BBEdit from anywhere in the Unix command line to open files Mac OS X e Syntax coloring and function navigation for Objective C source code e External editor support for CodeWarrior Pro 7 IDE 4 2 5 and later when running on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X e Floating tool palettes now support sn
282. ing text 44 icon 48 inserting text 69 modification indicator 47 on FIP servers 31 revealing in Finder 89 saving 21 22 window anatomy 46 DOS line breaks 24 double clicking 23 26 drag and drop in document windows 46 to BBEdit application icon 23 26 to Windows floating window 26 with HTML Tools 207 Dreamweaver 205 DT tag 193 dynamic menus 3 Edit Tag command 185 Edit Task Comment command 259 editing text 44 shortcuts 283 Editor Defaults Preferences 151 Educate Quotes plug in 269 EM tag 199 Emacs Key Bindings 170 285 End key 54 Entab command 62 Enter key 4 Enter Search String command 107 error browser 243 escape codes 62 113 Escape key 4 Exchange with Next command 89 exclude matches 96 expanding tabs 55 extending the selection 51 53 extensions see plug ins external spell checker 76 F F keys 54 FIELDSET tag 195 file filters 102 File Filters Preferences 153 F cont file groups 21 35 file list panel 144 file placeholder 216 File Search Preferences 154 File Types Preferences 155 File pop up menu 48 Filters 250 filters file 102 Find amp Mark All command 68 Find amp Mark command 48 Find amp Replace All Matches 99 105 Find amp Replace All Matches command 108 Find Again command 93 107 Find All 93 97 Find command 91 107 Find Definition command 109 Find dialog 92 Find Differences command 109 Find in Next File command 98 108 Find Selection command 107 finding text see searching floating
283. ing with Windows 83 Window Menu 4 24 3 3222 nb uw kel d ete RU Rebate Se 83 Minimize Window 83 Bring All to Front 84 Palettes 84 e Arrange 87 Get Info 88 Super Get Info 88 Reveal in Finder 89 Zoom 89 e Quick Find 89 e Send to Back 89 e Exchange with Next 89 e Synchro Scrolling 89 e Window Names 89 Searching 91 Basic Searching and Replace sos Dao p es R UR cR TOR 92 Search Settings 94 e Special Characters 95 Malt Bile Searchin a oodd wise kh oce ato da PAD ed dosi ed ata 95 Multi File Search Results Batch Find 97 e Multi File Search Results File by File 98 Specifying the Search Set 99 e Multi File Search Options 101 File Filters 102 NMiult File Replacing escacs nadine vip bn cde ara aa hri ms 104 Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs 105 Quek Sed i ia rotos dr Rt ot to na x en dac dta do ace d n ecd bs 106 Search Menu Reference lessleseeeeeeeee eee 107 Find 107 Quick Search 107 Find Again 107 e Find Selection 107 Enter Search Replace String 107 e Replace 107 Replace All 108 Replace amp Find Again 108 Find in Next File 108 Open All Matches 108 Find amp Replace All Matches 108 Go to Line 108 Go to Center Line 108 e Go to Previous Next Error 108 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 108 Find Differences 109 Apply to New
284. ints colorized text in color You should generally use this option only on color printers as colorized text may come out in difficult to read dithered shades of gray Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date that the file was printed Text Search Preferences The Text Search preferences let you set default options to use with the Find command In BBEdit 6 0 the Text Search preferences panel contained checkboxes for Wrap Around Use Grep Case Sensitive and Entire Words These preferences were used only to establish the defaults for parameters not supplied AppleScript find and replace operations but their presence caused confusion In all later versions including BBEdit 6 5 the value for any of these parameters not explicitly supplied in script commands is false and these settings have been removed from the panel Report Single File Replace All Results When this option is selected BBEdit displays a dialog telling you how many replacements it made when you perform a Replace All operation on a single file Remember Find Dialog s Start At Top Setting Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit remember the state of the Start At Top checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog from one invocation to the next Chapter 10 Preferences Note S Note Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog When this preference is turned on and U
285. ions pop up the Mark pop up the Path pop up the Projector button and the Info button should already be familiar to you as they appear on BBEdit document windows by default See Window Anatomy in Chapter 4 for an explanation of these standard BBEdit functions Text View Pane When you click an item in the list pane BBEdit displays its contents in the text view pane If you click a folder BBEdit lists the names of the files in the folder If you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file When the current focus is in the bottom pane the space bar acts like the Page Down key and Shift space acts as Page Up Splitter You can change the size of the file list pane or the text view pane by dragging the double line that separates them Double clicking on the splitter bar will collapse the text view pane completely and double clicking on it again in the bottom of the browser window will restore the text pane to its previous proportions Disk Browsers Use a disk browser to explore the contents of a disk or a folder without opening each file one at a time 142 Chapter 9 Browsers Note To open a disk browser pull down the File menu and select Disk Browser from the New submenu BBEdit opens a new disk browser that starts at the desktop eos Disk Browser 1 Show All Available Ki Directory BBEdit Support El f pen Abaut BBEdit Support T Dictionaries a Glossary T Help X femme Glossary
286. is most browsers interpret this as italic text HTML Tool Descriptions 199 200 Inserted Text Inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Input Text Kbd The enclosed text is text to be entered on a computer keyboard used in instructions Sample Output The enclosed text is sample output from a computer program used in instructions Strong Emphasis The text should be displayed with strong emphasis most browsers interpret this as boldface Variable The text is a placeholder in an instruction or tutorial and should be replaced with an actual value of the appropriate type before actually performing the indicated operation Font Style Elements Like Phrase Elements Font Style Elements mark relatively short pieces of text within a block element However they are concerned more with the appearance of the text than its structural function in the document Big Displays the enclosed text in a larger font than usual Small Displays the enclosed text in a smaller font than usual Bold Displays the enclosed text in boldface type Italic Displays the enclosed text in italic type Strike Through Displays the enclosed text in a strike through style Teletype Text Displays the enclosed text in a monospaced font as on a computer terminal or
287. istent dace NU SUR Se el ies 24 WSIS SLATIONCL e se sens ted sordera abe sd tetro heures deaf aN 34 Using File Groups 4 54 0 260 86 NA EA a Sama tia Rea EAT 35 Creating a File Group 35 Using File Groups 36 e Removing Files from a File Group 37 Making Backups esa dox sob rem qut dee pa obe ese ed dues 37 Automatic Backups 38 Manual Backups 38 OBS obse doct diis rated ba te dis een edad sod caca dotes indue fide 39 Options Available from Print Dialog 40 e The Printing Options Command 41 Editing Text with BBEdit 43 Basic EIU c oe cactus torte Cist op TE Uim bent Ed Cans 44 Moving text 45 Multiple Clipboards 45 e Drag and Drop 46 Iv uluple Undo sia situe eter tes modos hm m wee baie da bates 46 Vito ANTON 2c anten dus igh eee cote AGE set i eT PER Rua ues 46 The Status Bar 47 The Function Pop Up Menu 49 e The Split Bar 49 Cursor Movement and Text Selection 00 00000 50 Clicking 50 Arrow Keys 51 e Scrolling the View 52 e The Delete Key 52 The Numeric Keypad 53 Go To Line Command 53 Function Keys 54 Tex OPONS ararsa sin naea uot cease d c uM edt dU 54 Editing Options 55 Display Options 56 Pone labs ao robbed ebd Seas eased au teu Auge tae 57 Jext IransfoE a OL s aora cits a ue ades itte aeter A VOIR S 58 Balance 58 Exchange Characters 58 e Change Case 59 e Shift Left and Shift Right 59 A
288. it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Using the Glossary To use the Glossary double click a item s name to insert its contents at the insertion point if there is a selection it is replaced with the glossary item s contents Alternately click the item s name once to select it then click Insert or drag the item into an editing window You can also assign key equivalents for easy access to frequently used glossary items See the section describing the Set Key button below for instructions To quickly edit a glossary item you can either select it and hold down the Option key to change the Insert button to Open or you can Option double click on the item Chapter 12 Using the Glossary Note The Set Key Button The Set Key button in the Glossary floating window lets you assign key equivalents to a glossary item You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalents Assigning a Key to a Glossary Item To assign a key to a Glossary item 1 Select the item you wish to assign a key equivalent to in the Glossary window 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for Current Date amp Time Reset no keystroke defined l Cancel V ok 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any key combined with Command plus Shift Option or Control modifiers if desired The equivalent must use at least
289. it HTML Tools Markup gt Block Elements submenu Markup gt Inline Elements submenu Markup gt Lists gt List Markup gt Lists submenu Markup gt Tables gt Table Markup gt Tables submenu Markup gt Forms submenu Markup gt Phrase Elements submenu Markup gt Font Style Elements submenu Markup gt Frames submenu Markup gt Check gt Document Syntax Markup gt Check gt Document Links Marku gt Update gt Document Markup gt Check gt Balance Tags Markup gt Check submenu Markup gt Update submenu Markup gt Includes submenu Markup gt Utilities submenu Markup gt Misc submenu Markup gt Preview Markup gt Preview With submenu Other Palettes In addition to the main HTML Tools palette BBEdit incorporates a number of other palettes that may be useful to HTML authors First several of the pop up menus on the HTML Tools palette can be used to open floating palettes for specific tools At the bottom of the pop up menus for CSS Block Elements Inline Elements Table Forms Phrase Elements Font Style Elements and Utilities is a menu item that opens the specified menu as a palette For example choosing Inline Palette from the bottom of the Inline Elements pop up menu opens a new palette containing a button for each of the items on that menu You probably won t need to open all these sub palettes at once but they can be quite convenient to open temporarily when you are working on a particular type of element form table etc In addition to being able t
290. ith the engine via Apple Events The design of the Apple Event system makes it possible to record events into a script This feature not only lets you automate frequently performed tasks with little hassle it also can be an enormous aid in writing larger and more complicated scripts because the application tells you what events and objects to use for the kind of task you record Because of the important recording functionality they enable applications that have been factored and use Apple Events to let the two halves communicate are said to be recordable It S important to note that not all scriptable applications are recordable AppleScript Overview 221 222 Saving Scripts Any OSA script can be saved in what s called a compiled script file A compiled script file contains the actual Apple Events by generating these events when you save the file the OSA language doesn t have to convert your English like commands into events each time you run the script which means it loads faster When double clicked in the Finder a compiled script file automatically opens in the Script Editor where it can be run A script can also be saved as a stand alone application or applet in which case double clicking the script s Finder icon automatically runs the script Both types of files can be saved with or without the English like source code if you save it without the source code other users you give the script to won t be able to make any changes to
291. kers 67 Clearing Markers 68 e Using Grep to Set Markers 68 The Insert oubriebu oi oed n B eU QU ES P Idea d Pb EU ee 69 Inserting Files 69 Inserting a Folder Listing 69 e Inserting Paths 69 Inserting a Toolbox Call Template 70 Inserting a Page Break 70 Comparing PextUEI165 uode SES RR RS E ROGO aoe wes 70 Multi File Compare Options 73 Usine thepelhng CDeek8tos uu yd ve mirc eg ees a poe pide e a e e 74 Checking Spelling 74 Selecting Active Dictionaries 76 Editing the User Dictionary 76 Using an External Spelling Checker 76 43 44 Note Basic Editing BBEdit behaves like most Macintosh word processors and text editors Characters that you type in an active window appear at the insertion point a vertical blinking bar You can click and drag the mouse to select several characters or words and the selected text is highlighted in black or in a color that you choose with the Appearance control panel 900 Duma c 2 AAAA Ci G New Document This lina of text is nat selected Be untitled text E This is the selected text Hn additional Line Selected text in an inactive window appears framed in the highlight color untitled text FI Fin Ix dle fep New Document mm This lina of text is nat selected This iz the selected text Hn additional Line 4 Ye 4 If you select some text and then type whatever you type replaces the selected text To dele
292. ksheets When running on Mac OS X BBEdit 6 5 now allows you to store and execute Unix command lines by means of a Shell Worksheet There are two new commands in the New submenu in the File menu Shell Worksheet path to preferred shell and Shell Worksheet You can set the preferred shell in the Tools panel of the preferences The pop up therein lists the shells that are known to the system and which actually exist This preferred shell is listed next to the first Shell Worksheet command in the New submenu so that you know which shell will be used For situations in which you may want to use a different shell you can use the New Shell Worksheet command This command brings up a dialog box listing the available shells you can select whichever one you desire Working with Development Environments 243 Note WARNING 244 Using Worksheets To run a Unix command in a shell worksheet type the command and then press the Enter key or press Command Return Keep in mind that Enter and Return are different keys pressing Return by itself inserts a carriage return and does not execute any commands The output of the shell command will appear below the line on which you typed Enter or Command Return Unlike a terminal this does not have to be at the end of the document With worksheets you can type commands anywhere in the window or place the insertion point back on a previously executed command to run it again
293. l Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps a specific group of invisible ASCII characters also known as control characters Control characters can cause compilers and other text processing utilities to malfunction and are therefore undesirable in many files The radio buttons in the bottom part of the dialog determine how the Zap Gremlins command zaps the offending characters These options do not affect the line break characters that the Filter Line Feeds option filters Zap Null ASCII 0 Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins will zap all instances of the null character ASCII 0 If Zap Control Characters is selected this option will be enabled automatically It is included separately in case you wish to remove only nulls without affecting other control characters which may be present in a file Older versions of BBEdit were unable to perform Grep searches on files which contained nulls this limitation has been removed in BBEdit 6 5 but nulls may cause malfunctions in other external text processing programs Text Transformation 61 62 Tip Note Delete Removes the zapped character completely from the text This option is useful if you are only interested in destroying gremlins and you don t care where they were in the text Replace with Code Replaces the gremlin character with an escaped hexadecimal code The escape code is in the convention used by the C programming language and Apple s R
294. l bring it to the front When moved or resized palettes and floating windows now automatically snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing ASCII Table The ASCII Table command opens a floating window that contains the 127 entries of the ASCII character set plus all of the standard extended 8 bit Macintosh character set MacRoman The decimal value for each character is displayed in the center column while in the right hand column the character value is displayed in either hexadecimal escape format or in URL encoded format based on the language mapping of the frontmost text window Depending on the modifier keys you hold down the Insert button inserts the selected ASCII code in different formats Clicking Insert while holding Inserts in this format None Escape code appropriate to the front window e g x69 or 9669 Option Decimal value e g 105 Command Literal character e g i You can also double click on a line in the ASCII table to insert the entry into the editing window Clicking the Show button in the ASCII Table window displays the ASCII value of the character to the right of the insertion point or the first character of the selection Glossary BBEdit s powerful Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort For details on using the Glossary inclu
295. lders and indexes making these items difficult to update in the future Comment Uncomment Commenting adds comment markers lt gt around the selected text so that it is ignored by the browser It also converts any previously existing comment markers in the selection range to use double square brackets in place of lt gt and in place of to prevent older browsers from misinterpreting the comment Uncommenting removes all comment tags from the selection and converts any double bracket comments back to real HTML comments Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper or Lower Case Converts all HTML tags in the document to the desired case upper lower or normalized which is either upper or lower depending on your HTML Markup Preferences settings Misc The Misc submenu contains a motley assortment of commands that just didn t seem to fit anywhere else in our hierarchy including commands related to using BBEdit with other HTML editors Dreamweaver Choose Dreamweaver to open the current HTML document in Macromedia Dreamweaver or to return to Dreamweaver if you opened a page in BBEdit from there Document Size Displays a report about the document s size and the amount of time it will require to download at various connection speeds Index Document Generates a list of links to all the A anchor tags in the current document that have a NAME attribute providing a clickable index of all these anchors If you have
296. le is created in the MacPerl Support folder in the BBEdit Support folder On Mac OS X the output window is titled Unix Script Output and the file is created in the Unix Support folder in the BBEdit Support folder By default errors for Perl and Python scripts are displayed in an error browser errors for other languages are displayed as text in the output window Hold down the Option key while choosing Run to display the Run a Script dialog which allows you to set options that will be used when the command is executed Run a Script Selection Only C Use Debugger C Save Before Running C Run in Terminal Output to Output Options New Window U Clear Before Writing f Unix Output File U Save After Writing Hello World pl log m Cancel Selection Only Check this box to execute only the selected text in the frontmost document window Save Before Running Check this box to save the source file before running the script Output to Choose to display output in a new window to direct it to the Perl Unix Output file or to write it to a file in the Logs folder in the Perl Unix Support folder Use Debugger Check this box to run Perl scripts with Perl s debugger Run in Terminal Run in MacPerl On Mac OS X this command runs the script in a new Terminal window On Mac OS 9 it runs the script in MacPerl and brings the MacPerl application to the foreground Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Note Ch
297. les on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 color green BBEdit s CSS markup tools listed below use the same rules for formatting as does the Format command Box The Box dialog allows you to specify a selector s width and height properties as well as the properties for float clear and display Box Selector BODY F Float Default A a Clear Default A Display Default HTML Tool Descriptions 187 Border The Border dialog allows you to edit the border width border color and border style properties for a selector The first row allows you to specify values that apply to all four sides The color buttons allow you to select colors from your preferred web color palette as specified in the HTML Colors panel in the preferences window the pop up menus next to them allow you to select colors by name The icons on the left side of the dialog represent from top to bottom the entire border top right bottom and left Border Selector BODY IE C18 ES 8 Orr A A Ez f Dera A O A Ez f Oera W O A A Oera W O A A erar W Cancel Apply gt o fc fo Background Allows you to edit background image background color background repeat background position and background attachment properties The Image field allows you to select an image file by clicking the File button or by using drag and drop from the Finder Background Selector BODY f File gt A
298. les to search Quick Search Opens the Quick Search window You can use this window to interactively search for text strings as described in the previous section Find Again Uses the previous settings of the Find dialog box to search for the next occurrence of the search string Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction For example if you have set the Backwards option in the Find dialog holding down Shift while performing a Find Again will search forward in the document Find Selection Uses the selected text as the search string and finds the next occurrence of the selected text This command is the same as using the Enter Search String command followed by the Find Again command Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction just as for Find Again Hold down the Option and Command keys as you double Click on a word to search for the next occurrence of that word Enter Search Replace String Choose the Enter Search String command to enter the currently selected text into the Find dialog as the search string without opening the dialog This command does not perform a search but only sets the contents of the search string When you hold down the Option key this command becomes Enter Replace String and behaves identically except that it enters the selected text as the replace string Replace Replaces the selected text usuall
299. lied WML Glossary for examples Strips all trailing vertical white space from the entry before insertion see also the Filing and Glossary panels in the Preferences Marks place where BBEdit will place insertion point after inserting glossary entry if multiple INSERTION placeholders are used second and subsequent occurrences are replaced with e which can be used with Find Placeholder in the Find menu User name defined in the Sharing Setup or File Sharing control panel Runs the OSA script specified by name inserting the result into the glossary entry SELECT Selected text SELSTART Used to mark a range within the inserted material which and will be selected after the insertion is complete SELEND TIME Current time formatted according to your Date amp Time control panel preferences UUID Universally Unique Identifier 128 bit value guaranteed to be unique A UUID is made unique over both space and time by combining a value unique to the computer on which it was generated usually the Ethernet hardware address and a value representing the number of 100 nanosecond intervals since October 15 1582 Placeholders are not case sensitive If you want to include a literal placeholder in a Glossary entry escape the first with a backslash as in DATE 216 Chapter 12 Using the Glossary Warning Suppose you have defined the following glossary entry typedef struct select insertion Select
300. ll be available for those files This setting replaces both the lt default gt and lt no suffix gt entries presented by the suffix mapping list in previous versions Software Update This preferences panel controls the integrated version checking capability built into BBEdit 6 5 The Check Automatically checkbox controls whether BBEdit automatically looks to see if there is a new version available from Bare Bones Software Regardless of the setting of the checkbox you can always check manually by clicking the Check Now button Software Update 163 164 Note The version checking mechanism used by BBEdit protects your privacy It works by requesting information about the currently available version from Bare Bones Software s web server and does not transmit any information about you or your computer Spelling Preferences The Spelling preferences control whether BBEdit uses its built in spelling checker or an external one You can also tell the built in spelling checker which dictionaries to use Built In This option specifies that BBEdit should use the built in spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu Use Dictionaries BBEdit can use more than one dictionary for spell checking Click Add to add a new one or drag it into the list or Forget to remove the selected dictionary from the list You cannot add the User Dictionary to this list it is always assumed to be active as long as the
301. lone CSS document otherwise it will not work import UR fo to File Addressing Full Root 3 Use url Notation Relative Media a f Cancel d Apply 3 186 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Format The CSS Format command will reformat your CSS markup for easier reading In standalone CSS files if there is a selection range only the selected text is formatted If there is no selection range the whole file will be formatted In HTML files with embedded CSS if there is a selection range only the selected text will be formatted If there is no selection range BBEdit will format all CSS in the lt style gt lt style gt tag pair that encloses the insertion point If the insertion point is outside a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair or if the selection range spans a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair the formatter will simply beep When formatting CSS embedded into HTML BBEdit will indent the CSS based on the indent level of the opening lt style gt tag plus one additional tab stop for better readability There are two preference settings in the HTML Markup panel in the Preferences window which control how the CSS formatter and markup tools place the braces for block markup The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls the placement of opening braces If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green If it s off you get H1 color green The Put Simple Ru
302. ls BBEdit whether to continue with the command that was selected or to cancel the operation in which case only the script is executed Scripts attached to BBEdit menu items are stored in the Menu Scripts folder which should be inside the BBEdit Support folder These files should be compiled scripts not script applications Scripts are named to indicate which menu item they go with first the name of the menu or the submenu upon which the item is immediately located then a bullet e Option 8 character then the name of the menu item For example to attach a script to the Open From FTP Server menu item you would name it FileeOpen From FTP Server while to attach a script to the New Document menu item you would name it Newe Text Document Some of BBEdit s menus have icons rather than names BBEdit uses the following names for its icon menus Scripts MacPerl Projector ToolServer Compiler and Internet Furthermore the New With Stationery submenu is named Stationery for purposes of attachability similarly the Perl Scripts and Perl Filters menus are named Perl Scripts and Perl Filters respectively 238 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit When you choose a menu item with an attached script BBEdit runs its MenuSelect handler if it has one passing it the menu name and item name of the selected menu item as parameters If no MenuSelect function is present BBEdit executes the script s run handler The MenuSelect handler can return a
303. ls list Glossary items Glossary list Scripts Scripts list Perl Unix Filters and Scripts Perl Unix Filters and Scripts lists Stationery Stationery list To display any of BBEdit s floating palette windows use the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Contextual Menus When you control click on selected text or at the insertion point in a text window BBEdit s contextual menu provides quick access to a few relevant and frequently used commands so you don t have to hunt around in the menu bar for them Snappy Palettes When you move or resize palettes floating windows they will snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing Dialog Box Command Keys You can use command keys to click buttons or select options in most of BBEdit s dialogs Certain keys have the same meaning in all dialog boxes e Pressing either the Return or Enter key is the same as clicking the default button Typing Command Period or pressing the Escape key is the same as clicking the Cancel button e You can use the Cut Copy Paste Clear and Select All commands in any dialog box that has a text field either from the Edit menu or with their key equivalents Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit To see the other key equivalents for a dialog box hold down the Command key After a brief delay the key equivalents appear next to the buttons in the dialog
304. ltimately failing Once only subpatterns provide the means for specifying that once a portion of the pattern has matched it is not to be re evaluated in this way so the matcher would give up immediately on failing to match foo the first time The notation is another kind of special parenthesis starting with 2 as in this example gt d bar This kind of parentheses locks up the part of the pattern it contains once it has matched and a failure further into the pattern is prevented from backtracking into it Backtracking past it to previous items however works as normal In most situations such as in the example above the time saved by using once only subpatterns is insignificant a few small fractions of a second at most With some complicated grep patterns or with humongous lines of text however you can save tremendous amounts of time using once only subpatterns Once only subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns Simple cases such as the above example can be thought of as a maximizing repeat that must swallow everything it can So while both d and d are prepared to adjust the number of digits they match in order to make the rest of the pattern match gt d can only match an entire sequence of digits Once only subpatterns can be used in conjunction with lookbehind assertions to specify efficient matching at the end of a line of text Consider a simple pattern such as abcds when applied to a long lin
305. lts in a new untitled window Configure TeX Coloring Brings up a dialog box which allows you to choose whether math strings should be colored in TeX documents The factory default is for these strings not to be colored Convert to ASCII Converts all eight bit Macintosh characters in the active window to their 7 bit ASCII equivalents This plug in is useful for preparing text for an email message or for posting to an information service that doesn t handle 8 bit characters When selected from the Tools menu it opens this dialog box Convert 8 bit text to 7 bit text amp becomes B Convert Selection E becomes ss Convert Document becomes Change In Place becomes lt lt gt gt Copy to Clipboard f becomes Oj becomes o i Cancel F Convert Supplied Plug ins 267 Each pair of buttons on the left half of the dialog determines how to convert a particular 8 bit character The plug in also converts typographer s quotes and to straight quotes and The pairs of buttons in the right half of the dialog box determine what action the plug in takes You can choose to convert only the selected text if there is a selection in the active window and you can choose to place the results on the Clipboard rather than replacing the text in the window This plug in was written by Jamie McCarthy based on a prototype Prepare Usenet Posting plug in by Rich Siegel Note This plu
306. lves and even the special characters will match themselves if they are preceded by a backslash BBEdit s grep syntax coloring helps make this clear When passing grep patterns to BBEdit via AppleScript be aware that both the backslash and double quote characters have special meaning to AppleScript In order to pass these through correctly you must escape them in your script Thus to pass r for a carriage return to BBEdit you must write r in your AppleScript string Writing Search Patterns 113 114 Wildcards Match Types of Characters These special characters or metacharacters are used to match certain types of other characters Wildcard Matches any character except a line break i e a carriage return beginning of a line unless used in a character class end of line unless used in a character class Being able to specifically match text starting at the beginning or end of a line is an especially handy feature of grep For example if you wanted to find every instance of a message sent by Patrick from a log file which contains various other information like SO From Rich server barebones com To BBEdit Talk server lists barebones com From Patrick server example barebones com you could search for the pattern From Patrick and you will find every occurrence of these lines in your file or set of files if you do a multi file search instead It is important to note that and do not actually m
307. ly already know how all this works because you already use it all the time Once you have installed one or more Language Kits on your computer you will see a new menu in the menu bar This menu allows you to change keyboard layouts or script systems as you work Actually even if you have never used a non Roman script system before you may have used this menu before You can use the Keyboard control panel to tell your Mac that you frequently type in keyboard layouts other than U S English and the chosen layouts appear in the menu For example if you use the Dvorak keyboard layout you might use this menu to switch between Dvorak and OWERTY However since the Roman script is suitable for several languages choosing one of these keyboard layouts still leaves you in the Roman script If you have only the Roman script installed it is possible to turn off the menu by choosing only one layout in the Keyboard control panel However once you install additional script systems this menu will always appear even if you have chosen only one keyboard layout for use with the Roman script Using Script Systems 79 80 To start entering text in another script you simply choose it from the menu The icon for the associated script system appears in the menu bar in place of the American flag or the icon for your usual Roman keyboard layout Scripts that don t have very many characters have keyboard layouts that map each key on your keyboard to a keybo
308. m mm lt DOCTRRE HTL PUBLIC AWC OTE HAL d i EH l xHDECTYPE HIAL PUBLIC W3C DTD HIAL 4 81 EN hiipi wei wd arg TR AToS8 ADEL pem 460 19509 226 et rick oid p hktpz m i org Te 19599 SEC hb 40 159591 224 s r ick dtd his l gt hm disad acidic itlob eret E tit Lee Lous to my sibel tb e estu names generutor contents BBEdib 6 575 etu ramses generutor pontents EBEdit 6 5 gt satu le types text c52 y abel types tast csa a a import ciditional csz inport cddittenal css Bo Bo f 1 bargin iem wargins iem i f wer i zm amen font fomilyz Helwetico Sans serif j Font fumilyz elvetica sans serif line height 1 5emi l ine height 1 5847 background while backs Quis whites color 034 color 038 font size Gem flort size Bem I nb he afstyle gt q hiad head abody body zhisBBEdit Tips ond Tricks hls hisBEEdit Tips md Tricks lt hl gt xpo apr If you hove a scrolling wheel mouse try it in BEEGLE s About Boe in Pec US f you have scrolling heej mouse try it in BeEdik e About Box in loc 05 fne p gt pee dde Did wou nobice the About Box animation continues in Ehe Cock Tapp adivs divs at mou Differences Haw File LsartaderereDeietop mden tsi Hh Ks App ta Wee S P Apply bo Did Y d Ofe Airan Web Server Deseni ream kim Woeavarch ng Lines File ejas Jhon Lira 5 File nce horn Lire 5 Esra Brees in Pry beef Z9 in ld Fille indvx Hirn
309. match it with a file of the same name in the same subfolder of the second folder and so on down for all subfolders If you choose Flatten Hierarchies BBEdit considers the files in the folders as a single flat list allowing a file in one folder to match a file of the same name in the other folder regardless of whether they are in the same subfolder in both hierarchies Compare Projector States If you mark this checkbox BBEdit will flag files that have different Projector information CKID resources even if they are otherwise identical Files which differ in their Projector states are underlined in the results list Only List Text Files If this option is set BBEdit does not list non text files when comparing folders Skip Folders Set this option to skip subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses when comparing folders Use File Filter File Filters allow you to select files for comparison with great precision If either file in a compared pair matches the filter then the files are eligible for comparison if neither file matches the filter then the files won t be compared For more information on creating editing and using file filters please see Chapter 7 Searching Previous versions of BBEdit had an Only Compare if Contents field in the Find Differences Dialog This option has been superseded by the ability to apply File Filters which can perform much more powerful queries on the contents of a file Compa
310. menu to bypass the menu display the tool will perform the last used action again The second means of using the HTML Tools is from BBEdit s Markup menu This allows you to make your own choice between the drag and drop convenience of palettes and the less screen intensive menus either way you will still be able to access all of the HTML Tools capabilities Every HTML Tools function is available through an item on the Markup menu or one of its submenus Keyboard equivalents if assigned are displayed next to the menu item On Mac OS 9 you can change or assign keyboard shortcuts to menu commands by choosing Set Menu Keys from the Edit menu on Mac OS X the Set Menu Keys command is in the BBEdit menu Many tool dialogs offer keyboard shortcuts for activating buttons Hold the Command key down when a dialog is open to see these shortcuts Most of the HTML Tools commands apply to the document which you currently have in the foreground either at the current insertion point or on the current range as appropriate Some of the utility functions however can operate on many documents The Tool Descriptions section provides more details on how each function works Creating a New Document You can create an HTML document simply by taking any text file and adding HTML markup to it but there s a better way BBEdit includes a New Document command to create the basic skeleton of an HTML document for you To create a new HTML document you can
311. merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Bare Bones Software Inc be liable for any damages including lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages even if Bare Bones Software Inc is advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by you or any third party General Terms This Agreement can only be modified by a written agreement signed by you and Bare Bones Software Inc and changes from the terms and conditions of this Agreement made in any other manner will be of no effect If any portion of this Agreement shall be held invalid illegal or unenforceable the validity legality and enforceability of the remainder of the Agreement shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts without giving effect to conflict of laws provisions thereof As required by United States export regulations you shall not permit export of the program or any direct products thereof to any country to which export is then controlled by the United States Office of Export Administration unless you have that agency s prior written approval Use duplication and disclosure by the United States Government of the program or any part thereof is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision g 3 of Rights in Data General Clause in Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR 52 227 14 the Commercial Computer Software
312. mmand to check out an entire folder of files at once The Check Out Folder dialog below appears Check Out Folder ALsers admin Desktop Files Other m Options Checking Out U Report Empty Projects Latest Revisions WW verify Contents Update Existing amp Delete Obsolete Files Everything 3 Put History in CKID Cl Don t Touch Mod Date Click the pop up menu to select the folder to be checked out or drag a folder from the Finder The menu contains a list of recently used folders Report Empty Projects Check this box to have BBEdit notify you if it finds an empty project during the check out process Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is the same file displayed in the document window Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Delete Obsolete Files Check this box to have files marked as obsolete in the Projector database deleted from the folder Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the document s ckid resource If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Don t Touch Mod Date Check this box to prevent Projector from updating the files modification date to today s date Checking Out Choose which files to check out Latest Revisions fetches a copy of every file in the project which is ne
313. mplex items you are already familiar with combining patterns Remember the section at beginning of this discussion that said that each individual character is a pattern that matches itself When you search for a word you are already combining basic patterns You can combine any of the preceding grep patterns in the same way Here are some examples Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed bya 4 2 literal plus sign followed by 123445829 more digits d 4 t B C four digits followed by a tabor 2152 B C a space followed by the string B C Writing Search Patterns 119 120 Pattern Matches Examples 0 9 d an optional dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more digits 4 296 459 19 and commas followed by a 3 5 6 4 0000 period then zero or more digits 0 oops Note again in these examples how the characters that have special meaning to grep are preceded by a backslash and when we want them to match themselves Creating Subpatterns Subpatterns provide a means of organizing or grouping complex grep patterns This is primarily important for two reasons for limiting the scope of the alternation operator which otherwise creates an alternation of everything to its left and right and for changing the matched text when performing replacements A subpattern consists of any simple or complex pattern enclosed in a pair of parentheses Pattern Matches p the pattern
314. n Cancel Check Out Edit Task Comment Compare Revisions Revision History New Project Check In Folder Check Out Folder Find Lurkers Make Obsolete Remove Projector Info Open Log File none none Cmd K Cmd Y Cmd l Cmd Shift l Cmd Opt Shift none none none none Cmd U none Cmd R none none none none none none none none none none none none none none none Perl Open MacPerl Open Shuck Check Syntax Check Selection Syntax Run Run Run in MacPerl Run in Debugger Run File Export To CGI Script Droplet Runtime Find in Perl Reference View POD Perl Filters Perl Scripts Mac OS 9 only none none none none none none none none none submenu none none none none none submenu submenu Shebang Check Syntax Check Selection Syntax Run Run Run in Terminal Run in Debugger Run File Find in Reference View POD Unix Filters Unix Scripts Mac OS X only none none none none none none none none none submenu submenu Listing by Menu and Command Name 275 276 Markup Tag Maker Edit Tag Document Type Character Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements Block Elements Lists Tables Forms Inline Elements Phrase Elements Font Style Elements Frames Check Update Includes Utilities Misc
315. n a few sample files or a copy of your data first The Batch Find option has no effect on a multi file replace operation Chapter 7 Searching To do a multi file search and replace replacing all occurrences 1 Set up the find and replace strings in the Find dialog as described in the section Multi File Search 2 Choose the files to be searched as described in Specifying the Search Set 3 Click Replace All in the Find dialog box or use its key equivalent of Command Option R BBEdit displays the Find amp Replace All Matches dialog box Find amp Replace All Matches Leave Open Save to Disk S Confirm Saves Cancel WW Show Results f Proceed This is what each of the options does Replaces all occurrences of the search string This option with the replace string and Leave Open Leaves all the files open so that you can inspect the replacements If there are many files that contain the search string BBEdit may run out of memory Save to Disk Saves each file with the changes When the Confirm Saves setting is active you will have an opportunity to approve the changes before BBEdit saves them to disk You should not turn this off unless you are sure that the replace operation being done is what you want Show Results Opens a results browser listing each of the files which was changed and the number of changes in each file Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs Important In order to
316. n an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute Map Embeds a client side image map in the document You must enter a name by which the map can be referenced in the Use Map attribute of the Image tag Individual clickable areas within the image map are provided by the AREA tags inserted between the MAP and lt MAP gt tags Area Defines a clickable area within a client side image map Each clickable area requires a separate AREA tag You will need to specify the document to be loaded when the area is clicked or mark the No HREF checkbox to cause clicks in the area to be ignored along with its Target frame if the page is being used in a frameset You can choose the desired map shape rectangular circular polygonal or the default URL using the Shape pop up menu and enter the desired coordinates of the shape in a comma separated list in the Coords field For rectangles this is in the order left top right bottom for circles it is in the order X Y radius For polygons this should be a comma separated list of coordinates in X Y form You can also set the tab index of the field for keyboard control on browsers that support it JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers are also supported
317. n the Editor Defaults page of the Preferences this sets the default for new windows 242 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note new in 6 5 Working with Development Environments Once you have set up BBEdit for the development environments you plan to use the development tools communicate with BBEdit to report errors and changes in files You use the commands in the appropriate menu the Compiler menu the ToolServer menu or the Camel Shebang menu to send instructions to the development environment To switch to a development environment or to launch it if it s not running choose it from the appropriate menu When you choose the Compile command or any other command that causes files in the project to be recompiled the development environment temporarily becomes the active application If there are any compilation errors BBEdit creates a Compile Errors browser that you can use to examine the errors Switching Between Source and Header Files When you edit a C or C source file you can press Command Tab or Control Tab to switch to the corresponding header file and vice versa BBEdit uses the information in the Languages page of the Preferences window to determine whether a file is a source or header file The Application Switcher control panel or the Dock on Mac OS X will intercept Command Tab keystrokes by default Because of this you can also use Control Tab to switch between source and header files Shell Wor
318. n the Glossary panel of the Preferences BBEdit will select a glossary set to use with the top document window according to the following rules e If there is a glossary set whose name ends in the same suffix as the document that set will be activated e If there is a glossary set with the same language mapping as the current document as determined from the Languages mappings in the Preferences that set will be activated e If there are multiple glossary sets with the same language mapping e g HTML Glossary html and HTML Glossary shtml then the glossary set which appears first on the Set pop up will be activated You can control the order in which glossary sets appear as described below in Manually Sorting the Glossary These selection rules are intended to provide you the greatest possible amount of flexibility while automatically doing the right thing as often as possible Manually Sorting the Glossary By default items in the Glossary are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want
319. n the included file is processed so that not all instances of the included file are exactly the same Variables are essentially placeholders that you make up yourself Some possible uses are to insert names taglines alt strings for images or filenames for files other than the current document into documents A variable name consists of a string of alphanumeric characters enclosed in number signs the character Spaces are not allowed in variable names but underscores may be used to represent word breaks Variables can be placed anywhere in an include file just like placeholders When you include that file in a document you specify the variable names and values with it Consider an include file named footer html which contains the following HR IMG SRC MY_GRAPHIC ALT MY_ALT_DESC gt lt H1 gt MY_TITLE lt H1 gt lt BIG gt This document copyleft 1998 2001 by Sid Zookim lt BIG gt Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files In your document the Include reference would look like this BODY lt bbinclude footer html MY_GRAPHIC testl gif MY_ALT_DESC a test image MY_TITLE A Test Title lt end bbinclude gt BODY Note that the values of placeholders are specified inside the HTML comment of a persistent include using a PLACEHOLDER Value syntax The quote marks around the value are mandatory if you need to include a quote mark in the actual value e
320. n you maintain Web site content on your local hard drive and only need to upload changes made in one or two files to the server Opening From and Saving to FTP Servers 33 new in 6 5 34 FIP Browsers BBEdit now offers FTP Browser windows To open an FIP Browser choose New FTP Browser from the New submenu of the File menu eos FTP Browser 1 Bookmarks fe about m company html p Goho g Be site htm f Delete Rl Show Document loons F3 Show Files Starting wath FTP Browsers enable you to maintain an open connection to an FIP server Enter your server address user name and password or choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks menu The buttons and pop up menus work the same as those in the Save to FTP Server and Open from FTP Server dialogs To open a file double click it or select it and click the Open button For editing purposes files opened from an FTP Browser behave exactly like those opened via the Open from FTP Server command To refresh the contents of the listing click the button in the lower right with the circular arrow icon You can double click a folder to change directories If you hold down the Option key when opening a folder it will open in a new FIP Browser window You can select a range of files and directories by Shift clicking and you can select and de select multiple items one at a time by Command clicking Using Stationery Like most modern Macintosh programs BBEdit supports stationery pads
321. nd augment these movements with Command and Option No Modifier Option Command Control Up Up one line Up one screen Start of scroll view up document Down Down one line Down one screen End of document scroll view down Left Left one character Left one word Start of line scroll view left Right Right one Right one word End of line scroll view right character Holding down the Shift key extends the selection For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point If you are used to a word processor or text editor that uses Command key combinations to page through your document you may want to swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu to open the BBEdit Preferences window 2 Select the Text Editing panel in the list at the left edge of the dialog 3 Under the heading Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior when Moving select either the Horizontal Vertical or both settings as you prefer When active these settings will change the sense of the up and down arrow keys as follows No Modifier Option Command Up Up one line Start of document Up one screen Down Down one line End of document Down one screen Left Left one Start of line Left one word character Right Right one End of line Right one word character When the Shift key is held down the arrow keys behave as described in the table above except that the selection range is extende
322. nd on the Edit menu Markers This pop up menu lets you define and locate named markers in a document File Options This pop up menu lets you save your file and set end of line and other compatibility options Insert Menu The Insert pop up menu lets you insert the contents of another text file or a toolbox call template into the current document File Path The File Path displays the folder structure that contains the file being edited You can choose any folder from this menu to open it in the Finder Status Bar Preferences 167 168 ET a Note Get Info Icon Click this icon to display the Info window which contains the file s path along with character word line and page counts for the file and the selection Super Get Info Icon Click this icon to ask Super Get Info to display file information pertaining to the current document This option is only available if you are running on Mac OS X and have Super Get Info installed on your system Document Icon The Document Icon serves as a proxy for the document file You can click the icon to reveal the current file in the Finder or drag it anywhere the original file can be dragged Show All Hide All Shows or hides all the icons on the document status bar Button Puffiness On Mac OS 9 you can choose the degree of the 3D effect used on the status bar buttons from minimal to excessive These options have no effect in Mac OS X and are therefore disabled
323. ndo any changes you have made to the filter Hold the Option key when you click Revert to skip the confirmation alert Temporary Filters Select current criteria from the pop up menu in the Find dialog to reuse the last set of criteria applied either from using a saved filter or from using the Edit button to define criteria Thus you can use filter criteria on the fly without the need to create and store a throwaway filter Editing and Deleting Filters To edit a file filter you have already defined choose it from the Filters pop up menu change it as desired and click Save Since each filter must have a unique name saving it will replace the old version of the filter To delete a filter entirely visit the File Filters panel in the Preferences window You can also create or modify filters there Multi File Replacing If you want to replace only some occurrences of text in multiple files you can simply do a File by File or Batch Search as described earlier in this chapter then use the Replace commands on the Find menu to change only the instances you want to change However BBEdit can also change all occurrences of a string in a group of files with one command Globally replacing text in more than one file works the same as replacing it in a single file The only possible complication is that if you make a mistake it can have much wider consequences If you are not sure what effect a replace operation will have test it out o
324. ndow based at that folder If you place other types of documents in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit If you wish you may place the actual Startup Items folder in any convenient location create an alias to it and place the resulting alias in the BBEdit Support folder Be sure to name the alias Startup Items so that BBEdit can locate it Memory Considerations On Mac OS 8 6 and 9 BBEdit uses system memory often referred to as temporary memory for documents and for most editing operations so that you can open large files without having to increase BBEdit s memory partition If you have a large document open you may not be able to launch other applications until you close it You should generally increase BBEdit s memory partition only if you use third party plug ins which require more memory to load These operations all use memory in BBEdit s application partition A good starting point would be to add 500K to BBEdit s Preferred memory size and ordinarily you should never need to add more than 1000K Mac OS X deals with memory very differently than do previous versions of the Mac OS On Mac OS X you no longer need to set memory partitions on a per application basis Chapter 3 Working with
325. needs of a majority of our customers it would be necessary to replicate much of the functionality presently provided by existing visual HTML editors Please note that if you have Table Builder from a previous version of BBEdit you can still use it to prepare tables for use in BBEdit 6 5 Create and edit a table in Table Builder then use the Copy HTML command from its Edit menu and paste the resulting markup into the desired part of your HTML document in BBEdit BBEdit Table Builder 17 18 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Files This chapter discusses how to use BBEdit to manipulate text files In this chapter Launching BRE CIty sei 235 eot tind sow ewes Sb Ea pasan ul elec hs 19 Startup Items 20 Memory Consideran cs Sade i pra foem dee Rate e tea fer e PA 20 Creaume and Savine Documents 20 d xD edd RP C EE 21 Save As Options 23 File Saving Options 23 Long File Names 25 Saving with Authentication 25 Opening Existing Documents ss sss rineto staerd kiismeri SR PE ERES 26 Opening Multi Byte Documents 26 Using the Open Command 27 Using the Open Hidden Command 29 Using the Open Recent Command 29 Opening Several Files at Once 29 Using the Open Selection Command 29 Opening From and Saving to FTP Servers 0 04 6 cee we E eae ine e s 31 PEP BrOWSClS 5339 8 ck DUM que qub R Soros Bane PE UP oe Weed wa Sou ee 34 Usine SEATON CY POP 34 Using Ple GEOUDSS V soo
326. ng modifiers during launch to override these actions Modifier s Function Option Suppress startup items only Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items State Preferences The State preferences control how BBEdit reads and writes state information in text files Honor Saved State When this option is selected BBEdit honors state information that may be stored in a file The following sub options let you fine tune which state information BBEdit honors Window Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the window of the document to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise BBEdit opens the window in its default position Font Settings When this option is selected BBEdit restores the font information stored with a document Otherwise it uses the default font settings Selection Range When this option is selected BBEdit restores the insertion point or selection range to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise the insertion point is at the beginning of the file Scrollbar Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the scroll bar position to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise BBEdit opens the file with the top of the file showing Option Settings When selected BBEdit reads document specific options such as soft wrap show invisibles and line numbering from the saved state information State Preferences 165
327. ns the same type of search pattern used by BBEdit For this reason you will often see regular expressions called grep patterns as BBEdit does They re the same thing Recommended Books and Resources Mastering Regular Expressions by Jeffrey E F Friedl O Reilly amp Associates 1997 ISBN 1 56592 257 3 Although it does not cover BBEdit s grep features specifically Mastering Regular Expressions is an outstanding resource for learning the how to of writing useful grep patterns Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Tech Note new in 6 5 Note BBEdit Talk The BBEdit Talk online mailing list covers a wide range of topics and questions about using BBEdit which frequently include searching and the use of grep patterns To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our Web site which offers the option to sign up http www barebones com support lists html BBEdit s grep engine is based on the PCRE library package which is open source software written by Philip Hazel and copyright by the University of Cambridge England For details see lt ftp ftp csx cam ac uk pub software programming pcre gt Writing Search Patterns This section explains how to create search patterns using BBEdit 6 5 s grep syntax For readers with prior experience this is essentially like the syntax used for regular expressions in the Perl programming language However you do not need to understand anything about Perl in order to make
328. ns on imsx Turn all four options off i msx Turn i on turn m s and x off The scope of these option changes depends on where in the pattern the setting occurs For settings that are outside any subpattern the effect is the same as if the options were set or unset at the start of matching The following patterns all behave in exactly the same way i abc a i bc ab i c abc i In other words all four of the above patterns will match without regard to case Such top level settings apply to the whole pattern unless there are other changes inside subpatterns If there is more than one setting of the same option at the top level the right most setting is used If an option change occurs inside a subpattern the effect is different An option change inside a subpattern affects only that part of the subpattern that follows it so if the Case Sensitive checkbox is turned on Search for a i b c Will match abc or aBc and won t match anything else But if Case Sensitive is turned off the i in the above pattern is superfluous and has no effect By this means options can be made to have different settings in different parts of the pattern Any changes made in one alternative do carry on into subsequent branches within the same subpattern For example Search for a i b c matches ab aB c and C even though when matching C the first branch is abandoned before t
329. nt to match a run of digits of any length followed by either is odd or is even depending on whether the matched digits end with an odd or even digit d lt 13579 is odd is even Advanced Grep Topics 137 138 This pattern starts with d to match the digits Next comes a conditional subpattern with a positive lookbehind assertion as the condition to be satisfied The lookbehind assertion is true only if the last character matched by d was also in the character class 13579 If that s true then we next try to match is odd if it isn t we try to match is even Thus this pattern will match 123 is odd 8 is even etc but will not match 9 is even or 144 is odd Once Only Subpatterns With both maximizing greedy and minimizing non greedy repetition failure of what follows normally causes the repeated item to be reevaluated to see if a different number of repeats allows the rest of the pattern to match Sometimes it is useful to prevent this either to change the nature of the match or to cause it to fail earlier than it otherwise might when the author of the pattern knows there is no point in carrying on Consider for example the pattern d foo when matching against the text 123456bar After matching all 6 digits and then failing to match foo the normal action of the grep engine is to try again with only 5 digits matching the d item and then with 4 and so on before u
330. nting Options command in the Edit menu lets you further specify how BBEdit prints your documents You can set the defaults for most of these options in the Printing panel of the Preferences When creating a new document or opening a text document which doesn t have BBEdit saved state or with the Printing Settings switch turned off in the State preferences BBEdit will obtain the print options for the document from the preferences just before printing Thus for these types of documents you can use the Printing preferences to control behavior globally instead of having to change print settings on a per document basis Note that if you change the options in the Print dialog the document settings will be divorced from the preferences You can also open this dialog box by using the Options button in the main print dialog box Printing Options 1 Print Backwards C Print Full Pathname U Frame Printing Area Time Stamp zil Print Page Headers O Date Last Saved 1 Print Line Numbers Date of Printing U Print Two Up O 1 Inch Gutter C Print Rubber Stamp Text Confidential Font Helvetica m Fz 3 l Cancel d OK Print Backwards When this option is selected BBEdit prints documents last page first This option is useful if you are printing to a printer like the original LaserWriter that does not arrange pages in the proper order Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a frame around the printed te
331. nts BBEdit will automatically recognize and appropriately handle those files which contain appropriate font information If a file meets any of the following criteria e it starts with a UTF 16 Unicode byte order mark e it starts with a UTF 8 byte order mark e it contains a styl resource which indicates a font that maps to a multi byte script e it contains an MPW state resource which indicates a font that maps to a multi byte script then BBEdit will treat it as a multi byte file 26 Chapter 3 Working with Files Note If no font information is available BBEdit will assume the file content is MacRoman and display it accordingly In order to correct this once the file is open change the display font to one appropriate for the contents and BBEdit will perform the required conversion Changing BBEdit s default font to a non Roman font does not affect this behavior For more details please see Chapter 5 If a font change results in a document s contents being converted from a single byte script to a multi byte script BBEdit will mark the document as being dirty or changed Using the Open Command To open a file with the Open command 1 Choose Open from the File menu BBEdit displays the Open dialog box On Mac OS X Open BBEdit Show All Available m From L Documents m T CGI Executables i index html Documents W Translate Line Breaks Read As auto detect m Go to Add to Favorites Can
332. o coe eels Matas ee os Bs ee eae NU doc 35 Creating a File Group 35 Using File Groups 36 Removing Files from a File Group 37 Making Back psz s r 66 eb Ane O3 ue RO Ar Gee ORR Aa he RICO abe i 37 Automatic Backups 38 e Manual Backups 38 Boia Ooh e eru erba SP OO es d d ena es RES epe Ege 39 Options Available from Print Dialog 40 The Printing Options Command 41 Launching BBEdit To launch BBEdit double click the BBEdit application icon or a BBEdit document Holding down the following keys at launch has the indicated effects overriding any options set in the Startup panel of the Preferences When one of these keys is held down BBEdit will beep after it finishes launching Modifier s Function Option Suppress startup items only Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items 19 20 Note Startup Items When launched BBEdit will look for a folder named Startup Items in the BBEdit Support folder which is in the same folder as the application If this folder is found BBEdit will open any documents it finds in that folder If the file is one BBEdit knows how to open such as a text file or file group BBEdit will open a document window appropriate for the file If you place a compiled OSA AppleScript or any other OSA compliant scripting language script in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser wi
333. o it your recorded script will faithfully make the same mistake and undo it when you run it later It will be possible to fix minor errors later but things always go more smoothly if you don t make any mistakes so take your time and try to do it right the first time Now switch back to the Script Editor and click the Stop button After a brief pause your script is compiled and ready for use Try clicking the Run button to see it work It might not work correctly If you recorded a search and replace operation changing every cat to dog you already changed the document while recording the script and of course the script won t do anything when you run it Next let s save the script in the BBEdit Scripts folder so it shows up in BBEdit s script menu Choose Save As from the File menu then use the Script Editor s Save dialog to put the script in your BBEdit Scripts folder Now try selecting it from the script menu in BBEdit BBEdit and AppleScript 225 226 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary To display an application s AppleScript dictionary you can simply drag that application onto the Script Editor icon or use the Script Editor s Open Dictionary command As we noted earlier all scriptable applications include a dictionary that tells AppleScript how to convert English like commands into the Apple Events actually expected by the application The Script Editor uses this same information to display a sort of vocabulary guide that help
334. o means that for Perl the same scripts and filters will work on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Camel Shebang Menu The commands in this menu are also available in a floating tool palette called Perl Tools on Mac OS 9 and Unix Tools on Mac OS X In either case the palette is accessible via the Palettes submenu of the Window menu o Wene Fired in Reference View POD Perl Python and Shell Scripting 247 248 Open MacPerl Available only on Mac OS 9 this command locates and launches the MacPerl application At the first launch the MacPerl application is located by its creator type If you have more than one copy of MacPerl installed this will usually find the version with the most recent modification date If you prefer to use a different version of MacPerl simply launch that copy of MacPerl yourself via the Finder If you hold down the Option key this command changes to Open Shuck and selecting it will launch Shuck MacPerl s helper application for viewing POD documentation files Check Syntax Checks the syntax for the frontmost window Errors are displayed in a standard BBEdit error browser see Chapter 9 Browsers for more details on working with error browsers This command is only available for Perl scripts Run Runs the script in the frontmost window by default Any output from the script is displayed in a new BBEdit window On Mac OS 9 this output window is titled Perl Output and the fi
335. o open them from the main HTML Tools palette each palette can also be accessed from the Palettes sub menu in the Window menu Two other palettes are also of particular interest to Web authors the HTML Entities palette and the Web Safe Colors palette HTML Entities In HTML extended characters must be encoded as entities since different computers define the extended ASCII characters differently The HTML Entities floating window lists these entities Q HTML Entities 2 Method Name B Dec Entity Char 34 amp quot 38 amp amp amp 60 Alt x 62 amp gt gt 192 amp Agrave A 183 amp Aarcute A 184 Acic A 195 amp Atilde A 186 amp Auml A 197 amp Aring A 7 Entities can be inserted by name amp copy is the copyright symbol or number amp 169 for by choosing the desired method from the small pop up menu at the top of the HTML Entities palette We suggest inserting entities by name since they are more readable unless browser compatibility requires use of the decimal versions Double click an entity name to insert it into the active document or click once to select the desired entity then click Insert The list of entities presented in the HTML Entities floating palette is now sortable by decimal value name case insensitive so amp ecaute and amp Eacute are grouped together or character sorted by the character position after all diacriticals have been stripped so that all
336. object now always refer to the hard start and end of lines In other words if a text object crosses multiple soft wrapped lines the startLine and endLine properties will be the same The new startDisplayLine and endDisplayLine properties have been added to the text object class and they provide the startLine and endLine semantics for soft wrapped views from previous versions of BBEdit Documents vs Windows In previous versions of BBEdit the object classes document and window could be used interchangeably and generally had the same properties listed in the scripting dictionary This is no longer the case and this constitutes one of the biggest differences between BBEdit 6 5 and pre 6 0 versions of BBEdit The class window now corresponds to a window on screen and thus the properties of the window class now refer strictly to properties of a window on screen If a document is associated with a window then the document is accessed as the document property of the window document of window 1 The class document now refers to a document and as with a window the document s properties pertain strictly to the condition of a document i e something that can be saved to disk and opened later Note that this does not mean a document must be saved to a file only that it could be As a rule documents and windows are associated with each other but it s important to remember that there is not a one to one correspondence between windows
337. of editing text with BBEdit wrapping text text manipulations and file comparison In this chapter basic Editing au oe ode bee oe dau E anes ee qa e eda qi bes Sind 44 Moving text 45 Multiple Clipboards 45 e Drag and Drop 46 e Multiple UTridO 34 395 953 095 ete ts Ma aic 906 lab Lug Guia a d E UO a dus 46 Window ANION s eniro m EU a onte ette oce aor bw usce Erde tb dol Redeem d 46 The Status Bar 47 The Function Pop Up Menu 49 e The Split Bar 49 Cursor Movement and Text Selection vs ed See ae ROC EUR en 50 Clicking 50 Arrow Keys 51 Scrolling the View 52 e The Delete Key 52 The Numeric Keypad 53 e Go To Line Command 53 Function Keys 54 jii DUONG TEUER 54 Editing Options 55 Display Options 56 FOMO TADS 16 td soe rwr eo a ae E A ee Sed Sie ere brad abs 57 Text TrarisfOFRA NON iiie am aor X ies sae E TAS deter Ue do d as eee pene 58 Balance 58 e Exchange Characters 58 Change Case 59 e Shift Left and Shift Right 59 Add Line Breaks 60 Remove Line Breaks 60 Rewrap Quoted Text 60 e Increase and Decrease Quote Level 60 Strip Quotes 60 e Hard Wrap 60 Zap Gremlins 61 e Entab 62 Detab 62 Resolve URL 62 How BBEdit Wraps TexEia 9e hr oko oe ae es A eee ew dis 63 Soft Wrapping 64 Hard Wrapping 64 The Mark Submenu 65 evecaue N vanPR EX e ues Ich ac e eee Sts dac 67 Setting Mar
338. olServer is the MPW back end the part of MPW that runs scripts and MPW tools without any of the MPW editing capabilities ToolServer is an excellent way to use MPW tools without having to use MPW itself This section tells you how to use ToolServer with BBEdit To learn about ToolServer and the MPW tools see the documentation that comes with ToolServer ToolServer support is not available on Mac OS X Special Files To communicate with ToolServer BBEdit uses a few custom scripts and tools For details on installing these items see Chapter 2 BBEditStartup This script establishes the link between BBEdit and ToolServer and runs whenever you start ToolServer from BBEdit It also executes any scripts in the same folder as ToolServer whose names begin with BBEditStartup This is similar to the MPW s UserStartup functionality You should not need to modify this script If you need to customize the startup process create a BBEditStartupe file BBEditShutDown This script breaks the link between BBEdit and ToolServer and runs whenever you turn off ToolServer or quit BBEdit while ToolServer is running It also executes any BBEditShutDown files You should not modify this script If you need to customize shutting down create a BBEditShutdowne file BBEditStartup 411 The use of MPW 411 is no longer supported File and Line Commands To enhance its support of ToolServer BBEdit also comes with customized versions of the File and Line c
339. om the Finder into a BBEdit editing window to insert a folder listing Inserting Paths The Insert File Path and Insert Folder Path commands respectively insert the full path information for a selected file or the full path information for the contents of the selected folder hierarchy into the document you are editing When you use these commands BBEdit opens a directory dialog box that lets you select the file or folder to obtain path information for BBEdit inserts the path information at the insertion point or replaces the selected text The Insert Submenu 69 70 Tip Tip Note Inserting a Toolbox Call Template To paste a call template for a Toolbox function from THINK Reference select the function s name and choose Toolbox Call Template from the Insert submenu in the Edit menu BBEdit launches THINK Reference if necessary and replaces the selected text with a call template for the function If there is no selection when you choose the Toolbox Call Template command BBEdit prompts you for the name of a function and inserts its call template at the insertion point You can also use the Toolbox Call Template command on the Insert pop up menu left in the status bar to insert a Toolbox call template Inserting a Page Break To insert a page break choose the Page Break command from the Insert submenu in the Edit menu This will place a form feed character ASCII 12 at the location of the insertion point BBEdit uses this ch
340. ommands Within ToolServer File and Line are not ordinarily available but with these scripts you can use File and Line from within BBEdit These commands are particularly handy to have when working with compiler error output RBBEdit This tool is essential for ToolServer to work with BBEdit Without this tool none of BBEdit s ToolServer support will work correctly You should copy this tool to the Tools folder which is in the same directory as ToolServer and as MPW if it s installed Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools new in 6 5 new in 6 5 Using ToolServer After you have installed all the files that BBEdit needs to support ToolServer use the Start ToolServer command in the ToolServer menu left When ToolServer is running the command changes to Stop ToolServer To stop ToolServer choose this command again After opening ToolServer BBEdit opens the ToolServer Worksheet In this window you can type MPW shell commands just as you would with the MPW Shell You can also open the Worksheet from the ToolServer menu To send a command to ToolServer place the insertion point anywhere on the line and press Return or choose the Send Command command from the ToolServer menu You can also use Send Command in any BBEdit document window to send the current line to ToolServer In either case the results appear in the ToolServer Worksheet There is now a ToolServer Worksheet command on the ToolServer menu this command is useful
341. ommands in the Window menu These commands let you arrange and access editing and browser windows quickly and also to access BBEdit s extensive set of tool palettes and floating windows In this chapter MUS OW MOBILE thesia Eod eod rack tube ee aks eo a iet aea e Rea ed 83 Mime VV IHIOW 3r queam Sco Seis o oer acit OR arce acr pac Eb dare es 83 Brine All to PEORUS 4 S c ola dle aces SUR eth qn pieta e d ipcbtics Sa RUE Rupe NUR 84 Palettess sos aee c qct ar PIER DO qe adbuc pd qr a ee b qutd 84 ASCII Table 84 Glossary 84 Plug In Tools 85 Scripts 85 Stationery 85 Windows 85 HTML Markup Tools 86 Perl Unix Tools Filters and Scripts 86 JNEEOTIB Os oo red P aubsce C d ra bu qoesca fuk qe Ee o ipae Sue ad s 87 EIS ra LO ONE EUR A E ETT RED ai fine eis a Plata Sur aire AOI aap easel ts 88 Super CIE lilo eeu Satie eat POSSE Lae OR O0 Sees wee a ar ae dod 88 Reveal in Findik s a4 ud p dd ace Ie RED eb 89 FSO se a cence ashes wh a nu hei eg a aii secs a Dl Sah a a ede we Bake alee 89 Window INGNIOS a 229 D IOS RCRHEC AEO AURATA eo UE EN 89 Window Menu The Window menu has been reorganized to provide easy centralized access to all of BBEdit s tool palettes and floating windows in addition to offering commands which you can use to access and organize editing and results windows on screen BBEdit also offers several preference options in the Applications panel of the Preferences dialog so that you
342. on Meaning Cluster only parentheses no capturing Comment discard all text between the parens imsx imsx Enable disable pattern modifiers imsx imsx Cluster only parens with modifiers 25 Positive lookahead assertion Q Negative lookahead assertion lt Positive lookbehind assertion lt Negative lookbehind assertion CO Ls Match with if then else 20 Match with if then Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Extension Meaning Match non backtracking subpattern once only R Recursive pattern Comments The sequence marks the start of a comment which continues up to the next closing parenthesis Nested parentheses are not permitted The characters that make up a comment play no part in the pattern matching at all Search for foo Hello this is a comment bar Will match foobar Pattern Modifiers The settings for case sensitivity multi line matching whether the dot character can match returns and extended syntax can be turned on and off within a pattern by including sequences of letters between and Modifier Meaning Default i case insensitive according to Case Sensitive checkbox in Find dialog m allow and to match at r on S allow to match r off x ignore most whitespace and allow off inline comments in grep patterns i By default BBEdit obeys the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find dialog or the corresponding property of the search
343. on point will move down three lines There is no visual feedback as you type the number and no way to backspace or otherwise edit the number If you make a mistake the best you can do is type Ctl G keyboard quit and start over Appendix B Editing Shortcuts APPENDIX Note Placeholders and Include Files This Appendix is a reference which lists the placeholder tokens used by BBEdit templates and include files and describes the use and capabilities of include files In this appendix PiceHolclefSu ir ue x ci ae eee Cee a dea Ra p tpa dg d 287 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 290 IRV PULL Elle Eau dono o a dede ome erts a Rus Ius ies sae D die aoe dahon Sones eas XE ewe a 291 Simple Includes 291 Persistent Includes 291 Include Files with Variables 292 Including AppleScripts 293 Including Perl Scripts 294 Other Include Notes 295 Placeholders Placeholders are processed under the following circumstances e When a new HTML document is created from a template the placeholders in the template are replaced with their current values The new document receives the substituted text the original template file is not modified When the Update Document command part of the HTML Tools is invoked any placeholders in the documents being updated are replaced with their current values Since the placeholders are replaced subsequent updates do not update the substituted text Although t
344. onsists only of folders which can be handy for navigating and searching project roots without worrying about keeping in sync with the folders contents Once you have added items to a file group you can save it to disk for later use Using File Groups To open a file in a file group double click it or select it and click the Open button If the file is a BBEdit document BBEdit opens it If it s a folder it s opened in a disk browser If it s an FTP URL clipping BBEdit will open the remote file or open an FTP Browser if the clipping points to a directory Otherwise BBEdit tells the Finder to open the file When opening a file group converted from BBEdit 5 x format BBEdit will mark the file group document dirty in need of saving and alerts you to this You will thus be prompted to save the file group when closing it even if you have not made changes to it If you added nested folders they appear in the File Group with disclosure triangles as in a Finder list view Click the triangle to reveal the files and folders inside that folder You can use a file group as the basis of a multi file search See Chapter 7 Searching for more information Items in file groups display the Projector status of the individual file just to the left of the file s icon Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Note Note Note Removing Files from a File Group To remove a file from a file group drag it from the file group into the Trash
345. ontrol how the text appears in the window The Mark pop up menu contains commands such as Set Marker and Find amp Mark that let you set or mark specific locations in the file when present these marked locations will be listed on the pop up menu below the commands The File pop up menu contains commands that let you save the document set line break options specify what state information is saved and set Unicode file options if applicable The Insert pop up menu contains commands that let you insert the contents of files folder listings and page breaks The Path pop up menu displays the list of folders that contain the document You can use this pop up menu to open any of the folders along the path in the Finder For files which contain Projector state information the Projector button displays a dialog box that shows the path to the current document as well as its revision status If a file does not contain such information this button will not be displayed The Info button displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words lines and pages in the document Clicking this button is the same as choosing the Get Info command from the Windows menu The Super Get Info button asks Super Get Info to display information regarding the current document This button is only available if you are running on Mac OS X and have Super Get Info installed on your computer Super Get Info is a Mac OS X file info utility from Bare
346. or htm or any of the other file suffixes mapped to HTML in the Languages panel of the preferences If there is no such entry the active glossary set is unchanged HTML Colors Preferences The HTML Colors Preferences let you choose the appearance of the Web Safe Colors palette Chapter 10 Preferences new in 6 5 new in 6 5 Color Palette Layout You can choose from four layouts 36x6 a horizontal layout 6x36 a vertical layout and two different VisiBone layouts which organizes the colors in a sort of circular layout that places similar colors close together VisiBone 2 is a newer more compact representation Color Swatch Size You can choose the size of the swatches to be displayed in the palette The default is Small Color Picker The Color Picker option allows you to choose whether the color swatch buttons in various HTML dialogs use BBEdit s web safe pop up menu the factory default and consistent with previous versions or whether clicking on the swatch brings up the standard Mac OS color picker dialog Holding down the Option key on your keyboard while clicking on the swatch reverses the sense of the preference HTML Markup Preferences This panel lets you choose the format of tags generated by BBEdit s HTML tools HTML Tags You can choose to generate uppercase or lowercase HTML tags or to obtain this setting from a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile You can choose a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile to u
347. or the global status bar preference and you can use the Text Options dialog to show and hide the status bar on a per window basis The icons on the status bar are indicators buttons and pop up menus that give you quick access to commonly used functions The following table explains each icon Icon Meaning A solid diamond indicates the document has been modified A hollow diamond means only the state of the document window position selection range scrolling position etc has changed Window Anatomy 47 48 P Meaning The pencil icon indicates that the document can be modified If the encil has a slash across it the document cannot be modified ecause the file is read only the disk is locked or the file is part of a source control system project such as Projector or CVS and is checked out If the file is not on a locked disk you can click the pencil icon to toggle the document s editability The Function pop up menu gives quick access to routines and functions in languages that BBEdit can parse In HTML documents this menu lists the contents of the TITLE tag if any all named anchors in your document i e those defined with lt A NAME gt all level 1 6 headings any tags which have ID attributes and any BBmark indicators as well as all BBEdit include files referenced by the document The Text Options pop up menu contains commands such as Soft Wrap Text and Show Invisibles that let you c
348. ortant Third Party Plug ins In addition to the standard plug ins described above a wide variety of BBEdit plug ins are available from third parties Finding more plug ins An extensive though not exhaustive listing of plug ins in the support section of the Bare Bones Software web site http www barebones com support plugins html Plug in compatibility Any third party plug in which does not present a floating palette and does not explicitly include support for multi byte text will be disabled if the front document window contains multi byte or Unicode text However BBEdit cannot determine whether plug ins that do present floating palettes are capable of safely processing multi byte text and will not disable them so you should exercise caution when using such plug ins on multi byte text It is unlikely that you will crash the program but your text may be corrupted or scrambled Mac OS X Plug ins When running on Mac OS X you will not be able to use any third party plug ins which have not been updated to support BBEdit 6 1 or later versions Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Bare Bones web site for more information on the availability of updated plug ins 270 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins APPENDIX Command Reference This section is a quick reference for key assignments and a comprehensive list of the commands that are available from BBEdit s user interface In this appendix ASNE KeyBisa eu q
349. os soe dos e Scip qos Gira dox See eee dn 271 Listing by Menu and Command Name 0 0 e eee eee 272 Lis ng by Default Key Equivalents 24 66 hber Ie t RE s 279 Assigning Keys You can assign your own keyboard shortcuts to BBEdit s menu commands by choosing Set Menu Keys from the Edit menu The Set Keys dialog below appears Set Menu Keys BBEdit File Edit Text Search Find Quick Search Find Again Find Again reverse Find Selection Find Selection reverse Enter Search String Enter Replace String Replace Replace All Replace amp Find Again Find in Next File Open All Matches Find amp Replace All Matches l Reset All Clear Set U To set the key assignment for a menu command find it in the Set Keys dialog click the Set button and type the desired keystroke To remove the key assignment from the selected menu command click the Clear button instead Click Reset All to restore all key assignments to BBEdit s defaults 271 Listing by Menu and Command Name Apple Menu About BBEdit BBEdit Menu About BBEdit Preferences Set Menu Keys Services Hide BBEdit Hide Others Show All Quit BBEdit File New New With Stationery Open Open from FTP Server Open Selection Open File by Name Reveal Selection Open Recent Close Close All Close amp Delete Save Save All Save As Save As Selection Save to FTP Server Save
350. ot always Suppose for instance that you want to match an HTML tag At first you may think that a good way to do this would be to search for the pattern T consisting of a less than sign followed by one or more occurrences of a single character followed by a greater than sign To understand why this may not work the way you think it should consider the following sample text to be searched lt B gt This text is in boldface lt B gt The intent was to write a pattern that would match both of the HTML tags separately Let s see what actually happens The lt character at the beginning of this line matches the beginning of the pattern The next character in the pattern is which matches any character except a line break modified with the quantifier taken together this combination means one or more repetitions of any character That of course takes care of the B The problem is that the next gt is also any character and that it also qualifies as one or more repetitions In fact all of the text up to the end of the line qualifies as one or more repetitions of any character the line break doesn t qualify so grep stops there After grep has reached the line break it has exhausted the operator so it backs up and sees if it can find a match for gt Lo and behold it can the last character is a greater than symbol Success In other words the pattern matches our entire sample line at once not the
351. ot of the Perl programming language and also the Finder icon for the MacPerl application Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X When running on Mac OS X BBEdit works with the native Unix Perl tool Starting with version 6 5 BBEdit now supports similar integration with Python shell scripts and any other Unix scripting language The default Mac OS X installation includes Perl and several Unix shells including tcsh and zsh Python however is not installed by default See the Python web site for download links and installation instructions Note that for integration with BBEdit you will need the Unix flavored version of Python for Mac OS X not the Carbonized version of MacPython http www python org Perl Python and Shell Scripting 245 BBEdit s Unix shell scripting features which encompass Perl Python shell and any other Unix scripting language are accessed via the new Shebang menu t Why Shebang Because executable Unix scripts traditionally start with the two character sequence Some people pronounce these two characters hash bang others say sharp bang but the most common pronunciation is simply shebang The shebang line is the first line of the script and includes a Unix style path to the interpreter for the language For example usr bin perl or usr local bin python While BBEdit does not entirely depend upon the accuracy of the shebang line for Perl and Python files
352. other features not usually found or missed in word processors 2 BBEdit also has features that make it easier to edit specific kinds of text such as source files for programming languages and HTML Hypertext Markup Language files for the World Wide Web In fact since the rise of the Web BBEdit has become the tool of choice for Macintosh Web designers who need more flexibility than visual Web authoring tools can provide How Can I Use BBEdit Use BBEdit any time you need to create or edit Web pages source files or text documents of any kind Whether you need to find or change all the occurrences of some text in a set of files or modify or reformat large text files of any sort or quickly tweak a Web page BBEdit is the right tool for the job Working with Development Environments BBEdit found its initial following among the Macintosh programming community with its core development oriented tools Although we have added many features to BBEdit since its first incarnation this source editing functionality is as strong now as ever The function pop up menu can parse many programming languages to give you quick access to functions defined in your files You can even integrate BBEdit with popular development environments including CodeWarrior MPW Projector and Perl or any other Unix scripting language on Mac OS X Chapter 14 provides more information on how to set BBEdit up for this type of work Writing HTML Documents BBEdi
353. ou can override this default on a file by file basis or manually back up a file at any time A document must be saved and named before you can set its backup options or make a backup manually If the file being backed up contains Projector version control information this information is removed from the copy Making Backups 37 Automatic Backups To make automatic backups of a document follow these steps 1 Choose the Backup Options command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Backup Options dialog box Backup Options Options for Wrap Music C Make Backup Before Saving Back Up To Document s Folder f Preferred Backup Folder Other none selected N a l Set f Cancel c OK 3 2 Specify the folder where you want BBEdit to save the backups You can choose the document folder the preferred backup folder set in BBEdit s Preferences or some other folder In the latter case click Set or drag a folder icon from the Finder to the text box 3 Select the Make Backup before Saving option BBEdit will make a backup before you save the file The backup will contain the previously saved version of the file 4 Click OK Manual Backups To make backups manually follow the same steps above but do not select the Make Backup before Saving option To make a backup at any point choose the Make Backup Now command from the File menu BBEdit opens a standard directory dialog box so that you can change the loc
354. ou quit BBEdit Usually this function will be used to run scripts of some sort This folder is installed empty by default Startup Items When launched BBEdit will look for a folder named Startup Items in the BBEdit Support folder If this folder is found BBEdit will open any documents it finds in that folder If the file is one BBEdit knows how to open such as a text file or file group BBEdit will open a document window appropriate to the file This folder is installed empty by default If you place a compiled OSA AppleScript or any other OSA compliant scripting language script in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser window based at that folder If you place other types of documents in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit You can copy or move any document or application aliases from the Startup Items folder of your previous version of BBEdit If you have any OSA scripts in this folder please reference the caution previously given for the Scripts folder and see Chapter 13 for more details on converting scripts 14 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit new in 6 5 Upgrading Note Upgrading Stationery This folder contains
355. ound or from the end of the document if searching backwards Otherwise BBEdit stops searching when it reaches the end or the beginning if searching backwards of the file Choosing this option will automatically disable Selection Only Unavailable if Start at Top is checked When performing a Replace All with Wrap Around selected the replace is transformed into Start at Top to allow for performance optimizations Search Backwards When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the beginning of the file Otherwise BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the end of the file Unavailable if Start at Top is checked Search Selection Only When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches only the selected text Otherwise BBEdit searches the entire document Unavailable if Wrap Around or Start at Top is checked Extend Selection When this checkbox is selected BBEdit extends the selection from the current insertion point to the end of the matched search string Case Sensitive When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as different letters Otherwise BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as if they were the same Match Entire Words When this checkbox is selected BBEdit matches the search string only if it is surrounded in the document text by word break characters white space or punctuation Otherwise BBEdit matches the search string anywhere in the text C
356. owser application file then click Open The browser entry is updated To remove a Web browser from the list 1 Click the Web browser to be removed 2 Click Remove Deleting a Web browser from this list does not delete it from your hard disk only from the Preview list HTML Tools Preferences The HTML Tools preferences set options for the HTML Tools HTML Updater Mark the Preserve File Dates checkbox to have modification dates remain unchanged when updating HTML files using the Update Tool Syntax Checker Warnings You can have the HTML Syntax Checker warn you when an HTML element is implicitly closed Examples of these sorts of tags are lt P gt and lt LI gt The closing tags for these elements are optional If this checkbox is marked BBEdit will warn you if it detects that you omitted the closing tag HTML Tools Preferences 161 162 Link Checker Warnings Choose the type of warnings to be issued by the HTML link checker Remote Links flags each off site link so that it can be checked for validity manually Incorrect Pathname Case flags situations where the name of a file as specified in an HTML document does not exactly match the name of the file on disk which can cause problems when files are uploaded to servers with a case sensitive file system Folder Aliases in URL Path warns you if any file paths contain aliases rather than real folders HTML Web Site Preferences This preference panel lets you tell BBEdit about the W
357. p menu to have BBEdit insert an SGML prologue containing the desired document type This information is largely ignored by browsers however HTML syntax checkers such as the one built into BBEdit use it to determine which constructs are legal according to the HTML standard you select Available DOCTYPEs include HTML 3 2 Transitional Frameset and Strict versions of HTML 4 0 HTML 4 01 and XHTML 1 0 and Compact HTML 2 0 CHTML HTML Head and Body Every HTML document should contain lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags Mark these checkboxes to have BBEdit insert these tags automatically Give BBEdit Credit Generates a lt META NAME generator CONTENT BBEdit 6 5 gt tag in the document indicating that you used BBEdit to create it Title Enter the HTML title for the document which can be different from the file name here This text will appear in the title bar of a browser s window when this document is opened Lang Indicates the language this document is written in This information can be used by search engines and translation software to help Web users find pages in their own language Charset Indicates the character set used by the document If you do not specify a character set the character set chosen in the user s browser will be used Base Enter the URL for this document s BASE tag The BASE tag indicates the actual location of the document on a server and all relative URLs specified in the docum
358. pdate your current version You will need to reboot your Mac after installing the new version e If you are running Mac OS 9 or later check that you have version 1 4 or later of CarbonLib installed in your system Extensions folder or use Apple s Software Update control panel to obtain the latest version You will need to reboot your Mac after installing the new version e If you are running Mac OS X no updates to your system components are required However if you wish to install the new bbedit command line tool see Chapter 4 for details then you should run the Install BBEdit Unix Support pkg which comes on the CD ROM or disk image Once you have installed the BBEdit 6 5 folder and verified that you have the necessary supporting files as described above you can begin using BBEdit immediately If you are upgrading from a previous version of BBEdit please read the section BBEdit Support Folders carefully since the organization of supporting files has changed from older versions We have provided specific suggestions and tips for transferring your custom support files with each category The following sections describe some of the BBEdit files and additional software that you may wish to use Additional Software The following pages describe additional software that you may wish to use with BBEdit This software lets you take advantage of special features such as Internet services and MPW s ToolServer Internet Control P
359. ply choose an appropriate font from the Font menu or from the Font amp Tabs dialog which you can open from the Text menu If you have turned off Font and Keyboard Synchronization as described above you will also need to select the correct input method from the keyboard menu We recommend leaving this option on so BBEdit can automatically switch to the correct input method when you change document windows Although BBEdit can display and edit text in only one script system at a time keep in mind that many script systems allow entry of Roman text without switching scripts It is also possible to create text files that contain text in more than one script with BBEdit although not all the text will be readable at the same time Simply change the font and input method as necessary and begin entering text in the new script The text you have already entered will appear as gibberish but it is still there and will be saved correctly If you want to view or edit that text switch back to the first font and script system the newly entered text will become gibberish Naturally whatever application you want to use such text files with will need to provide some way of defining which script systems should be used for which text You can use international text throughout BBEdit for example in the Find amp Replace dialog in the HTML Tools and everywhere else you d use regular Roman text Likewise BBEdit will provide the necessary style informa
360. pop up menu If you save a file with a file creator other than BBEdit double clicking the document will launch the application that matches the selected file creator If you don t have that program installed you might get an error message You can still open it in BBEdit by dragging it onto the BBEdit application icon or by using BBEdit s Open command You can add additional file types and set the default for this pop up menu with the File Types panel of the Preferences Creating and Saving Documents 23 24 Note Note Saving State Information The state information that BBEdit can save with a file includes the placement of the window the scroll bar position the font and size of the text etc BBEdit stores either MPW state information or BBEdit state information The following table shows what information is saved Information MPW State BBEdit State Window position and size Font amp Tab E Scroll bar setting Current selection range Printing options Text display options Manual language selection You can choose which state information to save from the Save State pop up menu in the Options dialog when you use the Save As command Starting with BBEdit 6 0 the default state format changed to MPW in previous versions it was BBEdit Setting the Line Breaks The line breaks setting let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file Choose e Macintosh line breaks ASC
361. provide a way to remember the individual parts of the found string If you use subpatterns to rewrite the above search pattern slightly you get this define t t d 0 9 S The first set of parentheses defines a subpattern which remembers the name of the constant The second set remembers the value of the constant Chapter 8 Searching with Grep new in 6 5 The replacement string would look like this const int M1 M2 The sequence 1 is replaced by the name of the constant the first subpattern from the search pattern and the sequence 2 is replaced by the value of the constant from the second subpattern Our example throws out any comment that may follow the C style constant declaration As an exercise try rewriting the search and replace patterns so they preserve the comment enclosing it in style Pascal comment markers Here are some more examples Data Search for Replace Result 4 2 d d 2 1 2 4 1234 5829 d d 1 1 123441234 2152 B C d 4 t JB C 1 A D 2152 A D 1 234 56 0 9 d 1 dollars and 2 1 234 dollars and cents 56 cents 4 296 459 19 0 9 d M dollars and 2 4 296 459 dollars cents and 19 cents 3 5 6 4 00000 0 9 d M dollars and 2 3 5 6 4 dollars cents and 00000 cents Case Transformations Replace patterns can also change the case of the original text when using subpattern replacements The syntax is simila
362. pter 3 Working with Files Note After editing a file opened from an FIP server pressing Command S or choosing Save from the File menu saves the new version back to the FTP server If you want to save the file in a different directory or under another name choose Save to FTP Server to open a dialog that works much like the Open from FTP Server dialog Like a standard Save dialog for saving a local file it includes a field for the name of the file so that you can name it before saving Bookmarks css T Server W Passive FTP as guide css New Dire www barebones com default css R B faq css GoTo User Name index html foo secondary css C sae Password W l Get Info Remember Password f dm J e Eea T z Delete Auto tonnect J Show Files Starting with f L l Disconnect Cancel kal Show Document Icons Save As untitled text 2 When you save a file to an FTP site using either Save or Save to FTP Server and the file has Unix LF or Windows CR LF line endings BBEdit uploads the file in binary mode preserving its line endings exactly as they are on your local machine However if the file has Macintosh CR line endings it is uploaded in text mode so that the server can convert the line endings as appropriate Finally you can use Save a Copy to FIP Server to upload a copy of your current file to an FIP server while keeping your local file open This is especially useful whe
363. r 14 Working with Development Tools for more details Menu Scripts This folder contains scripts which are attached to BBEdit menu items Some sample scripts are provided with the BBEdit installation package but you will need to move them into this folder to use them See Chapter 13 for more information on writing and using these scripts Plug Ins The Plug Ins folder contains a standard set of code modules that add additional features to BBEdit You can place plug ins within sub folders one level deep to organize them If you are not planning to use any of the included BBEdit plug ins you can remove the Plug Ins folder from the BBEdit Support folder Some of the functions discussed in this manual may require one plug in or another BBEdit plug ins were originally known as BBEdit extensions Plug ins are identical to BBEdit extensions only the name has changed Plug ins are sometimes referred to as tools since they appear on the Tools menu in BBEdit Additional plug ins and information are available from our web site If you are interested in writing your own BBEdit plug ins you can also find the BBEdit Plug In SDK there If you have any third party plug ins that you wish to use with BBEdit 6 5 on Mac OS 9 or earlier you may move or copy them into the Plug ins folder You will not be able to use any third party plug ins which have not been updated to function on Mac OS X Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Ba
364. r Position 167 Show Current Function 167 Function Popup 167 Window Options 167 Markers 167 e File Options 167 Insert Menu 167 File Path 167 e Get Info Icon 168 Super Get Info Icon 168 Document Icon 168 Show All Hide All 168 Button Puffiness 168 Text Colors Preferences rarene etr tens VEA ES TPID TORRE 168 Chapter 11 Text Editing Preterences voee eentet onines eec te dc dat epi sos 169 Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete 169 Drag amp Drop Editing 169 Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement 169 e Allow Single Click Line Selection 170 e Double Click to Balance 170 Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions 170 e Use Hard Line Numbering 170 Use Emacs Key Bindings 170 e Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior 170 e Allow Text Smoothing 170 Extra Space in Text Views 171 Text Files Opening Preferences s secedere REP dte ped 171 Translate Line Breaks 171 e If a File s Type is Unknown 171 Interpret File Contents 172 Text Piles Saving Preferences s Cesar eepx shee edd dr betae 172 Force New Line at End 172 Default Line Breaks 172 e Make Backups Before Saving 173 Text Du n ne Preferences asse a tci poe ecd era 173 JextSearchrPreterenees 21053 med beet Ned oS MERI Serapis 174 Report Single File Replace All Results 174 Remember Find Dialog s Start At Top Setting
365. r Niederst O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 59600 036 7 Cascading Style Sheets The Definitive Guide Eric A Meyer O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 1 56592 622 6 HTML amp XHTML The Definitive Guide 4th Edition Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 59600 026 X Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML 4 in a Week Laura Lemay Arman Danesh Sams 1997 ISBN 1 57521 336 2 HTML 4 for the World Wide Web Visual QuickStart Guide Elizabeth Castro Ventana Press 1998 ISBN 0 20169 696 7 HTML 4 0 Sourcebook Ian Graham Wiley amp Sons 1998 ISBN 0 47125 724 9 HTML Stylesheet Sourcebook Ian Graham Wiley and Sons 1997 ISBN 0 47119 664 9 Recommended On Line Resources HTML Help by The Web Design Group http www htmlhelp com Apple Internet Developer info http developer apple com internet The Yale C AIM WWW Style Manual http info med yale edu caim StyleManual_Top HTML Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools The Bare Bones Guide to HTML by Kevin Werbach no relation to Bare Bones Software http werbach com barebones The W3 Consortium site http www w3 org evolt org Browser Archive http browsers evolt org WebReference com by Mecklermedia http www webreference com WebMonkey by Wired Digital http www webmonkey com DevEdge by Netscape http developer netscape com SGML Resources HTML is an application of SGML and shares many concepts and characterist
366. r to Perl s specifically Modifier Effect Nu Make the next character uppercase NU Make all following characters uppercase until reaching another case specifier Nu NL X1 or NE l Make the next character lowercase NL Make all following characters lowercase until reaching another case specifier Nu NU NM or NE NE End case transformation opened by U or L Writing Replacement Patterns 125 126 Here are some examples to illustrate how case transformations can be used Given some text mumbo jumbo and the search pattern wt NW wt the following replace patterns will produce the following output U 1 E 2 3 MUMBO jumbo u 1 2 u 3 Mumbo Jumbo Note that case transformations also affect literal strings in the replace pattern U 1 2fred MUMBO FRED LMUMBLE 2 3 mUMBLE jumbo Finally note that NE is not necessary to close off a modifier if another modifier appears before an NE is encountered then that modifier will take effect immediately NUfred Nuwilma FRED Wilma Examples The example patterns in this section describe some common character classes and shortcuts used for constructing grep patterns and addresses some common tasks that you might find useful in your work Matching Identifiers One of the most common things you will use grep patterns for is to find and modify identifiers such as variables in computer source code or object names in HTML source documents To match an arbitrary identif
367. r window file group window text window tool window and the like Let s look at text window 0 BBEdit 6 5 Dictionary text document text window too window window Compare Gotions Compare Results ETP info Projector state Result Entry Search Gotions Search Matoh Search String Properties Text Suite text_object insertion point character word line display line text HTML Scripting balance tags check links check syntax GoLive cleaner find tag format generate tag text get html preferences Home Page cleaner inside open tag inside tag pair inside tag make tags lower case make tags upper case normalize tag case optimize PageMill cleaner preview in browser set html preferences to translate html to text 4 Class text window A text editing window Plural form text windows Properties lt inheritance gt window erveer tes are also ofer hed from fhe deste rpg CIII display font string Avot 49 whieh faxt ia diania display font size small integer pm se ar viapiape axt display font style a list of plain bold italic outline shadow underline condensed extended faxt atela ardiaspfape fax tab width small integer 25m igr of apaces ger fe auto indent boolean 3 35 9 mesf enses auto balance boolean 3 3c A3 aoc mg enake smart quotes boolean oe soe f genes egat show invisibles boolean 3 9 Oraid CAII a Dapre T expand tabs boolean see axpsasioe of haha epah soft w
368. racter codes 0 127 cntrl control characters digit decimal digits same as d graph printing characters excluding spaces lower lower case letters print printing characters including spaces punct punctuation characters space white space same as s upper upper case letters word word characters same as Nw xdigit hexadecimal digits For example digit is the same as d POSIX style character class names are case sensitive It is easy to forget that POSIX style character classes are only available inside regular character classes The pattern space without enclosing square brackets is just a LI LI LS dul dM character class consisting of the characters a c e p and s The names ascii and word are Perl extensions the others are defined by the POSIX standard Another Perl extension supported by BBEdit is negated POSIX style character classes which are indicated by a after the colon For example to match any run of non digit characters digit Non Capturing Parentheses As in previous versions of BBEdit bare parentheses cluster and capture the subpatterns they contain The portion of the matching pattern contained within the first pair of parentheses is available in the backreference M1 the second in V2 etc Opening parentheses are counted from left to right to determine the numbers of the captured subpatterns For example if the following gr
369. rap text boolean 30fmmatic fax IPP enaA soft wrap mode Philip bar window width character width Avs Atos VIRS are competed sen ROPE eS BRET soft wrap width small integer seff svspatag fa cheer sith fhe meinen avager af CARY par HAE show spaces boolean oe 3psces diaplaped foal Ig Shoe favisfifes rs free 7 show status bar boolean Jxp ar fhe editor stefan Barn 9 CAS Imi show philip bar boolean esis fhe PAIR far 9 A63 Suse show tab stops boolean ose S fps 0 foe siaN s SfSfus Barn show cursor position boolean dave fe coran postin 9 I3 Ime show function position boolean ose sp fe game af foe F ncfamo vanfarmrag Pe sefeckor sae show line numbers boolean vapfep Ae auaders aaxt fo faxf o fhe wine color syntax boolean epad spoter covering Far 8 3 Sra source language string 0358 ef foe sour vae FINIE SON IDR cafaryYag amy F nctimo Dav split proportion small integer serfs pasrfiap af api E ase expressed a3 3 pervenfage af nois Bent BBEdit and AppleScript 229 230 Note You can see that a text window inherits all the properties of the window class And since the window class inherits all the properties of the item class this means that the text window class also has the properties property defined by the item class To make explicit what you might have already gathered classes in AppleScript form a hierarchy That is classes can be based on other classes Such a class is
370. re Bones Software web site for more information on the availability of updated plug ins You should not copy any of the factory supplied plug ins from previous versions of BBEdit including those provided with BBEdit 6 0 or 6 1 to use with BBEdit 6 5 BBEdit Support Folder 13 gt Upgrading Upgrading Scripts The Scripts folder contains compiled OSA scripts that appear in the Scripts menu left Most OSA scripts are AppleScripts You can place scripts in this folder and use the Scripts menu to run the script Scripts may be placed within sub folders up to four levels deep to organize them A floating Scripts palette lets you activate scripts with a double click and assign keyboard shortcuts to any script Several basic scripts are supplied in this folder and more examples are available on the BBEdit CD Some scripts written for use with versions of BBEdit prior to 6 0 will not work with BBEdit 6 5 Please see Chapter 13 for more details and tips on converting your existing scripts Search Scripts The Search Scripts folder contains any compiled OSA scripts you prepare which return a list of files These scripts are listed in a pop up menu in the Find dialog if a Multi File search using a Script target is selected Please see Chapter 7 or a general scripting reference guide for more information on how to prepare such scripts This folder is installed empty by default Shutdown Items The items in this folder are opened when y
371. rences 169 170 Allow Single Click Line Selection If the checkbox is turned on clicking in the left margin of an editing window selects an entire line The pointer changes to a right arrow when it is in the left margin Click and drag to select multiple lines Double click to select an entire paragraph double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs If this option is off clicking in the left margin moves the insertion point to the beginning of the clicked line as in previous versions of BBEdit Note that the line number bar if displayed is not part of the left margin Double Click to Balance When this preference is turned on you can double click on any opening or closing parenthesis brace or bracket to select the entire range of text enclosed by a balanced pair Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions To have BBEdit stop warning you when you are about to perform an action that cannot be undone turn this checkbox off Use Hard Line Numbering If this switch is turned on then the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line numbers that correspond to hard carriage returns in the document rather than to soft wrapped line breaks To restore the behavior of previous versions of BBEdit turn this preference off Use Emacs Key Bindings If turned on this option allows you to use the basic Emacs navigation keystrokes to move around in editing vi
372. responding to an open QuickTime movie file A movie document doesn t present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate movie documents from other types of document BBEdit and AppleScript 233 234 e QuickTime document refers to a document corresponding to an imported Quicktime image file A QuickTime document doesn t present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate QuickTime documents from other types of documents Getting and Setting Properties One significant improvement in BBEdit s new scripting framework is the ability to get and set multiple properties of an object with a single scripting command Every object has a property called properties This property returns a record which contains all of the properties which can be fetched for that object For example the script command properties of text window 1 will return a result like this one id 241732 container application BBEdit 6 5 bounds 278 45 918 861 closeable true index 1 modal false file file Files WebSite index html modified true name index html position 278 45 resizable true selection some text text text 1 of text window 1 of application BBEdit 6 5 titled true visible true zoomable true zoomed false display font ProFont display font size 9 style plain tab width 4 auto indent true auto balance true smart quotes false show invisibles false
373. ring Text Files 73 74 Note Using the Spelling Checker The Check Spelling command in the Text menu lets you check the spelling of the text in your documents You can use BBEdit s built in spelling checker or you can use an external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite BBEdit s spelling checker is only capable of working with Mac Roman text so the Check Spelling command will be disabled for non Roman documents if the built in checker is selected If you are using a Word Services spelling checker which is capable of handling non Roman content then it should work normally Checking Spelling The Check Spelling command in the Text menu opens the built in spelling checker or an external spelling checker to check the spelling of words in the active document This section describes the built in spelling checker To learn how to set BBEdit to use an external spelling checker see Using an External Spelling Checker later in this section The spelling checker matches each word in the document against the words in its dictionaries If a word isn t in a dictionary the spelling checker offers a suggested correction Sometimes the questioned word may actually be spelled correctly In those cases you can add the word to the User Dictionary or you can skip the word 1 Choose the Check Spelling command in the Text menu BBEdit opens the Check Spelling dialog box Check Spelling Checking Wrap Music Selection Only MI Sk
374. ripted by any OSA language and we will use OSA script and AppleScript interchangeably in this chapter just to remind you of that Unlike macro utilities such as QuicKeys or Keyquencer OSA scripts do not with occasional exceptions manipulate an application s user interface In other words an OSA script does not operate by pretending it s a user pulling down menus clicking with the mouse and typing on the keyboard It is technically possible for an OSA script to do so but this is not the primary use for scripts OSA scripts talk directly to a program s internals bypassing its user interface and allowing scripts to interact directly with its data or facilities If you wanted to insert some text into a document emulating a user typing into the application s window is just about the least efficient way of accomplishing this imaginable with AppleScript you d just tell the application to insert the text directly If you wanted the application to save the frontmost document you wouldn t mime selecting Save from the File menu but rather just tell the application to save document 1 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events Since OSA scripts must have direct access to an application s internal data structures any application that will be used in an OSA script must be designed to allow this access We say such applications are scriptable BBEdit is scriptable as are many many other programs However it s important to note that not every appl
375. rming specific diagnostics but at least you will know that something went wrong In the case of Perl filters the selection is not cleared when this happens Instead you receive an error message telling you that something went wrong in MacPerl Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior The following sections describe the range of commands which you can send to Metrowerks CodeWarrior For complete information on setting up and using BBEdit as an external editor with the CodeWarrior IDE please refer to the appropriate section of your CodeWarrior user manual Due to the continual change in CodeWarrior project format BBEdit does not currently offer support for browsing or performing Find Differences on such files Using the CodeWarrior Menu This section describes each of the commands in the CodeWarrior menu left CodeWarrior IDE Choose this item to switch to CodeWarrior If CodeWarrior is not running BBEdit launches it Compile This command tells CodeWarrior to compile the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that s open in the development environment Check Syntax This command tells the target development environment to check the syntax of the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that s open in the development environment Show in Debugger This command makes the selected text visible in the source level debugger if the debugger is running Set Bre
376. rom a BBEdit window The Run a Script File dialog appears You can select a file by clicking the File button or by dragging a file to the path box at the top of the dialog from the Finder The options are the same as the ones described above for the Run a Script dialog Export To Available only on Mac OS 9 this command exports the current document to a CGI Script a Droplet a drag and drop application or a Runtime a self contained script that doesn t require MacPerl installed to execute If additional export file format extensions are installed in the MacPerl Extensions folder in the same folder as MacPerl itself these will appear in this submenu as well These features are specific to MacPerl When asking MacPerl to edit a Perl runtime BBEdit will first check to see whether it is configured as the Editor helper in the Internet control panel If the Editor helper doesn t exist or doesn t point to BBEdit BBEdit will ask you if you want to change this helper setting If you choose Yes BBEdit will set the Editor helper to point to itself and proceed otherwise it will abort and not ask MacPerl to edit the runtime Find in Perl Reference Find in Reference Looks up the selected text using the appropriate reference application If there is no selection a dialog will open in which you can enter a search string On Mac OS 9 and earlier this command is named Find in Perl Reference and reference lookups are displayed in Shuck a POD vie
377. rs may be familiar with If some tags or attributes in this section are unfamiliar to you we strongly encourage you to study the HTML 4 standard before attempting to use them Table Inserts TABLE and lt TABLE gt tags around the selected text You can specify border width spacing padding frame ruling alignment and background color If there is no selection you can have BBEdit generate a shell for the table including all TR and TD elements inside the table for the number of rows and columns you specify and optionally insert placeholder label text in each cell Row Inserts lt TR gt and lt TR gt tags in the document before and after the selection if there is one You can specify the desired horizontal and vertical cell alignment and a row background color If horizontal alignment to a specific character is specified you can also indicate the character that determines alignment and the character offset to the first alignment character in the line HTML Tool Descriptions 193 194 TD TH Inserts a table data cell element or a heading cell element Both have the same options thought most browsers render TH elements differently from TD elements You can specify the width and height of the cell the number of rows and or columns it should span its vertical and horizontal alignment including alignment to a character and the Offset to the first such character whether the text in the cell should be permitted to
378. rst file that matches the selected name Skip Folders When this option is selected BBEdit does not search folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses Follow Folder Aliases When this option is selected BBEdit follows folder aliases when searching for a file matching the specified name Otherwise BBEdit ignores folder aliases and searches only regular folders If the Follow to Remote Volumes option is on BBEdit will follow folder aliases even if the target folder is on a file server Using this option can substantially increase the length of time required to perform a search Default lt gt Directory The text box displays the default path that BBEdit uses to locate files whose names are enclosed in angle brackets when you use the Open File by Name or Open Selection commands To change the default search directory do one of the following e Click the Choose button and select the folder from the directory dialog box Drag the icon of the folder to the path text box When running on Mac OS X the default value for the Default lt gt Directory setting is the current user s login folder Unix Search Paths The Unix Search Paths options are only available when using BBEdit on Mac OS X These paths are designed to make it easier to work with Unix source code which uses include statements of the form include lt xxx yyy h gt A more concrete example the canonical Unix include directory is usr incl
379. rver passwords can be easily obtained by anyone with access to your computer If security is important to you and you do not run a version of the Mac OS which includes the Keychain we suggest you consider using PGP or an application such as Web Confidential lt http www web confidential com gt Chapter 10 Preferences Note Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP server will now drag that file s URL rather than a representation of the local temporary file To control whether the dragged URL includes the FTP account password set the Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags checkbox in the FTP preferences panel see above By default this setting is turned off so that you don t accidentally create clippings containing passwords as this may be a security risk List FTP Files on the Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to show files opened from FIP sites on the Open Recent submenu of the File menu If this box is not checked the Open Recent submenu lists only local files Passive FTP Mark this checkbox to make passive FTP mode where the server determines the port number for the FTP connection the default Use Passive FTP whenever possible Show Document Icons Mark this checkbox to display icons for the files in the Open from FTP Server and Save to FTP Server dialogs Since FTP servers do not provide Macintosh type and creator informa
380. s folder will appear on that menu Some plug ins require that there be an active window or a selection range These tools may be dimmed when this condition is not met 265 Plug ins reside in the BBEdit Plug ins folder in the BBEdit Support folder which must be in the same folder as the BBEdit application You can group plug ins into sub folders 1 level deep to organize them with the BBEdit Plug ins folder When you organize your plug ins this way BBEdit creates submenus on the Tools menu for each folder The Tools Menu and Floating Window The first item in the Tools menu opens a floating window that contains the names of all the plug ins Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tool List window and on the Tools menu itself If you have simply installed them in the BBEdit Plug ins folder they will appear as individual items on the Tools menu If you have placed them into folders inside the main BBEdit Plug ins folder then the tools will appear in sub menus that mirror their layout within that folder In the Tools List window any plug ins will appear under the sub menu named BBEdit Tools unless they are in their own folder in which case they will appear in separate sub menus The Set Key Button The Set Key button in the BBEdit Tools floating window lets you assign key equivalents to a plug in You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalents Assigning a Key to a BB
381. s from the Edit menu To turn off soft wrapping for new windows deselect the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor section of the Preferences BBEdit provides two ways to convert soft wrapped text into hard wrapped text The first is a simple technique that uses a single command The second way is a bit more complicated but gives you much more control over wrapping Hard Wrapping Soft Wrapped Text To convert soft wrapped text to hard wrapped text use the Add Line Breaks command in the Text menu This command inserts a carriage return at the end of every line of the text as it appears in the window If your wrapping margin is the edge of the window you will get different results depending on the width of the window The Add Line Breaks command does not turn off soft wrapping Hard Wrapping and Filling Text The Hard Wrap command in the Text menu gives you more flexibility over hard wrapping text than the Add Line Breaks command While Add Line Breaks merely freezes the line breaks as they appear in the editing window the Hard Wrap command lets you specify a wrapping margin apply the command to the selection only and reflow paragraphs When you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit opens this dialog box Hard Wrap Selection Only Paragraph Indentation MW Paragraph Fill Flush Left kL O First Line Only Break Lines at All Lines O Philip Bar Window Width f Character Width Reverse Indent Same As First Line kal R
382. s in the display area or a discontinuous group of buttons by Command clicking on each button name After you make a selection click Show or Hide to mark or unmark the selected buttons HTML Preview Preferences The HTML Preview Preferences tell BBEdit how you prefer to preview HTML documents When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes Choose to preview files with unsaved changes by saving the changes to a temporary file by saving the current file just before previewing it or by asking whether to save the file If you choose the latter option and select Save when asked the file will be saved and then previewed if you choose Don t Save the file will be previewed from disk without any unsaved changes Chapter 10 Preferences Web Browsers Available for Preview This list displays the Web browsers known to BBEdit s HTML Tools All available versions of a browser displayed in this list will appear in the pop up menu used with the Preview command For example if you have Netscape Navigator 3 0 and 4 0 on your hard disk and an entry for one of them in the preferences list then both versions will be available for Previewing To add a Web browser to the list 1 Click Add An Open dialog appears 2 Select the desired browser application file then click Open The browser is added to the list To change a Web browser application file 1 Click the Web browser to be changed 2 Click Change An Open dialog appears 3 Select the desired br
383. s name in the Windows window You can open a file by dragging its icon from the Finder or from a file group window to the Windows floater Window Menu 85 86 The buttons at the top of the Windows window perform Save Close or Print commands on the selected windows Pressing the Option key while clicking a button makes its command apply to all selected windows for which the command is possible HTML Markup Tools The main HTML Markup Tools palette is a comprehensive listing of BBEdit s numerous markup functions and tools See HTML Tools Palette on page 207 in Chapter 11 for details on what these tools do You can adjust the number of tools that appear in the main HTML Tools Palette in the HTML Palette panel of the Preferences window Several other HTML palettes are available each with a specific focus These include Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Tables Utilities and Web Safe Colors For more information on these tools please see Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Perl Unix Tools Filters and Scripts On Mac OS 9 and earlier BBEdit offers integration with MacPerl the classic Mac OS port of the Perl programming language If you have a copy of MacPerl installed on your system and the Perl Integration checkbox is selected in the Tools panel of the Preferences window you will see Perl Tools Perl Filters and Perl Scripts menu items available at the bottom of the Palettes sub menu MacPerl is freel
384. s scripting model has changed significantly from previous versions before version 6 0 The good news is it s more powerful than ever The bad news is some of your existing scripts may need revision to work properly This section provides a high level overview of BBEdit s scripting model where appropriate it will contrast the new scripting framework against previous versions of BBEdit This will suggest how you can modify your existing scripts for compatibility with BBEdit 6 5 BBEdit and AppleScript 231 Note Important Because the scripting dictionary is always changing it should be considered the definitive reference in situations where it and this document differ We have found Script Debugger from Late Night Software to be an excellent tool for browsing and navigating BBEdit s scripting dictionary You can find out more at http www latenightsw com Lines and Display lines Starting with BBEdit 6 1 the line element refers to a hard line that is a stream of characters that begins at the start of file or after a line break and which ends at the end of file or immediately before a line break This is consistent with the previous semantics of line in hard wrapped documents and these semantics now apply in soft wrapped documents as well The new display line element refers to a line of text as displayed on screen bounded by soft and or hard line breaks The startLine and endLine properties of a text
385. s the appropriate Internet helper application If the URL is not valid or the helper application can t be found BBEdit beeps You can also Command click anywhere in a URL to resolve it or Control click to bring up the contextual menu and select Resolve URL from it Some Web browsers cannot resolve URLs if the request is sent when the browser is starting up If your Web browser doesn t properly resolve the URL wait until the browser has finished starting up and then try again Bare Bones Software gratefully acknowledges John Norstad for providing the URL parsing code Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip How BBEdit Wraps Text BBEdit wraps text in one of two ways soft wrapping or hard wrapping Soft wrapping is like the word wrapping found in most word processors When the insertion point reaches a right margin as you type the word processor automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You never need to type a carriage return at the end of a line only to start a new paragraph If you place the insertion point in the middle of a paragraph and start typing the text reflows so that words that are pushed out beyond the right margin end up on the next line Usually you use soft wrapping when you are editing memos mail messages and other prose It is also useful for HTML documents With soft wrapping you generally don t have to scroll the window horizontally to see all the text in the file Unlike
386. s you write your scripts we will naturally use BBEdit s dictionary shown below to illustrate how to read a dictionary ooo80 BBEdit 6 5 Dictionary i e Required Suite Terms that every applicat apen D print run open Opens the specified item s quit open reference Ae feo moms E em with properties record arnacctes fm se ana ieee stationery awareness boolean Auau fae UES eink LF translation boolean coke Anes Assos Aa ay delete Gouin duplicate read only boolean memes cca reat exists adding to recent list boolean cet 47 5e sm move adding to favorites list boolean cet fs fee aa get nom A make save print Print the specified objectis set print reference Ae mp m nnm Miscellaneous with properties print settings Ae ayer ae copy a H 5 2 extended copy print dialog boolean cha Ae a arai cut mE San l paste rum Sent to an application when it is double clicked reda s run revert AEE ez You may want to make the window bigger if you have room on your screen It s kind of small by default Down the left side is a list of every event and object supported by the application An event is a verb it tells the application what to do A class is a noun a piece of data or a structured collection of data inside the program In BBEdit for instance classes are things like files windows the clipboard browsers and so on Suites The first thing you will notice is
387. scape it with a backslash Including AppleScripts BBEdit allows included files to be compiled AppleScript scripts The script should contain an on include handler which is passed two parameters a reference to the file from which the script is being called and a record containing one field for each variable passed in the bbinclude directive Scripts can of course also retrieve information from BBEdit other scriptable applications or the Mac OS The handler s return value is inserted into the file that included it Given the HTML document below html head lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 6 5 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt The following script inserts three lines the first containing the file s path the second containing the parameter x passed to it in the bbinclude directive and the third containing the parameter author on include f vars set s to f as text set s to File Path amp S amp return amp return as text set s to S amp x amp x of vars amp return amp return as text set s tos amp Name amp author of vars amp return as text return s end include Include Files 293 294 The resulting document might look like this html head lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name
388. se Grep is turned on in the Find dialog BBEdit will apply syntax coloring to Grep search and replace patterns Multi File Search and Replace Mark Allow File Script Guessing to have BBEdit guess for the script used in documents that do not contain information about their encoding This is useful when searching documents in various languages If this checkbox is marked BBEdit uses the script of the search string when searching a file whose script could not be determined otherwise it uses MacRoman Grep Patterns This list displays all the grep patterns regular expressions you have defined for use in the Find dialog s Patterns pop up menu Click Add to add a new one Click Change to edit the selected pattern Click Remove to delete the selected pattern If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add grep patterns from the Find dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find dialog to add new grep patterns Tools Preferences The Tools preferences control the way BBEdit integrates with programming tools such as development environments and Toolbox references Script Editor When this option is selected you can use the Open Script Editor command in the Script menu left To set the script editor to use with the Open Script Editor command do one of the following e Click the Set button and select the script editor from the dialog box e Drag the icon of the script editor
389. se by clicking the Choose button or by dragging a profile to the gray area from the Finder Quoting Tag Attributes You may choose to always enclose tag attributes in quote marks or to only enclose attributes when the HTML standard would require it XML HTML Markup Rules If you are working with a document that does not contain a DOCTYPE specification or an XML declaration you can specify whether BBEdit s HTML Tools should insert HTML or XML style tags by selecting the appropriate radio button CSS Markup Formatting The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls how the CSS markup and formatting tools place the opening braces for block markup If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green HTML Markup Preferences 159 160 If it s off you get H1 color green The Put Simple Rules on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 color green HTML Palette Preferences This preferences panel determines how the HTML tools floating palette is displayed Palette Width Choose normal or narrow buttons The names of some buttons may be truncated when using narrow buttons Button Height Choose normal or short buttons Using short buttons allows the palette to require less space vertically Buttons on Main HTML Tools Palette This list allows you to select which buttons are displayed on the palette You can select a series of buttons by Shift clicking their name
390. set the default creator signature 1 Select an application from the list 2 Click Make Default A check mark appears next to the default creator When saving files BBEdit will save new files with this creator signature unless you choose a different one When saving a file that already exists BBEdit never changes the creator To add a new application to the list 1 Click Add and select an application from the Open dialog box To delete an item from the list 1 Select an application from the list 2 Click Remove Fonts Preferences The Fonts panel displays a list of the text encodings you can use with BBEdit and the default font you wish to use with each encoding On many systems only the Roman script will be supported The Roman script is used for English and many European languages If you have additional Language Kits installed or are running a non English version of Mac OS other scripts may be available File Types Preferences 155 156 Note Note Warning This list displays every encoding supported by the Mac OS Encodings with list entries displayed in normal text are installed and available on your Mac Encodings whose list entries are dimmed represent script systems that are not installed on your Mac To choose the default text encoding for new documents select the desired encoding in the list then click the Make Default button If a document does not contain any script or font information BBEdit will ass
391. shell commands In this chapter Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments 242 Syntax Coloring 242 Working with Development Environments 00 cece eee 243 Switching Between Source and Header Files 243 Shell WOrKSBeelS 27455 wed ae ae CR EORR I R9 rk Ub a D acu ru D Ru a 243 Default Worksheet Stationery 245 Perl Python and Shell 5eniprng 5 343 e e ex mee des 245 Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 245 Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X 245 Language Resources 246 Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts 247 Camel Shebang Menu 247 Filters and Scripts 250 Filters 250 Scripts 251 Additional Notes 251 Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior elles 252 Using the CodeWarrior Menu 252 Working wath MD aac sock arocktemee va eed gre rbd ee x de hearer a ae 253 BBEdit and ToolServer 254 BBEdit and Projector 256 241 Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments Before you can use BBEdit with a development environment you need to let BBEdit know which development environments you plan to use Choose Preferences from the Edit menu to open the Preferences window Select Tools from the list along the left side of the dialog Click the check boxes to select the development tools you plan to use Note that some tools are only available under specific versions of Mac OS More information can be found in Chapter 10 eo BBEdit Preferences These
392. sic Installation BBEdit 6 5 is now supplied as a single application file which runs on both Mac OS 8 6 or later and Mac OS X Specific system requirements and installation instructions are described below and the organization of BBEdit s supporting files is described in subsequent sections System Requirements To run BBEdit 6 5 a minimum of Mac OS 8 6 or later with CarbonLib 1 4 or later is required and Mac OS 9 1 or later is recommended If you are using Mac OS X version 10 0 or later is required and version 10 1 or any later public release is strongly recommended Throughout this manual to identify those options which are only applicable to specific versions of Mac OS the term Mac OS 9 will refer to both Mac OS 8 6 and 9 x while the term Mac OS X will refer to Mac OS X 10 0 and later Installing BBEdit Depending on how you obtained BBEdit you will receive either a CD ROM or a self mounting disk image file a smi file To install BBEdit 6 5 just drag the BBEdit 6 5 folder from the CD ROM or disk image to the Applications folder or other desired location on your hard drive Important Additionally you should verify that your Mac has the following software installed e If you are running Mac OS 8 6 check that you have version 1 4 or later of CarbonLib installed in your system Extensions folder or use the CarbonLib 1 4 Installer from the CD ROM or the support section of our web site to u
393. soft wrapping hard wrapping requires a carriage return at the end of every line When soft wrapping is turned off BBEdit lets you type as far as you like on a line and never automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You have to manually type a carriage return to start a new line You usually use hard wrapping to write programs tabular data resource descriptions and so on With hard wrapping each line of source code or data appears on its own line in the window although you may have to scroll the window horizontally to see the entire line if it s long If you open a file in BBEdit that appears to consist of a few very long lines you should select the soft wrapping option for that file This table summarizes the commands to soft wrap and hard wrap text The sections that follow give you details about using the wrapping commands To do this Do this Soft wrap text as you type Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left or select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog Convert hard wrapped text to soft Use the Remove Line Breaks command wrapped text in the Text menu and activate soft wrapping Convert soft wrapped text to hard Use the Add Line Breaks command in wrapped text the Text menu Hard wrap text to a specific margin Use the Hard Wrap command in the reflowing paragraphs as needed Text menu Users of very old versions of BBEdit or BBEdit Lite will no
394. stationery files for use with BBEdit s Stationery List feature which can be selected from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Stationery files may be placed within sub folders up to four levels deep to organize them When you want to create a new file you can choose one of the files in the Stationery List as its basis The contents of the stationery file will be copied into a new document window but this window will be untitled and must be given a name and saved Unix Support This folder contains the Unix Scripts and Unix Filters folders which are used to build the Shebang menu and the floating Unix Scripts and Unix Filters palettes when running on Mac OS X These folders are analogous to those in the MacPerl Support folder except that on Mac OS X BBEdit supports any Unix scripting language including Perl Python and shell scripts You can place scripts and filters within sub folders up to four levels deep of their respective folders to organize them Some example Perl Python and shell scripts and filters are supplied with the standard installation The Unix Script Output file stores output from scripts and the Unix Script Logs folder stores output logs for specific source files See Chapter 14 for more information on this folder You can move or copy over any Perl scripts or filters that you wish from previous versions of BBEdit See Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools for information on how to share Perl scripts and
395. t is an ideal tool for writing HTML documents for use on the Internet In addition to many options for preparing text content such as wrapping case changes and searching BBEdit offers a powerful set of tools to make editing Web pages easier The Tag Maker command speeds creation of HTML tags while the Edit Tag option allows quick changes to existing markup and the HTML Tools palette makes dragging and dropping tags simple or lets you access commands with just a click Using BBEdit you can easily preview your work in most Macintosh Web browsers including iCab Internet Explorer Netscape OmniWeb and Opera For more information on using the HTML Tools to create edit and preview Web pages see Chapter 11 Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit Important Human Interface Notes BBEdit enhances the behavior of its menus and dialogs as follows Dynamic Menus Many of BBEdit s pull down menus are dynamic If you hold down the Shift or Option keys while a menu is open you can see some of the items change The illustration below shows what the File menu looks like normally left and when you hold down the Option key right New gt New b New with Stationery New with Stationery b Open 360 Open 360 Open Hidden Open Hidden Open from FTP Server 360 Open from FTP Server 0 Open File by Name 36D Open Recent gt Open Recent p Close 38W Close All Windows C96W Save 365 Save As Save to FTP Server ORS
396. ta nr Poe eco Or ope text text fe sve far ane dora titled boolean r o Aven foe kae Agee a Soe AD D visible boolean r o s kon secu r revert Zoomable boolean tio a fe k N sais select zoomed boolean 47 S82 ste se unda BBEdit Suite add line breaks Tla b All windows in BBEdit belong to this class A class defines a particular kind of object a particular example of an object belonging to the class is said to be an instance of that class or just an object of that class So here we are looking at the class itself each individual window object has all these properties After a tag line that tells you about the class an open window comes the plural form AppleScript lets you refer to windows either singly or as a group so it needs to know what the plural of every term is For example try this little script tell application BBEdit 6 5 to count windows The result of this script is the total number of window objects currently displayed by BBEdit After the plural form comes a list of properties Some objects don t have properties for example a string but many applications do An object s properties are merely a collection of data that describes that particular object For example as you look down the list of window properties you will see that every window has a name every window has a position every window has bounds the area of the screen it covers and So on Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit
397. tax coloring in the Text Colors panel of the Preferences Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Philip bar the window width or a specific number of characters as selected by the options below the checkbox The Philip bar is the light gray line in the status bar that indicates the right edge of the usable viewing area on a 9 inch classic Mac monitor The Smart Editing option has been removed from BBEdit 6 5 It wasn t smart enough for us File Filters Preferences The File Filters preferences lists all the file filters you have defined for multi file searching You can create edit rename or delete filters using the buttons on the right hand side of this panel For more information on creating and using file filters see Chapter 7 If you have the Preferences dialog open you will not be able to add filters in the Find dialog To work around this close the Preferences dialog before using the Find dialog to add new filters File Filters Preferences 153 154 Note Note Note File Search Preferences The File Search preferences control the way BBEdit searches for files when you use the Open File by Name or Open Selection commands from the File menu Find All Matching Files When this option is selected BBEdit looks for all the files that match the entered or selected text Otherwise BBEdit stops looking as soon as it finds the fi
398. te files in the Templates folder appear in this menu The Default setting is not a template per se but rather a directive to create a blank HTML document framework containing whatever Title Base Meta Link SGML Prologue etc values you specify It is always available regardless of the contents in your Templates folder Once you have specified the appropriate settings and chosen Create BBEdit will open an new Untitled window containing the full text of the selected template file If you invoke the Document tool while working on an existing document you will see a checkbox called Create New Window next to the Template menu Normally this option will be on but if you deactivate it then the specified template and other applicable Document values will be inserted into the currently open document so as to enclose the document s contents within the template s lt BODY gt tags The contents of the document are inserted at the template s BODYTEXT placeholder so each template to be used in this manner must contain this placeholder The HTML Tools Palettes 211 Note Important Regardless of whether you use a Template to create a new document or to impose HTML markup on an existing document the template file itself is never changed Rather its contents are simply copied into the document that the template has been used on Templates can make full use of Placeholders and Include Files which are fully documented in Appendix C
399. te selected text press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu If you have a keyboard with a numeric keypad on it you can press the Clear key on the keypad to delete the selected text In addition to clicking and dragging you can use three selection commands in the Edit menu to select text To select Choose this from the Edit menu line containing the Select Line insertion point paragraph containing the Select Paragraph insertion point entire text Select All You can then cut copy or perform any other action that affects selected text BBEdit defines a paragraph as a block of text surrounded by blank lines lines containing no characters other than tabs or spaces The beginning and end of the document also mark the beginning and end of paragraphs Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip new in 6 5 Note Moving text To move text from one place to another follow these steps 1 Select the text you want to move 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu BBEdit removes the text from the window and stores it on the Clipboard 3 Use the scroll bars to move to the new place for the text if necessary then click to set the insertion point where the pasted text is to be inserted 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu You can Paste the contents of the Clipboard as many times as you want in any BBEdit window or in any other application Pasting inserts the text stored on the Clipboard at the insertion point
400. te that the Wrap while Typing option which hard wrapped text automatically by inserting a Return when you reach the right margin has been relegated to the dustbin of history It has been superseded by soft wrapping How BBEdit Wraps Text 63 64 Soft Wrapping To turn on soft wrapping for the active window do one of the following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar e Select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog box by choosing Text Options from the Edit menu To specify the wrapping margin use the Text Options command You can have text wrap at the Philip bar the edge of the window or a specific character position To make soft wrapping the default for new windows select the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor Defaults panel of the Preferences You can also use the settings in that panel to specify the default wrapping margin To freeze the current line endings and hard wrap the text at the current soft wrapping settings use the Add Line Breaks command to insert a carriage return at the end of each line While BBEdit prefers to break lines at white space when soft wrapping lines will now be broken as close as possible to the designated wrap width if they do not contain any white space This way long URLs and other extended strings of characters are visible without scrolling horizontally Soft Wrapping and Imported Text In most cases files that were create
401. that the events and classes are divided into suites A suite is just a collection of related events and classes Apple for instance has decreed that all applications should support particular events which together are called the Required Suite Another Apple defined suite is the Standard Suite if an application has certain common functions they should use these standard terms so that scripters don t need to learn a new term for each application they work with After that it s a free for all each developer is free to organize their events and classes however they think best In addition to the Required and Standard suites BBEdit has a Miscellaneous suite a BBEdit Suite a Text suite and an HTML Scripting suite If you have the appropriate software installed you will also see the MacPerl Scripting suite and the Projector Scripting suite Additionally if you have any scriptable plug ins installed as many of the supplied ones are you will see additional suite entries for each such plug in Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Within each suite events verbs are displayed in normal text while classes nouns are italicized Most commands sent to BBEdit will start with one of the verbs In some cases get might be implied Events Let s look more closely at one of the events Save is a good one to start with It s Shown below 80 8 BBEdit 6 5 Dictionary Required Suite lave Save a window s contents in text format open save
402. that you can t fit all the different characters you need for a language in a single byte anymore A byte can only hold a single number with a value from 0 to 255 Plenty for English plenty even for many other languages but unworkable for ideographic languages with thousands of distinct characters So to support these languages one needs to use two bytes to store each character This means that all text display and manipulation features of all software have to be revised to support text in which characters are stored as more than one byte It also means that the computer has to provide some way for users to type text without requiring a keyboard with thousands of keys Starting with Mac OS 8 5 Apple included the ability to view text in all these different languages with the operating system this package was called Multilingual Internet Access and had to be custom installed To actually write text using various alphabets you still had to purchase the appropriate Language Kit if it didn t already come with your computer A Mac sold in Japan for example would have Japanese language capability right out of the box but Macs purchased in the United States require the JLK to be installed separately With Mac OS 9 Apple began including all the available language kits with the OS as custom installations so now every Mac user can have the capability if they want it This only works in applications that support international text of course If your
403. the Command or the Control modifier key to be valid You can also use Function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click Save If you try to assign a key sequence that is already used elsewhere BBEdit warns you that there is a conflict and asks you whether you want to reassign that key sequence to the new item Removing a Key Assignment To remove a key assignment from a glossary item 1 Choose the item from the Glossary window 2 Click Set Key 3 BBEdit opens the Set Key dialog 4 Click Reset BBEdit removes the key assignment from the glossary item The Set Key Button 215 Glossary Substitutions When you insert a glossary entry containing a placeholder into an editing window BBEdit replaces the placeholder with appropriate substitution text This is similar to the functionality BBEdit provides in its HTML Templates and Update features Placeholder CLIPBOARD DATE FILE FUNCTION INDENT INLINE INSERTION NAME SCRIPT name Replaced by Contents of the Clipboard Current date formatted according to your Date amp Time control panel preferences Name of the window into which entry is inserted If the entry is being inserted into a source file the name of the current function When used in glossary items with multiple lines causes every line in an item after the first to be indented to the same whitespace level as the line on which the item was inserted see the supp
404. the Desktop Chapter 10 Preferences CHAPTER BBEdit HTML Tools This chapter describes the use of BBEdit s HTML Tools a powerful suite of utilities for creating and maintaining HTML documents and entire Web sites In this chapter Introduction to the HTML Tools eee 178 Recommended Books 178 Recommended On Line Resources 178 SGML Resources 179 What You Need 179 Configuring the HIML Tools si 4999949 RE RR ERR 180 Using the BBEdit FITMLE TOolS 4 2 3er C e When Bw oe d a 180 Creating a New Document 181 ELEME Tool Desem pions de 3m os oo Sk ate aura Re eee aus 183 Tag Maker 184 Edit Tag 185 Document Type 186 Character Set 186 CSS Submenu 186 Body Properties 190 Head Elements 190 Block Elements 191 Lists 193 Tables 193 Forms 194 Inline Elements 196 Phrase Elements 199 Font Style Elements 200 Frames 200 Check 201 Update 202 Includes 203 Utilities 204 Misc 205 Preview 206 The HEMI Tools Palettes seduces cio a SR NUS fob ox TR PCR Res 207 HTML Tools Palette Tips 207 HTML Tools Palette 207 Other Palettes 209 ETTNALTEADSIADORN seriis masa et cie Res e inne doe act aca ee dit 210 Templates ceno tiaro rS qe SS a dui dob ee Ae ua daa dee cart 211 Template Setup 211 Using a Template 211 Custom Markup sis 6h pao tt e Pi en pao eae ete a toa er ds 212 177 Important 178
405. the Find Again Replace Replace All and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See the next section for information on File by File searching Note You can use a search results window as the basis of another multi file search See Specifying the Search Set later in this chapter Multi File Search Results File by File If you did not select the Batch Find option BBEdit opens the first file that contains the search string At that point you can use the commands in the Search menu to further control the search This command Does this Find Again Finds the next occurrence of the search string within the same file To search backwards hold down the Shift key BBEdit beeps if it can t find any more occurrences of the search string in the current file Use the Find in Next File command Replace Replaces the selection with the replace string Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string with the replace string within the current file Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selection with the replace string and looks for the search string again BBEdit beeps if it can t find any more occurrences of the search string Use the Find in Next File command Find in Next File Looks for the search string in the next file in the set of files to be searched 98 Chapter 7 Searching This command Does this Find amp
406. the Keychain is locked the Remember Password option will also be disabled and you will need to retype your password every time you use the FTP dialog You can click on the key icon in the FTP dialog above the password field to unlock the Keychain or to query it for a password if the Keychain is already unlocked The Passive FTP checkbox tells BBEdit to open a connection to the FIP server in passive mode where the server will send BBEdit the number of the port to use for the session If this option is turned off BBEdit will specify the port number We recommend use of passive mode when possible however not all servers or networks support it so if you encounter difficulties try turning this checkbox off The Show Files Starting with checkbox tells BBEdit whether to display hidden or admin files in the chosen directory such as login forward signature etc Starting a filename with a period is a Unix convention to make it invisible in most directory listings Once the connection is made you can use the Open button and the directory popup to navigate through the directories just as you would navigate through the folders on your hard drive Click Delete to remove the file from the server You can use the Get Info button to reveal the size modification date and if applicable file system permissions of the selected file You can edit the file s name and click the Rename button to rename the file on the server you can also make chang
407. the range a to z You can use any number of characters or ranges between the brackets Here are some examples Character Class Matches aeiou any vowel aeiou any character that is not a vowel a zA 20 9 any character from a z A Z or 0 9 aeiou0 9 any character that is neither a vowel nor a digit A character class matches when the search encounters any one of the characters in the pattern However the contents of a set are only treated as separate characters not as words For example if your search pattern is beans and the text in the window is lima beans BBEdit will report a match at the a of the word lima To include the character in a set or a range place it immediately after the opening bracket To use the character place it anywhere except immediately after the opening bracket To match a dash character hyphen in a range place it at the beginning of the range to match it as part of a set place it at the beginning or end of the set Or you can include any of these character at any point in the class by escaping them with a backslash Character Class Matches 10 9 any digit or aeiou a vowel or A 42 a dash orA Z A any character in the range from toA aeiou any vowel or aei ou any vowel or Chapter 8 Searching with Grep new in 6 5 Character classes respect the setting of the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find dialog For example if Case Sensitive is on a
408. tion BBEdit determines the displayed icon based on the file s name suffix html sit etc These suffix to type mappings are configured in the Internet control panel Show Files Starting with The Unix convention for creating invisible or hidden files is to begin their names with a period Often configuration files and scripts such as newsrc or login begin with periods so that they don t clutter most directory listings This setting is off by default so that you will not see such files in FTP listings In order to display them mark this checkbox FTP Bookmarks This list displays the bookmarks you have defined for FIP servers you use frequently with BBEdit Click Add to create a new bookmark Click Change to edit the selected bookmark or Remove to delete it The Convert button allows you to choose a BBEdit 5 x 5 0 or 5 1 preferences file if one is in the Preferences folder of your active system BBEdit will automatically select that directory After choosing a source prefs file BBEdit will read in the FTP bookmarks from that file add them to your current bookmark list and re sort the list If you have the Preferences dialog open you will not be able to add bookmarks in the Open From Save To FTP Server dialogs To work around this close the Preferences dialog before using the FTP dialogs to add new bookmarks FTP Settings Preferences 157 158 Function Popup Preferences The Function Popup preferences control how
409. tion so that if you copy and paste or drag amp drop international text into another application that application will have enough information to handle the text correctly assuming it is capable of doing SO Chapter 5 Working with International Text Note BBEdit remembers the script system used in a document when you save it so the next time you open it you won t need to choose the font However files that do not have this stored information such as those you download from the Internet may not be readable until you choose an appropriate font and script for them When saving a multi byte document BBEdit will write out a styl resource in the document s resource fork This ensures compatibility with applications that don t know how to interpret the MPW state resource or which otherwise can t properly select the document font on their own When performing a multi byte search BBEdit respects the saved information about each file s script system if the file has it If the file does not contain any information about its script system and the preference for Allow File Script Guessing is set in the Text Search panel BBEdit assumes it is in the same script as the text you are searching for Unicode The various script systems Apple introduced to handle non Roman scripts served well enough for years but eventually keeping track of which script was being used for text became a hassle especially on the Internet where there were s
410. to two parts The Editing options on the left control the way BBEdit behaves while you type The Display options on the right control the appearance of the BBEdit window Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Note Note You can change many of the text options through the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar Changes you make in the Text Options dialog box affect only the current window To make changes for all new windows that you open use the Editor Defaults and Status Bar sections of the Preferences window Editing Options These options control the way BBEdit behaves as you type text in the active document window Changes you make here affect only that window To change editing behavior in windows you open in the future use the Editor Defaults section of the Preferences dialog in the Edit menu Auto Indent When this option is selected pressing Return automatically inserts spaces or tabs to indent the new line to the same level as the previous line To temporarily invert the sense of the Auto Indent option hold down the Option key as you press the Return key Balance While Typing When this option is selected BBEdit flashes the matching open parenthesis brace or bracket when you type a closing one This option is useful when you use BBEdit to edit source files to ensure that all delimiters are balanced Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically replaces straight quotes with typo
411. tor that comes with the Mac OS the English like equivalent for each Apple Event and each event s parameters It s important to note that because Apple Events were originally designed to allow applications to communicate with each other OSA scripts automatically inherit the ability to talk to more than one application It s common in the publishing industry for instance to write scripts that obtain product information from a FileMaker Pro database and insert it into a QuarkXPress file This integration is one of the Mac OS s primary strengths You use AppleScript s tell verb to indicate which application you are talking to If you are only sending one command you can write it on one line like this tell application BBEdit 6 5 to count windows If you are sending several commands to the same application it s more convenient to write it this way tell application BBEdit 6 5 count windows repeat with x from 1 to the result save window x end repeat end tell Apple s Script Editor automatically indents the lines inside the tell block for you so you can more easily follow the organization of the script Recordable Applications Once an application accepts Apple Events it actually makes a good deal of sense for an application to be designed in two parts the user interface that you see and the engine that does all the work An application designed this way is sometimes said to be factored The user interface then communicates w
412. tterns 5424 eR RA RUE Y 123 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 123 Using the Entire Matched Pattern 124 Using Parts of the Matched Pattern 124 Case Transformations 125 Examples 4 222012 0 ts Cb trece uetedi a ec Pcr S e eet A ae tete dedo 126 Matching Identifiers 126 e Matching White Space 126 e Matching Delimited Strings 127 Marking Structured Text 127 e Marking a Mail Digest 128 e Rearranging Name Lists 128 Advanced Grep TODpI6S coa fad aoo anche etek b aOR ics Oeo Pe T an il eds 129 Matching Nulls 129 e Backreferences 129 e POSIX Style Character Classes 131 Non Capturing Parentheses 131 Perl Style Pattern Extensions 132 Comments 133 e Pattern Modifiers 133 Positional Assertions 135 e Conditional Subpatterns 137 Once Only Subpatterns 138 Recursive Patterns 140 111 Important 112 Note Changes in BBEdit 6 5 In a substantial change from all previous versions BBEdit 6 5 incorporates a new and considerably more powerful grep search engine based on the PCRE package This core technology brings many useful new features and options as well as performance enhancements to BBEdit s search and replace capabilities However in order to harness its power to best advantage even if you were familiar with grep searching in previous versions of BBEdit you should read through this chapter again In particular many new special characters and
413. turing parentheses 131 non greedy quantifiers 122 non printing characters 117 non repeating subpatterns 138 once only subpatterns 138 pattern modifiers 133 positional assertions 135 POSIX character classes 131 quantifiers 118 ranges 116 rearranging name lists 128 recursive patterns 140 repetition 118 replacement patterns 123 replacing with subpatterns 124 300 Index G cont grep cont setting markers with 68 subpatterns 120 123 wildcards 114 Hard Wrap command 63 65 hard wrapping 60 63 64 Head Elements submenu 190 header files 243 headers 41 heading tags 192 Hex Dump plug in 269 hex escapes 95 117 hexadecimal 62 hidden files on FIP servers 32 highlighting of text 44 hollow diamond 47 Home Key 54 HR tag 192 HTML books on 178 CSS 186 document title 182 Web sites about 178 HTML Colors Preferences 158 HTML document 21 HTML Entities palette 209 HTML Markup Preferences 159 HTML Palette Preferences 160 HTML Preview Preferences 160 HTML Templates folder 211 HTML Tools 177 212 Block Elements 191 checking HTML 201 colors 210 custom markup 212 Edit Tag 185 entities 209 forms 194 frames 200 Head Elements 190 include files 291 indexing 206 inline elements 196 lists 193 Markup menu 181 miscellaneous 205 new document 181 optimizing documents 204 palette 180 207 209 phrase elements 199 H cont HTML Tools cont preferences 180 reformatting documents 204 scripting 212 scripts 293 tables 193 Ta
414. types plug in 269 MAP tag 198 Mark pop up menu 48 67 markers clearing 68 setting 67 Markup menu 181 menu list HTML 193 menus 3 META tags 182 183 191 Misc submenu 205 monospaced font 193 200 mouse shortcuts 283 moving text 45 moving the cursor 50 using the arrow keys 51 MPW 11 67 253 254 MPW tools 255 Scripts folder 11 state information 24 Tools folder 11 Index 301 M cont multi byte text 26 77 multi file comparisons 73 multi file search 95 multiple clipboards 45 multiple Undo 46 name placeholder 216 New Project command 259 NOFRAMES tag 201 Non Greedy Quantifiers 122 non printing characters 56 95 NOSCRIPT tag 191 192 numeric keypad 53 O OBJECT tag 197 OL tag 193 Open command 23 26 options 28 Open Hidden 29 Open Recent command 26 29 Open Selection command 26 29 Open Several command 26 Opening 26 Opening Existing Documents 26 optimizing HTML 204 OPTION tag 196 OPTIONGROUP tag 196 ordered lists 193 outdenting 59 P P paragraph tag 191 page breaks 70 Page Down key 54 Page Up key 54 paragraph definition 44 Paragraph Fill option 65 PARAM tag 197 passive FTP 32 Paste command 4 45 Path pop up menu 48 pattern matching see grep pencil icon 48 Perl 245 Perl scripts 245 persistent includes 291 Philip Bar 55 56 Phrase Elements submenu 199 302 Index P cont placeholders 287 RELATIVE 290 AppleScript 217 in glossaries 216 plug ins 12 265 PostScript 269 PR
415. u often edit shared files that might be changed by someone else you may want to mark one or more of these checkboxes If the option for Activating BBEdit is checked for instance BBEdit will check the modification date of each open document each time you switch to BBEdit alerting you if any changes have been made to the file while BBEdit was not the frontmost application Similar functions are available to have BBEdit perform this check after running an OSA script running a Perl script or filter running a ToolServer MPW script or running a BBEdit plug in Browser Display Preferences The Browser Display preferences control the initial appearance of BBEdit s built in browsers for search results compile errors disk contents and so forth Results Lists For search results browsers you can have BBEdit either display a hierarchical listing where all the matches associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the match list or a flat listing showing each individual match encountered on a separate line In the latter case you can also tell BBEdit to expand all the file nodes initially by checking Expand Listing This preference also governs the default display of hierarchical or flat error listings in error browsers Chapter 10 Preferences Show File Icons When this option is selected browsers that display files folders and disk
416. u wish to convert FTP bookmarks from BBEdit 5 x you can do so in the FTP Settings pane of the BBEdit Preferences window Clipboards BBEdit stores the last used Clipboard contents for each of its multiple clipboards in this file upon quitting This file is new to BBEdit 6 If you lock the Clipboards file by selecting it in the Finder doing Get Info and setting the Lock option BBEdit will not preserve clipboard contents across runs File Filters BBEdit stores user defined file filter patterns in this file which is found in your active BBEdit Preferences folder BBEdit Grep Patterns BBEdit stores user defined search patterns in this file which is found in your active BBEdit Preferences folder In some older versions of BBEdit these patterns were stored in the Prefs file If you have added any custom grep patterns to a previous version of BBEdit you can replace the default file created by BBEdit with your customized version Also if you use a substantial number of custom patterns we recommend that you maintain a backup copy of this file ToolServer Worksheet If you use ToolServer BBEdit stores the file ToolServer Worksheet in the BBEdit Preferences folder The worksheet file contains a record of your interactions with ToolServer Recent Files amp Favorites This folder contains up to 12 aliases to the most recent local files that you have opened or FTP clippings for any files opened from FTP servers The items stored
417. ude It contains its own subdirectories but since Unix command line compilers don t usually do recursive searches you need to qualify the include file s name if you want to include a file out of one of the subdirectories include lt sys ioctl h gt Chapter 10 Preferences With the new Unix Search Paths settings you can now add usr include to the list actually that s one of the factory defaults When you select sys ioctl h and choose Open Selection BBEdit attempts to construct a file path using each of the directories shown in the Unix Search Paths list If one resolves to a file BBEdit will open the resulting file Thus the partially qualified selection sys ioctl h now resolves to usr include sys ioctl h and the file opens File Types Preferences The File Types preferences let you set the creator signatures of the files that BBEdit can save Entries in this part of the Preferences appear in the list of file types in the Options section of the Save As dialog When BBEdit saves a new file it sets the type of the file to TEXT and usually sets the file s creator to R ch You can choose a different creator by selecting it from the File Creator pop up menu in the Options section of the Save As dialog The Find All button allows you to easily add all the applications you have that are capable of opening text files This may be a long list so you may prefer to add only the applications you actually use To
418. uggest in most cases that you continue to use this as your templates folder If you would prefer however you can set up your own template folder wherever you like as described in Configuration of the HTML Tools above If you plan to maintain multiple sets of templates for different projects you may find this option very useful The HTML Tools cannot currently be configured to handle multiple different servers at once If you need to work with multiple servers however you will find that all HTML Preference settings can be changed via AppleScript An example script which demonstrates how to switch between multiple server configurations is provided in the Scripting Samples folder which comes with BBEdit Using a Template A template is a simple text file that contains boilerplate text and or HTML content which will form the foundation for the document you are creating Template files must have the filename suffix tmpl in order to be recognized When creating a template file you can convert or reuse an existing document or you can write one from scratch Simply rename the file by adding the suffix tmpl to it and then move or copy it into your active HTML Templates folder Templates are always invoked using the New Document tool Even if you wish to impose a template on an existing document you still do it through New Document The Template option appears as a pop up menu at the bottom left of the New Document dialog All templa
419. ume it contains Roman text To choose the default font font size and tab stop spacing for a particular encoding click Set Font amp Tabs The Font amp Tabs dialog box below appears Font amp Tabs Font Monaco m d OK 3 Size g 9 m Cancel fv Plain 1 Bold 1 Outline C Condensed H italic O Shadow 3 Extended C Underline Set tabs every spaces You can choose the desired font font size and style using controls in this dialog The font should be appropriate to the encoding selected for example you should not choose Monaco as the font to use for Japanese text You can also tell BBEdit how many spaces occur between each tab stop Individual documents may override these settings if they contain appropriate state information See Chapter 3 for more details on document states The settings you choose here are defaults which BBEdit uses for new windows and for documents with no saved state information FTP Settings Preferences The FTP Settings panel lets you change the default settings of some options in the Open from FTP Server and Save to FTP Server dialogs Remember Passwords Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit store the passwords for FTP sites Store Passwords in Keychain This checkbox determines whether BBEdit stores saved FTP passwords in the Mac OS Keychain or whether they are stored in plain text in the bookmarks file BBEdit is not a security program If you choose not to use the Keychain your stored FTP se
420. unt of free memory The Undo command essentially reverses any change you may have made to the content of your file Each action which is generally punctuated by a mouse click is one undo able incident So for example if you type the sentence This is a Test and then click to highlight the second capital T and replace it with a lowercase t and then highlight the word is and click on the HTML tools to change the style of the word to bold that s three distinct actions In this example you can select the Undo command once to reverse your action of inserting the bold tags Selecting Undo again would change the lowercase t back to an uppercase T A third Undo would eliminate the sentence altogether untype it as it were BBEdit also supports multiple Redos If you haven t made any changes after performing an Undo you can redo each action in order by selecting that command from the Edit menu or typing Command Shift Z However once you perform a new action you cannot redo any actions that you undid before you made that change Window Anatomy BBEdit windows have the same controls you are familiar with from other Macintosh applications for example windows are resizable and zoomable and have both vertical and horizontal scroll bars Two additional features which may be less familiar are also included the status bar and the split bar Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note If you choose the Show Line Numbers
421. us Bar This option shows or hides the status bar in the active window When this option is selected two sub options are available e The Philip Bar option shows or hides a thin gray line in the status bar e The Tab Stops option shows or hides tick marks in the status bar that indicate the tab stops in the window On Mac OS 9 click the key icon in document windows to show or hide the status bar without opening the Text Options dialog box On Mac OS X click the button in the top right corner of the window Line Numbers This option adds line numbers along the left edge of the window Cursor Position Adds a panel at the bottom left frame of the window that displays the location line and column of the insertion point or the last changed end of the selection range Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins other invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols Symbol Meaning tab 0 space non breaking space line break 1 page break other non printing or special characters When the Show Invisibles option is selected the Show Spaces sub option is available letting you turn off the visually noisy spaces BBEdit 6 5 no longer hides the form feed character which was invisible in older versions However when the Show Invisibles option is active form feeds will still be replaced by the special
422. values for the Content field by using the pop up menu to its right Script Begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained in an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute Noscript Begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scripting often used to provide alternate content following a SCRIPT block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted Style Begins a stylesheet declaration You will be prompted to enter the type and title of the stylesheet and optionally select the Media type it is to be used with Block Elements This submenu lets you add HTML elements that behave as paragraphs or other types of text blocks Since many block elements can be containers for other elements most have an explicit or implicit ending tag e g P to close a paragraph as well as an opening tag e g lt P gt If text is selected when one of these commands is chosen these opening and ending tags are placed before and after the selection Paragraph Begins a new paragraph element You can specify alignment ID a class
423. ved 08 21 00 04 29 18 PM X L3 File Path Application Examgple tmpl i 1 include HTAL source code by reference into another file rather than having to copy and paste and deal with the headaches of keeping all af your HTML code in syne This example illustrates the use of the include directive You can amp DOCTVPE HTML PUBLIC Wsc DTD HTML 4 81 Transitional EH http ui wd arg TR 12999 REC htmL481 198981224 Looze dtd lt html gt thead EQ Pez The items at the top of the window tell you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as whether any error conditions or warnings were generated during the search The list pane lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit the list may be arranged hierarchically with every match attached to the file that contains it in a Finder like list view or they may be listed one after the other in a simple flat list Every match is identified by file and line number Results browsers now have an Open button Clicking this button while pressing the Option key will ask the Finder to open the selected items To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane You cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit the file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit
424. ver after that is the Result BBEdit and AppleScript 227 228 line which we haven t seen before This line tells you what type of value the command returns This value is placed in the AppleScript system variable called the result Get can retrieve any kind of object so it can return anything as indicated here Other events might return a specific type of result or none at all Save didn t have a Result line in its dictionary entry which means it doesn t return a result Classes and the Class Hierarchy Let s look now at a typical class definition window will do nicely It s in the BBEdit Suite toward the bottom oo80 BBEdit 6 5 Dictionary Required Suite 4 Class window an open window open Plural form pront windows how Elements quit print settings Standard Suite close count delete duplicate exists mowe get make save set Miscellaneous copy extended copy cut text by numeric index Properties lt inheritance gt item bounds bounding rectangle ste aseo netta dem P nen Closeable boolean r o Jue fhe poy Soe oven Anz index integer fe sse e serm modal boolean r o 5 sies ess file alias r o fe sve ite gases svn rns suae S d modified boolean ro s fe eren Dea xxn uoce Poe dao sie name international text e fig nr DOE sme position point segue A oen nh Pg irme resizable boolean D 5 sies eau 2 selection reference 55e aaeoa contents anything cues
425. volumes will also display small icons for the items When this option is deselected the browsers list only the names of files and folders Differences Preferences The Differences preferences control the way the Find Differences command places its windows Arrange Windows On The Arrange Windows radio buttons let you choose which screen BBEdit uses to display Differences windows You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen When you mark the Use Two Screens checkbox BBEdit displays the Differences window on the second screen This option gives you the largest view of the items you are comparing Keep Windows Arranged provides control over whether BBEdit re arranges the windows being compared when you click on a difference item Differences Window Placement The two Above Beneath Compared Files radio buttons let you choose whether the differences window should be above or below the windows of the items you are comparing Arrange Windows You can now specify whether differences windows are arranged left to right or top to bottom using the Arrange Windows radio buttons Previously BBEdit always arranged differences windows left to right Multi File Differences When comparing multiple files the Show File Icons checkbox determines whether the files Finder icons are shown in the Differences window Editor Defaults Preferences The Editor Defaults preferences control the behavior of newly create
426. wer than the corresponding local project Any new files which were added to the project since the last checkout will also be checked out Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools e Update Existing fetches a copy of every file in the project which is newer than the corresponding local project Any new files added to the project since the last checkout are not checked out e Everything fetches a copy of the latest revision of every file in the project new in 6 5 Find Lurkers Choose this command and BBEdit will ask you to select a folder BBEdit will produce a list of all the files which are currently checked out as writable MRO d or new in that folder recursively Make Obsolete Marks the current document as obsolete in the Projector database BBEdit will close the document s editing window and move the associated file to the Trash Hold down the Shift key to choose a file instead of obsoleting the frontmost window s file Remove Projector Info Removes the CKID resource from the current file losing all embedded Projector state information and comments Hold the Shift key to choose a file instead of operating on the frontmost window Open Log File Opens the SourceServer log file or brings it to the front if it is already open Working with MPW 263 264 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools CHAPTER BBEdit Plug Ins BBEdit plug ins are code modules that enhance BBEdit s features and which app
427. wer that comes with MacPerl Perl Python and Shell Scripting 249 On Mac OS X this command is named Find in Reference and reference lookups are performed by command line tools perldoc for Perl pydoc for Python and displayed as text in a window in BBEdit The Find in Reference command is not available for languages other than Perl and Python View POD Views the current window as POD On Mac OS 9 and earlier the window is opened in Shuck On Mac OS X the window contents are processed by the command line pod2text tool then displayed in a new window in BBEdit Note POD stands for Plain Old Documentation and is the standard Perl documentation format Filters and Scripts Before you begin using MacPerl or Unix scripts with BBEdit you should locate and familiarize yourself with the MacPerl Support and Unix Support folders both of which live in the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 for details about the BBEdit Support folder Inside these folders are sub folders for storing Filters Scripts and other files used for MacPerl and Unix shell scripting integration new in 6 5 If you are running BBEdit 6 5 on Mac OS 9 BBEdit will use the MacPerl Support folder If you are running Mac OS X BBEdit will use the Unix Support folder The contents of these two folders will be used to build the Scripts list and Filters list two floating palettes that allow you to run your scripts or filters with a double click Scripts and filters
428. will only match a if Case Sensitive is off a will match both a and A Matching Non Printing Characters As described in Chapter 7 on searching BBEdit provides several special character pairs that you can use to match certain non printing characters You can use these special characters in grep patterns as well as for normal searching You can now also specify any character in a grep pattern by means of its hexadecimal character code escape code For example to look for a tab or a space you would use the character class Nt consisting of a tab special character and a space character Character Matches r line break carriage return n Unix line break line feed t tab NT page break form feed Na alarm hex 07 NCX a named control character like NcC for Control C b backspace hex 08 only in character classes e Esc hex 1B xNN hexadecimal character code NN e g xOD for CR x NNNN any number of hexadecimal characters NN e g x 0 will match a null x 304F will match a Japanese Unicode character XN backslash Use r to match a line break in the middle of a pattern and the special characters and described above to anchor a pattern to the beginning of a line or to the end of a line In the case of and the line break character is not included in the match Writing Search Patterns 117 118 Other Special Character Classes BBEdit several other sequences for matching
429. windows ASCII table 84 Glossary 213 HTML Entities 209 HTML Tools 180 207 209 Tool List 266 Web Safe Colors 210 window list 85 font for printing 40 FONT tag 198 Fonts menu 58 Fonts preferences 155 foreign text 77 form sentences 59 FORM tag 194 195 form words 59 Format command 204 Forms submenu 194 Forward Delete key 52 54 fractional widths 40 FRAME tag 201 Frames submenu 200 FRAMESET tag 201 freezing line endings 64 Frontier 212 FTP 31 alternate ports 31 FTP Browsers 34 FTP Settings Preferences 156 function keys 54 function placeholder 216 Index 299 F cont Function pop up menu 48 49 Function Popup Preferences 158 functions prototypes 269 G Get Info command 48 88 Get Revision command 258 Glossary 12 84 213 language sensitivity 214 manually sorting 214 substitutions 216 Glossary Preferences 158 Go To Center Line command 108 Go To Line command 53 108 Go To Previous Error command 108 Go To Previous Placeholder 108 gremlins 61 grep 94 alternation 121 backreferences 129 character classes 116 comments 133 complex patterns 119 conditional subpatterns 137 entire matched pattern 124 escape codes 113 117 examples 126 excluding characters 116 longest match issue 122 lookahead assertions 135 lookbehind assertions 135 marking a mail digest 128 marking structured text 127 matching delimited strings 127 matching nulls 129 matching white space 126 matching words and identifiers 126 non cap
430. wn as regular expressions allow you to find and change text that matches a set of conditions you specify Combined with the multi file search and replace features described in Chapter 7 BBEdit s grep capabilities can make many editing tasks quicker and easier whether you are modifying Web pages extracting data from a file or just re arranging a phone list For example suppose you have a list of people s names that you want to alphabetize If the names appear last name first you can easily put these names in a BBEdit window and use the Sort tool But if the list is arranged first name first a simple grep pattern can be used to put the names in the proper order for sorting as you will see in this chapter In this chapter Charges am DBEGIEO5 uu Rat NEAL eade Ce 112 What is Grep or Pattern Searching 24 sss e or 9 112 Recommended Books and Resources lle 112 Writine 5earehoPalttertns 4u och eho eee Sea obe io qe e pq 113 Most Characters Match Themselves 113 Escaping Special Characters 113 Wildcards Match Types of Characters 114 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 116 Matching Non Printing Characters 117 Other Special Character Classes 118 Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 118 Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 119 Creating Subpatterns 120 Using Alternation 121 The Longest Match Issue 122 Non Greedy Quantifiers 122 Writing Replacement Pa
431. x to language mappings specified in the Languages preferences If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None then the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to recognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in Mac OS X s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the Internet Config file name mappings See Chapter 10 Preferences for more details Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves the original line breaks untranslated 28 Chapter 3 Working with Files new in 6 5 Read As When opening a file you can tell BBEdit what encoding it uses Usually BBEdit will correctly auto detect the encoding but if it doesn t you can close the file and try again manually specifying the desired format Chapter 5 includes more information on encodings Using the Open Hidden Command The Open Hidden command in the File menu presents a dialog with the same appearance and behaviors as the standard Open dialog except that it shows invisible files including on Mac OS X files whose names begin with a period Using the Open Recent Command The Open Recent hierarchical submenu contains a list of files you have opened recently To open one of these files choose it from the
432. xt Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page number the name of the file and the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper Print Two Up When this option is selected BBEdit prints two pages on one sheet of paper Use this option to save paper Printing 41 42 Note 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full path name of the file being printed in the header Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date that the file was printed Print Rubber Stamp When this option is selected BBEdit prints a message in gray diagonally across the page Use the pop up menu to choose a font and type the message in the text box BBEdit chooses the right sized font to print the message If your printer supports grayscale printing BBEdit prints the rubber stamp in gray otherwise it is printed in outline style This feature is not supported by all printer drivers Chapter 3 Working with Files CHAPTER Editing Text with BBEdit This chapter describes the basics
433. y CHAPTER Important Scripting BBEdit BBEdit offers access to nearly all of its features and commands via any OSA compliant scripting language such as AppleScript or UserLand s Frontier This chapter provides a brief overview of AppleScript discusses BBEdit s scripting model and explains how you can use scripts within BBEdit An excellent way to learn how to script BBEdit is to look at the scripts others have written for it or to turn on recording in your script editor while you perform actions in BBEdit A number of example scripts are included in the Documentation folder The BBEdit Talk mailing list is also a good resource for learning more about scripting To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our Web site which offers you the option to sign up directly http www barebones com support lists html In this chapter NMerbaDaplentid sa esed oe mscr O9 rA Ea ue a ah ace d 219 Applescript Overview aa aces Seria ew hes Cee Od hase aa OPES TS 220 About Macintosh Scripting 220 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 220 Recordable Applications 221 Saving Scripts 222 Using Scripts with Applications 222 Scripting Resources 222 BBEdit and AppleScript os 23 es exa P eee AE dee Eee RE 224 Recording Scripts for BBEdit 224 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 226 Sample Scripts 230 AppleScript Pitfalls 230 Moving Scripts to BBEdit 6 231 Working with Spis iu 4s n
434. y footer button gif In File3 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif In File4 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Note Include Files An include file or just an include is a special form of placeholder whose substitution happens to be the contents of another file If you have used C or certain other programming languages you may already be familiar with the concept Using includes you can reuse standard bits of text content or HTML markup in several templates or glossary entries without having to revise all of those individual files whenever you revise the included text Simple Includes A simple include takes the following form bbinclude footer html When such an include is used in a template or glossary entry it is replaced with the contents of the specified file when the template is used to build a new document or when the glossary entry is inserted The original template or glossary file is not changed Imagine that you have ten different templates each of which contains your name address phone number email address and a copyright statement with the current year in them Rather than pasting this info into all ten templates you can create a file named address html put it in your Templates folder and include this statement bbinclude address html in each of the templates at the appropriate point Later when the new year arrives or
435. y an occurrence of the search string with the replace string Search Menu Reference 107 108 Note Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in a file with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selected text with the replace string and searches for the next occurrence of the search string Find in Next File When doing a non batch multi file search this command looks for the first occurrence of the search string in the next file Open All Matches This command opens all the files in the search set that contain at least one occurrence of the search string Find amp Replace All Matches In a multi file search and replace for which Batch Find is turned off this command finds every occurrence of the search string in every file in the search set and replaces them with the replace string When you choose this command BBEdit opens a dialog that gives you an opportunity to approve replacements Go to Line When you choose this command BBEdit opens the Go To Line dialog box Type in a line number and the frontmost text window will jump to display that line The Go To Line command honors the Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Text Views option in the Text Editing pane of the Preferences window Go to Center Line Will move the insertion point to the beginning of the middle or center line of the displayed text Go to Previous Next Error If an error browser is open t
436. y available for more information see the MacPerl web site http www macperl com On Mac OS X BBEdit integrates directly with any Unix scripting language including Perl shell scripts and any other scripting languages you install such as Python or Ruby On Mac OS X these menu items are named Unix Tools Unix Filters and Unix Scripts The Tools list contains of subset of the commands available in the Camel Shebang menu Filters are shell scripts which read the selection of the current document window as STDIN and replace the selection with STDOUT For more information about these tools please see Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Chapter 6 Working with Windows Arrange The Arrange command gives you several ways to organize BBEdit windows When you choose the Arrange command BBEdit opens the Arrange Windows dialog box Arrange Windows Arrange Windows on Main Screen Largest Screen Smallest Screen IR U Hl E jo Cancel The radio buttons at the top of the dialog specify which screen the windows will be arranged on You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen A 2 Description Stacks every window so that some part is visible no matter which window is frontmost If you select the Leave Room for Finder options in the Windows section of the Preferences dialog BBEdit leaves room along the right side or bottom of the screen for Finder i
437. y commands will advance to the next clipboard Paste never advances automatically For compatibility with international text content the clipboard window displays text in the font and size and face that it was put on the clipboard with Changing the display font in the clipboard window does not change the underlying data Basic Editing 45 46 Drag and Drop Another way to move text from one place to another is to use Macintosh Drag and Drop To use Macintosh Drag and Drop follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to move 2 Place the mouse pointer within the selected area 3 Click and hold down the mouse button 4 Drag the mouse pointer to the place you want to move the text to within the current window or another BBEdit window If you drag and drop text to another window BBEdit copies the text to that window without removing it from the original window In addition you can drag and drop an item from the Finder onto an editing window in BBEdit If the item is a text file then the file s contents are inserted If the item is a folder then a listing of the item s contents is inserted If you hold down the Command key while dragging a folder the path of the item is inserted instead Multiple Undo BBEdit provides the ability to undo multiple edits one action at a time The number of edits that may be undone is limited only by available memory The practical limitation is determined by the extent of the edits and the amo
438. y either or When it matches it runs quickly However if it is attempts to match this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it takes a long time before reporting failure 5o long in fact that it will effectively freeze BBEdit This isn t really a crash per se but left to run on its own it might take years before it finally fails We re not sure frankly because much like determining how many licks it takes to get to the center of a Tootsie Pop we don t feel like waiting long enough to find out The reason this takes so long to fail is because the string can be divided between the two repeats in a large number of ways and all have to be tried before the grep engine knows for certain that the pattern won t match The example used rather than a single character at the end because both PCRE and Perl have an optimization that allows for fast failure when a single character is used They remember the last single character that is required for a match and fail early if it is not present in the string If the pattern is changed to 2 gt D lt d gt sequences of non digits cannot be broken and failure happens quickly Advanced Grep Topics 139 140 Recursive Patterns Consider the problem of matching a string in parentheses allowing for unlimited nested balanced parentheses Without the use of recursion the best that can be done is to use a pattern that matches up to some
439. y including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder ending with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu In the Glossary Tools Stationery or any of the Scripts floating windows the Set Key button allows you to assign key equivalents to any item contained in that window You can use combinations of the Command Shift Option and Control keys plus any single other key to create such equivalents except that any equivalent must contain either the Command or Control keys or both You can also map Function keys directly to items with or without the use of a modifier Windows The Windows list displays the names of all the open windows ordered either by name or creation order or separated by window kind as determined by your preferences see Chapter 10 Document windows which correspond to text files will have a document icon shown next to them Display windows such as browsers and search results windows will not have icons next to them A diamond to the left of a window s name means that the file has been modified To bring any window to the front double click it
440. you move you only have to update one file not all ten templates You could use the YEARNUMS placeholder for the year and only need to update the include file when you move Headers and footers are probably the most common uses for include files but any template or glossary entry may use as many include statements as you wish Included files themselves may also use bbinclude directives up to 16 levels deep BBEdit looks for include files first in the same directory as the document containing the directive then in the same directory as the document into which the processed document is being inserted and finally in the HTML Templates folder specified in your preferences Persistent Includes Simple includes are appropriate for use situations where you want the inclusion to happen only once Once the file has been included however it cannot be changed in any automated fashion Since the fbbinclude directive is replaced by the included text the Update tool can t tell the included text is any different from any other text Includes become even more powerful however when you can update existing files to incorporate revised include text at a later date For example suppose you generate several dozen HTML documents using a template that uses an ffbbinclude directive to insert a standard footer containing your email address Later you change your email address After you change it in the footer document only new HTML files you create from t
441. z 18 colorz FF B B 5Font tags are not al lowed lt font gt lt p be html 4 3 Pez Each entry in the list pane corresponds to an error warning or note You can use the checkboxes for each type of item to suppress or display the associated results as desired If you click on a entry in the file list BBEdit displays the location of the error If you double click an item in the file list BBEdit opens the associated file into an editing window and selects the section of text related to the error 146 Chapter 9 Browsers CHAPTER Preferences You can use the Preferences command to customize much of BBEdit s behavior You can decide which windows are open when you launch BBEdit set the default options for windows set the default options for searches and so on This chapter describes BBEdit s extensive Preferences options In this chapter The Preferences Commande sordi iri dor ERR Ue dd e E ROO 148 Application PEClerenCes eio e huoceeieco ptg ROPA ATA ate pg de aute 149 Browser Display Freferences iu ss ze RET TW ea eee oa 150 Differences Preferences i 240s b REA HUE RAGUERPEASIER ES CERRRA 151 Editor Defaults Preferences llle 151 File Filters Preferences ccc eee eee ee n 153 Ile Search Preferences eas eye esee er ERE a 154 Ele Types Preterences i4 reus En ee aoe ea E 155 Fonts Preferences s aout fodere ducens Sea eS Qul debes eee d nct 155 ELE Settings Preferences t bSS were

BBEdit 6.5 User Manual - Colorado State University

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents